Section 15053 Common Work Results For Hvac

SECTION 15053
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

2. Transition fittings.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Mechanical sleeve seals.
5. Sleeves.
6. Escutcheons.
7. Grout.
8. HVAC demolition.
9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
10. Painting and finishing.
11. Concrete bases.
12. Supports and anchorages.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.
Mt. Pleasant Library 15053-1 4 December 2009

Allen & Shariff Engineering COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

2. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
4. Escutcheons.
B. Welding certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics

may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting
electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum
energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for HVAC installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place

concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are
concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section
"Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness
unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and
full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: [CPVC] [PVC] [CPVC and PVC] one-piece fitting with
manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one
solvent-cement-joint end.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Eslon Thermoplastics.
B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent

dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.
a. Thompson Plastics, Inc.
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, [CPVC] [PVC] [CPVC and PVC] four-part
union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.

a. NIBCO INC.
2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-
joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum

working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C).
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.

b. Central Plastics Company.
c. Eclipse, Inc.
d. Epco Sales, Inc.
e. Hart Industries, International, Inc.
f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig

(1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.

c. Epco Sales, Inc.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-
face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic
washers, and steel backing washers.
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Central Plastics Company.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig (1035-
or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F
(107 deg C).
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corp.
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225
deg F (107 deg C).
a. Perfection Corp.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Victaulic Co. of America.
2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.

b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
2. Sealing Elements: [EPDM] [NBR] <Insert other> interlocking links shaped to fit
surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: [Plastic] [Carbon steel] [Stainless steel]. Include two for each sealing
element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: [Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating] [Stainless
steel] of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for
each sealing element.
2.7 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange
for attaching to wooden forms.
2.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated

finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: [Polished chrome-plated] [Rough brass] [Polished chrome-plated and rough

brass].
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: [Polished chrome-plated] [Rough brass] [Polished chrome-plated and rough

brass].
E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With [set screw] [spring clips] [set screw or spring clips]
and chrome-plated finish.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With [concealed] [exposed-rivet] hinge, [set screw] [spring
clips] [set screw or spring clips], and chrome-plated finish.
G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.9 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HVAC DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for general
demolition requirements and procedures.
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be
removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or

plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
4. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,

remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and
quality.
3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated
finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-
brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: [One-piece] [Split-
casting] [One-piece or split-casting], cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated
finish.
g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: [One-piece, stamped-
steel type] [Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge] [One-piece,
stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge] and
set screw.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
[polished chrome-plated] [rough-brass] finish.
i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with
[concealed] [exposed-rivet] [concealed or exposed-rivet] hinge and [set screw]
[spring clips] [set screw or spring clips].
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.
k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with [set screw]
[spring clips] [set screw or spring clips].
l. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate
type.
M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof
slabs.
P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron
sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is
specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. [PVC] [Steel] Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger, penetrating gypsum-
board partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7
Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm)
annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.

T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.
3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to
pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at
final connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9 Sections

"Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.

3.7 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's

written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm)
larger in both directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use [3000-psi (20.7-MPa)] <Insert other>, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and
reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "[Cast-in-Place Concrete] [Cast-in-
Place Concrete (Limited Applications)]."
3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.9 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor
HVAC materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.10 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment
base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 15053

SECTION 15056
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to
600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment
manufacturer for field installation.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in fire
suppression equipment schedules or Sections.
B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet
(1000 m) above sea level.

Allen & Shariff Engineering COMMON MOTOR REQ FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads
at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,
and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
I. Insulation: Class F.
J. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor
frame sizes smaller than 324T.
2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection
requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,
suited to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and
tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by
pulse-width modulated inverters.
2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.
3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.

4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected
motors.
C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.
2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and
requirements of specific motor application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

SECTION 15058
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to
600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment
manufacturer for field installation.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in
HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.
B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet
(1000 m) above sea level.

Allen & Shariff Engineering COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads
at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,
and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
I. Insulation: [Class F] <Insert class>.
J. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors [15] <Insert number> HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2. Motors Smaller than [15] <Insert number> HP: Manufacturer's standard starting
characteristic.
K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes [324T] <Insert number> and larger;
rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than [324T] <Insert number>.
2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection
requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,
suited to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: [Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.]
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and
tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by
pulse-width modulated inverters.
2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected
motors.
C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.
2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and
requirements of specific motor application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.

SECTION 15061
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and
equipment:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Fiberglass pipe hangers.
4. Metal framing systems.
5. Fiberglass strut systems.
6. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
7. Fastener systems.
8. Pipe stands.
9. Pipe positioning systems.
10. Equipment supports.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
2. Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for pipe hangers for fire-suppression
piping.
3. Division 15 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides
and anchors.
4. Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."

Allen & Shariff Engineering HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING & EQUIPMENT
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.
C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval
from authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

4. Powder-actuated fastener systems.
5. Pipe positioning systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and
installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.

2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Fiberglass strut systems. Include Product Data for components.
4. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.
C. Welding certificates.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel."
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
4. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. Manufacturers:
1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.

2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports.
3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
5. Empire Industries, Inc.
6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
8. Grinnell Corp.
9. GS Metals Corp.
10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
12. PHS Industries, Inc.
13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
14. Tolco Inc.
C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.
2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels

and other components.
B. Manufacturers:

2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
3. GS Metals Corp.
4. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.
5. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
6. Tolco Inc.
7. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Description: 100-psig- (690-kPa-) minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in

sheet metal shield.
B. Manufacturers:

4. Pipe Shields, Inc.
5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.
6. Value Engineered Products, Inc.
C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.
D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.
E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.

2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete
with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hilti, Inc.
b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
d. MKT Fastening, LLC.
e. Powers Fasteners.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened

portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported
loads and building materials where used.
1. Manufacturers:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

b. Empire Industries, Inc.
c. Hilti, Inc.
d. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
e. MKT Fastening, LLC.
f. Powers Fasteners.
2.7 PIPE STAND FABRICATION
A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-

resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.
B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped
cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1. Manufacturers:
a. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.

b. MIRO Industries.
C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller, for roof
installation without membrane penetration.
1. Manufacturers:
a. MIRO Industries.
D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe
support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

1. Manufacturers:

b. MIRO Industries.
c. Portable Pipe Hangers.
2. Base: Stainless steel.

3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuous-
thread rods.
4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless-
steel, roller-type pipe support.
E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe
supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Portable Pipe Hangers.
2. Bases: One or more plastic.

3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.
4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.
5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.
F. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe support made from structural-
steel shape, continuous-thread rods, and rollers for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.
2.8 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS
A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in
pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications.
B. Manufacturers:
1. C & S Mfg. Corp.

2. HOLDRITE Corp.; Hubbard Enterprises.
3. Samco Stamping, Inc.
2.9 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel

shapes.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232
deg C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 (DN 100 to DN 400), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm)
of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4
inches (100 mm) of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24 (DN 15 to DN 600), if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 15 to
DN 100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200).
7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated

10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For
suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8 (DN 10 to DN 200).
11. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to
DN 750).
13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100
to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100
to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-
bolt to retain pipe.
16. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes,
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN 65 to DN 900), if vertical adjustment is required, with steel
pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN 25 to
DN 750), from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 20 (DN 65 to DN 500), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion
and contraction might occur.
19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN 50 to
DN 1050), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur
but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24
(DN 50 to DN 600), if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to
NPS 30 (DN 50 to DN 750), if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be
required in addition to expansion and contraction.
G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500), if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy
loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping
installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping
installations.
I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to
flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).
13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed
1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress
from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include
auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These
supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
N. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete

construction.
O. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and
waste piping for plumbing fixtures.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual
pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C. Fiberglass Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP-69 and
MSS SP-89. Install hangers and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
D. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
E. Fiberglass Strut System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled fiberglass struts.
F. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
G. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Pipe Stand Installation:
1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on
smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
2. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and
mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 7 Section "Roof
Accessories" for curbs.
I. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste
piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures"
for plumbing fixtures.
J. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
K. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
L. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
M. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
N. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)

and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is
placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
O. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
P. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.
Q. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services
piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch
(1.22 mm) thick.
b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch
(1.52 mm) thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch
(1.91 mm) thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105 inch
(2.67 mm) thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood inserts.

6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40 mm).
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05
mm).
B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.


SECTION 15062
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and
equipment:

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
4. Metal framing systems.
5. Fiberglass strut systems.
7. Fastener systems.
8. Pipe stands.
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
2. Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for pipe hangers for fire-protection piping.
3. Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment"
for vibration isolation devices.
4. Division 15 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for pipe guides
and anchors.
5. Division 15 Section(s) "[Metal Ducts] [Nonmetal Ducts]" for duct hangers and
supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."

Allen & Shariff Engineering HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

4. Powder-actuated fastener systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.

2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Fiberglass strut systems. Include Product Data for components.
4. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to [AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel."] [AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."] [AWS D1.4,
"Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."] [ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section IX.]
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
4. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
5. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
product selection:

2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. Available Manufacturers:
1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.

2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports.
5. Empire Industries, Inc.
7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
8. Grinnell Corp.
9. GS Metals Corp.
10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
14. Tolco Inc.
C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.
2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 FIBERGLASS PIPE HANGERS
A. Clevis-Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers: Similar to MSS Type 1, steel pipe hanger except hanger
is made of fiberglass and continuous-thread rod and nuts are made of [polyurethane]
[polyurethane or stainless steel] [stainless steel] <Insert other>.

b. Champion Fiberglass, Inc.
c. Cope, T. J., Inc.; Tyco International, Ltd.
d. Seasafe, Inc.
e. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
f. Wesanco, Inc.
B. Strap-Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers: Made of fiberglass loop with stainless-steel continuous-
thread rod, nuts, and support hook.
a. Plasti-Fab, Inc.
2.5 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels

and other components.

2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
3. GS Metals Corp.
4. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.
5. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
6. Tolco Inc.
7. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
2.6 FIBERGLASS STRUT SYSTEMS
A. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, similar to MFMA-3, made of

fiberglass channels and other components.

2. Champion Fiberglass, Inc.
3. Cope, T. J., Inc.; Tyco International Ltd.
4. Seasafe, Inc.
2.7 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Description: 100-psig- (690-kPa-) minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in

sheet metal shield.

4. Pipe Shields, Inc.
5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.
6. Value Engineered Products, Inc.
C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: [Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate] [Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or
ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass] [ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass] with vapor
barrier.
D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: [Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate] [Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or
ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass] [ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass].
E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.
2.8 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete
with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
a. Hilti, Inc.
b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
d. MKT Fastening, LLC.
e. Powers Fasteners.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type [zinc-coated] [stainless] steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.

b. Empire Industries, Inc.
c. Hilti, Inc.
d. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
e. MKT Fastening, LLC.
f. Powers Fasteners.
2.9 PIPE STAND FABRICATION
A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-

resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.
B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped
cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

b. MIRO Industries.
C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece [plastic] [stainless-steel] base unit with plastic roller,
for roof installation without membrane penetration.
a. MIRO Industries.
D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe
support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

b. MIRO Industries.
c. Portable Pipe Hangers.
2. Base: [Plastic] [Stainless steel].

3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuous-
thread rods.
4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless-
steel, roller-type pipe support.

E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe
supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
a. Portable Pipe Hangers.
2. Bases: One or more plastic.

3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.
4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.
5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.
F. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe support made from structural-
steel shape, continuous-thread rods, and rollers for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel

shapes.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232
deg C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 (DN 100 to DN 400), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm)
of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4
inches (100 mm) of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24 (DN 15 to DN 600), if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 15 to
DN 100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated
8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated
10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For
suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8 (DN 10 to DN 200).
11. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to
DN 750).
13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100
to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100
to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-
bolt to retain pipe.
16. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes,
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN 65 to DN 900), if vertical adjustment is required, with steel
pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN 25 to
DN 750), from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 20 (DN 65 to DN 500), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion
and contraction might occur.
19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN 50 to
DN 1050), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur
but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24
(DN 50 to DN 600), if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to
NPS 30 (DN 50 to DN 750), if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be
required in addition to expansion and contraction.
G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500), if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy
loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping
installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping
installations.
I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to
flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).
13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed
1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress
from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include
auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These
supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not

M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
N. Use [powder-actuated fasteners] [or] [mechanical-expansion anchors] instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual
pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C. Fiberglass Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP-69 and
MSS SP-89. Install hangers and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
D. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
E. Fiberglass Strut System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled fiberglass struts.
F. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
G. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Pipe Stand Installation:
1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on
smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

2. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and
mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 7 Section "Roof
Accessories" for curbs.
I. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
J. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
K. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
L. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
M. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, [NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)]
<Insert other> and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before
concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of
inserts.
N. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
O. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building
services piping) are not exceeded.
P. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and
ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.


4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch
(1.22 mm) thick.
b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch
(1.52 mm) thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch
(1.91 mm) thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105 inch
(2.67 mm) thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood inserts.

6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to [1-1/2 inches (40 mm)]
<Insert other>.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05
mm).
B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 [painting Sections.] [Section
"High-Performance Coatings."]
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

SECTION 15071
MECHANICAL VIBRATION ISOLATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Elastomeric isolation pads and mounts.

2. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
3. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.
4. Housed spring mounts.
5. Elastomeric hangers.
6. Spring hangers.
7. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.
8. Thrust limits.
9. Pipe riser resilient supports.
10. Resilient pipe guides.
11. Restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails.
12. Steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include load deflection curves for each vibration isolation device.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following:
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for
designing vibration isolation bases.
2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion
and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring
deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been
examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and
rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment,
and cantilever loads.

Allen & Shariff Engineering MECHANICAL VIBRATION ISOLATION
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel."
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
3. Mason Industries, Inc.
4. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
5. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc.
6. Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund.
B. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in
single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized steel baseplates of
sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match
requirements of supported equipment.
1. Material: Standard neoprene.

2. Durometer Rating: 40.
3. Number of Layers: 2.
C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, rubber
isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 100 psig.
6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw
to fasten and level equipment.
D. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.
1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint.

2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.
3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel before contacting
a resilient collar.
E. Elastomeric Hangers: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene

isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-
code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
F. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert
in compression.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced
cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
G. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes
separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick, 60-durometer neoprene. Include steel and neoprene
vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a
maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.
H. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-
inch- thick, 60-durometer neoprene. Factory set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical
motion due to pipe expansion and contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to
allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location
requirements.

2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Available Manufacturers:
B. Manufacturers:
1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
3. Mason Industries, Inc.
4. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
5. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc.
6. Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund.
C. Steel Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails.
1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide
bases or rails. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.
2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.
3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation
mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
D. Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for field-applied,
cast-in-place concrete.
1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide
bases or rails. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.
2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.
3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation
mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors
in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported
equipment manufacturer.
2.4 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment

before shipping.
1. Powder coating on springs and housings.

2. All hardware shall be electrogalvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for
exterior use.
3. Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use.

4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate
capacity range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for
compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations as specified in Division 7 Section
"Roof Accessories."
3.3 EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 3000-psi concrete; trowel to a
smooth finish.
1. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to supported equipment

manufacturer's written instructions.
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
6. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.
B. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

C. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation devices. Remove paint
splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.
3.6 VIBRATION ISOLATOR SCHEDULE
A. Provide vibration isolators for equipment per following schedule. Isolator manufacturer shall
verify that static deflection indicated is appropriate.
BASE ISOLATOR STATIC

EQUIPMENT TYPE TYPE DEFL
Chilled Water & Condenser Water BIB FSN 1.5"

Pumps
Heating Water Pumps
Chiller
Boiler
Fans (Suspended) --- HN ---

Up to 1-1/2 HP
Cooling Tower
Floor Mounted Air Handling Unit
AHU-1
Hydronic Piping 4” and over --- HS 1.0”

(first 20 feet from pump)
Hydronic Piping under 4” --- HN ---
ABBREVATIONS:
BIB Base-inertia base

FSN Floor spring and neoprene
FSNTL Floor spring and neoprene travel limited
FN Floor neoprene
NP Neoprene pad
DNP Double neoprene pad

HS Hanger spring
HSN Hanger spring and neoprene
HN Hanger neoprene
BSR Base steel rail
BSF Base steel frame
BL Base curb

SECTION 15076
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Stencils.
5. Valve tags.
6. Warning tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed
content for each label.
D. Valve numbering scheme.
E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

Allen & Shariff Engineering IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) Stainless steel, 0.025-inch (0.64-
mm) Aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or
stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830
mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black.
3. Background Color: White.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch

(A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers
where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section
number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in
operation and maintenance data.
2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16
inch (1.6 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.
C. Background Color: White.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2
by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and
proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-
thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
instructions.
2.3 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate

both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.
2.4 STENCILS
A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum letter
height of 3/4 inch (19 mm) for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar
operational instructions.
1. Stencil Material: Aluminum.

2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint
may be in pressurized spray-can form.

3. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless
otherwise indicated.
2.5 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system
abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.
1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or
stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate
valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve
(room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.6 WARNING TAGS
A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card

stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches (75 by 133 mm) minimum.

2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO
NOT OPERATE."
4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 9 Section "."
B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe
labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded bands or
rectangles on each piping system.
1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.
C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Domestic Water Piping:
a. Background Color: White.

b. Letter Color: Green.
2. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:
a. Background Color: White.

b. Letter Color: Black.
3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering
hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List
tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round.
b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round.
2. Valve-Tag Color:
a. Cold Water: Green.

b. Hot Water: Green.
3. Letter Color:
a. Cold Water: White.

b. Hot Water: White.
3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.

SECTION 15077
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Duct labels.
5. Stencils.
6. Valve tags.
7. Warning tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed
content for each label.
D. Valve numbering scheme.
E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

Allen & Shariff Engineering IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: [Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm)] [Stainless steel, 0.025-inch

(0.64-mm)] [Aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm)] [or] [anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch
(0.8-mm)] minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment
hardware.
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel [rivets] [rivets or self-tapping screws] [self-tapping screws].
B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
[1/16 inch (1.6 mm)] [1/8 inch (3.2 mm)] <Insert dimension> thick, and having
predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: [Black] [Blue] [Red] [White] [Yellow] <Insert color>.
3. Background Color: [Black] [Blue] [Red] [White] [Yellow] <Insert color>.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel [rivets] [rivets or self-tapping screws] [self-tapping screws].
C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch

(A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers
where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section
number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in
operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, [1/16
inch (1.6 mm)] [1/8 inch (3.2 mm)] <Insert dimension> thick, and having predrilled holes for
attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: [Black] [Blue] [Red] [White] [Yellow] <Insert color>.
C. Background Color: [Black] [Blue] [Red] [White] [Yellow] <Insert color>.
by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel [rivets] [rivets or self-tapping screws] [self-tapping screws].
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
instructions.
2.3 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to [partially cover] [cover full]
circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate

both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2.4 DUCT LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, [1/16
inch (1.6 mm)] [1/8 inch (3.2 mm)] <Insert dimension> thick, and having predrilled holes for
attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: [Black] [Blue] [Red] [White] [Yellow] <Insert color>.
C. Background Color: [Black] [Blue] [Red] [White] [Yellow] <Insert color>.
by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel [rivets] [rivets or self-tapping screws] [self-tapping screws].
I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.
2.5 STENCILS
A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter
height of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch (19 mm) for
access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.
1. Stencil Material: [Aluminum] [Brass] [Fiberboard] [Fiberboard or metal] <Insert

material>.
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, [alkyd enamel] [acrylic enamel] <Insert paint type>
black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, [alkyd enamel] [acrylic enamel] <Insert paint type> in
colors according to ASME A13.1 unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system
abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.
1. Tag Material: [Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm)] [Stainless steel, 0.025-inch (0.64-mm)]

[Aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm)] [or] [anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm)]
minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass [wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook] [wire-link chain] [beaded
chain] [S-hook].

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate
valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve
(room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.7 WARNING TAGS
A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card

stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: [3 by 5-1/4 inches (75 by 133 mm) minimum] [Approximately 4 by 7 inches

(100 by 178 mm)] <Insert size>.
2. Fasteners: [Brass grommet and wire] [Reinforced grommet and wire or string].
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO
NOT OPERATE."
4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 9 Section "[Interior Painting]

[High-Performance Coatings]."
B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe
labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels [with painted, color-coded bands or
rectangles] [, complying with ASME A13.1,] on each piping system.
1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of [50 feet (15 m)] <Insert dimension> along each run.
Reduce intervals to [25 feet (7.6 m)] <Insert dimension> in areas of congested piping
and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Chilled-Water Piping:
a. Background Color: [Black] [Blue] [Red] [White] [Yellow] <Insert color>.

b. Letter Color: [Black] [Blue] [Red] [White] [Yellow] <Insert color>.
2. Condenser-Water Piping:

3. Heating Water Piping:

4. Refrigerant Piping:

3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install [plastic-laminated] [self-adhesive] duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in
the following color codes:
1. Blue: For cold-air supply ducts.

2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts.
3. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.
4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.

B. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels, showing service and flow direction, may be
provided instead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1
inch (25 mm) high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location
of required identification.
C. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of
[50 feet (15 m)] <Insert dimension> in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by
removable ceiling system.
3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering
hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use
fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a. Chilled Water: [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)], [round] [square]
<Insert shape>.
b. Condenser Water: [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)], [round] [square]
<Insert shape>.
c. Refrigerant: [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)], [round] [square]
<Insert shape>.
d. Hot Water: [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)], [round] [square]
<Insert shape>.
e. Gas: [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)], [round] [square] <Insert
shape>.
2. Valve-Tag Color:
a. Chilled Water: [Natural] [Green] <Insert color>.

b. Condenser Water: [Natural] [Green] <Insert color>.
c. Refrigerant: [Natural] [Green] <Insert color>.
d. Hot Water: [Natural] [Green] <Insert color>.
e. Gas: [Natural] [Yellow] <Insert color>.
3. Letter Color:
a. Chilled Water: [Black] [White] <Insert color>.

b. Condenser Water: [Black] [White] <Insert color>.
c. Refrigerant: [Black] [White] <Insert color>.
d. Hot Water: [Black] [White] <Insert color>.
e. Gas: [Black] [White] <Insert color>.

3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.

SECTION 15081
FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Calcium silicate.
b. Cellular glass.
c. Flexible elastomeric.
d. Mineral fiber.
e. Phenolic.
f. Polyisocyanurate.
g. Polyolefin.
h. Polystyrene.
2. Insulating cements.
3. Adhesives.
4. Mastics.
5. Lagging adhesives.
6. Sealants.
7. Factory-applied jackets.
8. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.
9. Field-applied cloths.
10. Field-applied jackets.
11. Tapes.
12. Securements.
13. Corner angles.
1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Insulation."

2. Division 15 Section "HVAC Insulation."

Allen & Shariff Engineering FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS INSULATION
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and
jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement
of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.
3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each
type of insulation.
5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
6. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
8. Detail field application for fire-suppression water storage tanks.
D. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing
product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50).
2. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square.
3. Jacket Materials for Pipe: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50).
4. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square.
5. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range
of colors available for each type of finish material.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer
F. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests and test methods employed.
G. Field quality-control reports.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label
insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and cement material containers, with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish
listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups in the
location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Use materials indicated for the
completed Work.
1. Piping Mockups:
a. One 10-foot (3-m) section of NPS 2 (DN 50) straight pipe.

b. One each of a 90-degree threaded, welded, and flanged elbow.
c. One each of a threaded, welded, and flanged tee fitting.
d. One NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller valve, and one NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) or larger valve.
e. Four support hangers including hanger shield and insert.
f. One threaded strainer and one flanged strainer with removable portion of
insulation.
g. One threaded reducer and one welded reducer.
h. One pressure temperature tap.
i. One mechanical coupling.
2. Equipment Mockups:
a. One tank or vessel.
3. For each mockup, fabricate cutaway sections to allow observation of application details
for insulation materials, adhesives, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
4. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.
6. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
7. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
8. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields.
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and
equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop
Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-
applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be
applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F. Calcium Silicate:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following provide one of
the following:
a. Industrial Insulation Group (The); Thermo-12 Gold.
2. Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible,

inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply
with ASTM C 533, Type I.

3. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for
dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.
G. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,
hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-
Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following
a. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF.

b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.
2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.

3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1.
6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552,
Type II, Class 2.
7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
H. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.

b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.
I. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket
requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.

b. Johns Manville; Microlite.
c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.
J. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For equipment applications, provide
insulation with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in
"Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.

b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.

c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.
d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.
f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
K. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.

b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
c. Knauf Insulation; 1000(Pipe Insulation).
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied
ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"
Article.
3. Type II, 1200 deg F (649 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A, with factory-applied
ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"
Article.
L. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393,
Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal
density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m) or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F (55
deg C) is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.042 W/m x K) or less. Factory-applied jacket
a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap.

b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex.
c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex.
e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.
M. Polyolefin: Unicellular, polyethylene thermal plastic insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534 or
ASTM C 1427, Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials and Type II, Grade 1 for sheet materials.
a. Armacell LLC; Tubolit.

b. Nomaco Inc.; IMCOLOCK, IMCOSHEET, NOMALOCK, and NOMAPLY.
c. RBX Corporation; Therma-cell.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I.

b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.
B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.
a. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Thermal-V-Kote.
C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with

ASTM C 449/C 449M.
a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.

b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote.
c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service temperature

range of 50 to 800 deg F (10 to 427 deg C).
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-97.

b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-27/81-93.
c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 290.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-30.
e. Vimasco Corporation; 760.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, Polyisocyanurate, and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based resin

adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F (minus 59 to plus 149
deg C).

b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33.
D. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.

b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.
c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.
d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.
E. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
F. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,
Grade A, for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient
services.

c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50.
f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at
43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C).
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.

c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15.
f. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms (2 metric perms) at 0.0625-inch (1.6-

mm) dry film thickness.
4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
2.5 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, and Polyisocyanurate Products: Subject to

compliance with requirements, provide the following:

e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
5. Color: White or gray.
6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8.


3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
5. Color: Aluminum.
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

b. Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.

5. Color: White.
2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

4. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- (0.10-mm-) thick, white PVDC biaxially
oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms (0.013 metric perms) when tested
according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed
index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and
Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.
5. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick, white PVDC biaxially
6. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based

adhesive covered by a removable protective strip.
2.7 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Pipe Insulation: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. (68 g/sq. m) with a
thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm) for covering
pipe and pipe fittings.
a. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
B. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Equipment Insulation: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd. (203 g/sq. m)
with a thread count of 5 strands by 5 strands/sq. inch (2 strands by 2 strands/sq. mm) for
covering equipment.
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Chil-Glas No. 5.
C. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. (34 g/sq. m) with a thread count of 10
strands by 10 strands/sq. inch (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm), in a Leno weave.

a. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; Mast-A-Fab.

b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
2.8 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a
minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (271 g/sq. m).
a. Alpha Associates, Inc.; Alpha-Maritex 84215 and 84217/9485RW, Luben 59.
2.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,

Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.
Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
a. Johns Manville; Zeston.

b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.
d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

3. Color: White.
4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and
supply covers for lavatories.
5. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.
2.10 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.

b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.

c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.
d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm).

3. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm).
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;

c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK.
d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive.
Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

b. Compac Corp.; 130.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape.
d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.

3. Thickness: 6 mils (0.15 mm).
D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF.

d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.

E. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape.

3. Film Thickness: 4 mils (0.10 mm).
4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils (0.04 mm).
5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent.
2.11 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
a. Childers Products; Bands.

b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.
c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304; 0.015 inch (0.38
mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with closed seal.
3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005;
Temper H-14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with closed seal.
4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept
metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to

projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in
position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T.

2) GEMCO; Perforated Base.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.

b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick
by 2 inches (50 mm) square.
c. Spindle: Aluminum, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length
to suit depth of insulation indicated.
d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without
damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
2. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is

capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when
self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series TSA.

2) GEMCO; Press and Peel.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick.
b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 2 inches
(50 mm) square.
c. Spindle: Aluminum, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length
to suit depth of insulation indicated.
d. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.
3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-

) thick, aluminum sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely
in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.

2) GEMCO; R-150.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.
b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel
or Monel.
D. Wire: 0.080-inch (2.0-mm) nickel-copper alloy.

following:
a. C & F Wire.
b. Childers Products.
c. PABCO Metals Corporation.
d. RPR Products, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a
corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils (0.127 mm)
thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils (0.127 mm) thick if operating in a temperature range
between 140 and 300 deg F (60 and 149 deg C). Consult coating manufacturer for
appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300
deg F (0 and 149 deg C) with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for
C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and
specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as
insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both
edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to
maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal
patches similar to butt joints.
P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,
install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal
joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below
top of roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Below-Grade Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush

with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at
least 2 inches (50 mm).
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems"

for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 7
Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
3.5 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including
contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end
joints.
3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides
of tanks and vessels as follows:
a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.

b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service
temperature and with substrate.
c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches (75 mm) from
insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. in both directions.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks
and vessels.
f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.
g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band
material compatible with insulation materials.
6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and
where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing
insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut
with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around
equipment approximately 6 inches (150 mm) from each end. Install wire or cable
between two circumferential girdles 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. Install a wire ring around
each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft
cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional

circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48
inches (1200 mm) o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.
7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches (75 mm).
8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,
handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection.
9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and
nameplates.
10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends,
joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation
over entire surface of tanks and vessels.
1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive.
2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.
3.6 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for
above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION."
Match size and color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,
and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the
connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing
sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-
steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide
the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over
adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover
and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating
cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a
smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.7 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals

and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches (75
mm). Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals. Secure outer
layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals.
3. Apply a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to insulation surface. When
cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth
or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch (25 mm). Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive
over glass cloth or tape. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of same material and
thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Finish flange insulation same as pipe insulation.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed insulation sections of insulation are not available, install mitered
sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
3. Finish fittings insulation same as pipe insulation.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation
to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
2. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3. Finish valve and specialty insulation same as pipe insulation.
3.8 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without
deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and applicable insulation joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of
same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least
1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant.
available.
2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of
cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.

2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
3.9 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as
pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
3.10 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.

3.11 PHENOLIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:

mm). Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) wire spaced at 12-inch (300-mm)
intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals.
B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders on below ambient
services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as
recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and
flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

D. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of pipe

insulation.
E. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

insulation.
3.12 POLYISOCYANURATE INSULATION INSTALLATION

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with tape or bands and tighten without deforming
insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3 and 9 o'clock
positions on the pipe.
2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal
tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor
barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-barrier
system.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, same
thickness of adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) thickness.
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyisocyanurate block insulation of
C. Insulation Installation on Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation.
1. Install preformed sections of polyisocyanurate insulation to valve body.

3.13 POLYOLEFIN INSULATION INSTALLATION
1. Seal split-tube longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being
insulated.

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyolefin sheet insulation of same

1. Install mitered sections of polyolefin pipe insulation.

1. Install cut sections of polyolefin pipe and sheet insulation to valve body.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's
3.14 POLYSTYRENE INSULATION INSTALLATION
1. Secure each layer of insulation with tape or bands and tighten bands without deforming
system.

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polystyrene block insulation of same

insulation.
1. Install preformed section of polystyrene insulation to valve body.


3.15 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.
1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of lagging adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-mm-)
wide joint strips at end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation
with vapor-barrier mastic.
C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and
end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams
and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with
weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-
steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.
E. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe
insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.
2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end
overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate
overlap at butt joint of 2 inches (50 mm) over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using
adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around
overlapped butt joint.
3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply
adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer
to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge
to maintain a permanent bond.
4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with
an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches (850 mm) or less. The 33-1/2-inch- (850-mm-)
circumference limit allows for 2-inch- (50-mm-) overlap seal. Using the length of roll
allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap

seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to
secure joint.
5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and
wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.
3.16 FINISHES
A. Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material:
Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket
material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-

applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of
inspection shall be limited to one Insert number location(s) for each type of equipment
defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove
only a portion adequate to determine compliance.
2. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing
field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent
of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of
threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers,
two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations
of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule,
General" Article.
D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements.

3.18 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for
a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.
C. Fire-suppression water storage tank insulation shall be the following:
1. Cellular Glass: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.

2. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
3. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1 inch (25 mm) thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. (32-kg/cu. m) nominal
density.
4. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
3.19 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Indoor fire-suppression piping.

2. Underground piping.
3.20 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Indoor Engine Coolant Piping for Remote Radiator of Engine-Driven Fire Pump:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Calcium Silicate: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.

b. Cellular Glass: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
c. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I or II: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
3.21 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the
field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Piping, Concealed:
1. None.
2. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.
3. Painted Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.

4. Stainless Steel, Type 304,: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.
D. Piping, Exposed:
1. None.

SECTION 15082
PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
a. Calcium silicate.
b. Cellular glass.
c. Flexible elastomeric.
d. Mineral fiber.
3. Adhesives.
4. Sealants.
9. Tapes.
10. Securements.
11. Corner angles.
1. Division 15 Section " Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation."

2. Division 15 Section "HVAC Insulation."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittal:

Allen & Shariff Engineering PLUMBING INSULATION
of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings:
type of insulation.
5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access
panels.
8. Detail field application for each equipment type.
D. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing
product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:
1. Sample Sizes:
a. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50).
b. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square.
c. Jacket Materials for Pipe: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50).
d. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square.
e. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full
range of colors available for each type of finish material.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
F. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having


insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with

C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish
listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups in the
location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Use materials indicated for the
completed Work.
1. Piping Mockups:
a. One 10-foot (3-m) section of NPS 2 (DN 50) straight pipe.

b. One each of a 90-degree threaded, welded, and flanged elbow.
c. One each of a threaded, welded, and flanged tee fitting.
d. One NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller valve, and one NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) or larger valve.
e. Four support hangers including hanger shield and insert.
f. One threaded strainer and one flanged strainer with removable portion of
insulation.
g. One threaded reducer and one welded reducer.
h. One pressure temperature tap.
i. One mechanical coupling.
2. Equipment Mockups: One tank or vessel.

3. For each mockup, fabricate cutaway sections to allow observation of application details
for insulation materials, adhesives, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
4. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.
6. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
7. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
8. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and
equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop

Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-
applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
1.7 SCHEDULING
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
applied.
process.
F. Calcium Silicate:
a. Industrial Insulation Group (The); Thermo-12 Gold.
2. Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible,

inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply
with ASTM C 533, Type I.
3. Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous
calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533,
Type I.
4. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for
dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.

G. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,
hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following available

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF.

b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.
2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.

3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1.
6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552,
Type II, Class 2.
7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
H. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

I. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket

J. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

c. Knauf Insulation; 1000(Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied
ASJ with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in
"Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
K. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393,
Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal
density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m) or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F (55
deg C) is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.042 W/m x K) or less. Factory-applied jacket


B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.
a. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Thermal-V-Kote.
C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with

ASTM C 449/C 449M.
a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.

b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote.
c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.
2.3 ADHESIVES

B. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service temperature
range of 50 to 800 deg F (10 to 427 deg C).

C. Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, Polyisocyanurate, and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based resin

adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F (minus 59 to plus 149
deg C).

D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.


F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone.

b. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.
c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.
d. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.
2.4 MASTICS
services.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at
43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.
5. Color: White.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.


2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.03 metric perm) at 35-mil (0.9-
3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C).
5. Color: White.
D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Encacel.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.033 metric perm) at 30-mil (0.8-
5. Color: White.
E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms (2 metric perms) at 0.0625-inch (1.6-

5. Color: White.
2.5 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:

compliance with requirements, provide the following:


2. Joint Sealants for Polystyrene Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide the following:




5. Color: Aluminum.

5. Color: White.



4. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- (0.10-mm-) thick, white PVDC biaxially

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Pipe Insulation: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. (68 g/sq. m) with a
thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm) for covering
pipe and pipe fittings.
B. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Equipment Insulation: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd. (203 g/sq. m)
with a thread count of 5 strands by 5 strands/sq. inch (2 strands by 2 strands/sq. mm) for
covering equipment.

C. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. (34 g/sq. m) with a thread count of 10
strands by 10 strands/sq. inch (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm), in a Leno weave, for equipment
and pipe.

minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (271 g/sq. m).
B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,



3. Color: White.
C. Underground Direct-Buried Jacket: 125-mil- (3.2-mm-) thick vapor barrier and waterproofing
membrane consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a woven-glass fiber or
polyester scrim and laminated aluminum foil.

a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittwrap.
b. Polyguard; Insulrap No Torch 125.
2.10 TAPES






3. Thickness: 6 mils (0.15 mm).


E. PVDC Tape: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.

3. Film Thickness: 4 mils (0.10 mm).
4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils (0.04 mm).
2.11 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304; 0.015 inch (0.38
mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with closed seal.
3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005;
Temper H-14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with closed seal.

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for

capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth
of insulation indicated.
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.

2) GEMCO; CD.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.
2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully

annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length
to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) galvanized carbon-
steel washer.

2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.

requirements:

b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick
by 2 inches (50 mm) square.
c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-
(2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened

to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely
in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:

1) GEMCO; Nylon Hangers.
2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers.
b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38
mm) in diameter.
c. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of
insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches (63 mm).


b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 2 inches
(50 mm) square.
c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-
(2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
6. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-

) thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation
securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.

2) GEMCO; R-150.
7. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-

(0.41-mm-) thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation
securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.
1) GEMCO.
2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel
or Monel.
D. Wire: 0.080-inch (2.0-mm) nickel-copper alloy.

following:
a. C & F Wire.
2.12 CORNER ANGLES
A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils (0.8 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm), PVC
according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.
B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm),
aluminum according to ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005;
Temper H-14.
C. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25
mm), stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
defects.
3.2 PREPARATION
1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils (0.127 mm)
thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils (0.127 mm) thick if operating in a temperature range

between 140 and 300 deg F (60 and 149 deg C). Consult coating manufacturer for
deg F (0 and 149 deg C) with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for
free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and
specialties.
for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
dry state.



2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as
insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both
edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.
ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
thickness.
Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal
patches similar to butt joints.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4 PENETRATIONS

penetrations.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below
top of roof flashing.
B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush



least 2 inches (50 mm).

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.


A. Mineral Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation
with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
joints.


c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches (75 mm) from
insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. in both directions.
and vessels.
facing.
equipment approximately 6 inches (150 mm) from each end. Install wire or cable
between two circumferential girdles 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. Install a wire ring around
each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft
cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional
circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48
inches (1200 mm) o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.
7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches (75 mm).
nameplates.

adhesive.
C. Insulation Installation on Pumps:
1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box
joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt
flanges on 6-inch (150-mm) centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch- (10-mm-)
diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a
latching mechanism.

2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick.
3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations.
Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.
adhesive.
insulating cement.
barrier.

sealant.
following:
insulation.
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over
adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover
and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating
cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a
smooth finish.
3.7 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Domestic Water Boiler Breechings:

and tighten bands without deforming insulation material.
3. On exposed applications without metal jacket, finish insulation surface with a skim coat
of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement. When cement is dry, apply flood coat of
lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth. Overlap edges at least 1 inch (25
mm). Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth. Thin finish coat to achieve
smooth, uniform finish.


3. Apply a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to insulation surface. When
cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth
or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch (25 mm). Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive
over glass cloth or tape. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish.

4. Finish flange insulation same as pipe insulation.
available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When preformed insulation sections of insulation are not available, install mitered
sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
3. Finish fittings insulation same as pipe insulation.
1. Install mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation
to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Finish valve and specialty insulation same as pipe insulation.
3.8 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of
available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of
cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.


pipe insulation.

available.


available.
available.
valve body.

3.11 PHENOLIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:

mm). Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) wire spaced at 12-inch (300-mm)
intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders on below ambient
services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as
recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and
flashing sealant.


insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.12 POLYISOCYANURATE INSULATION INSTALLATION

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with tape or bands and tighten without deforming
system.

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyisocyanurate block insulation of
C. Insulation Installation on Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation.

Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install preformed sections of polyisocyanurate insulation to valve body.

3.13 POLYOLEFIN INSULATION INSTALLATION
1. Seal split-tube longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being
insulated.

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyolefin sheet insulation of same

1. Install mitered sections of polyolefin pipe insulation.

1. Install cut sections of polyolefin pipe and sheet insulation to valve body.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's
3.14 POLYSTYRENE INSULATION INSTALLATION
1. Secure each layer of insulation with tape or bands and tighten bands without deforming
system.

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polystyrene block insulation of same

1. Install preformed section of polystyrene insulation to valve body.


1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of lagging adhesive.

4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-mm-)
wide joint strips at end joints.
C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and
end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of
tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams
and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with
weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-
steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.
overlap at butt joint of 2 inches (50 mm) over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using
adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around
an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches (850 mm) or less. The 33-1/2-inch- (850-mm-)
circumference limit allows for 2-inch- (50-mm-) overlap seal. Using the length of roll

allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap
seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to
secure joint.
3.16 FINISHES
A. Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material:
Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the
"Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion
adequate to determine compliance.
General" Article.
D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals

C. Domestic water pump insulation shall be the following:

2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1 inch (25 mm) thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. (32-kg/cu. m) nominal
density.
D. Domestic water, domestic chilled-water (potable), and domestic hot-water hydropneumatic tank
insulation shall be[ one of] the following:
1. Cellular Glass: [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick.

2. Flexible Elastomeric: [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick.
3. Mineral-Fiber Board: [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick and [2-lb/cu. ft. (32-
kg/cu. m)] [3-lb/cu. ft. (48-kg/cu. m)] [6-lb/cu. ft. (96-kg/cu. m)] nominal density.
4. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick.
5. Phenolic: [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick.
6. Polyisocyanurate: [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick.
7. Polyolefin: [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick.
E. Domestic water storage tank insulation shall be[ one of] the following:
1. Cellular Glass: [2 inches (50 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick.

2. Flexible Elastomeric: [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick.
3. Mineral-Fiber Board: [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick and [2-lb/cu. ft. (32-
kg/cu. m)] [3-lb/cu. ft. (48-kg/cu. m)] [6-lb/cu. ft. (96-kg/cu. m)] nominal density.
4. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick.
5. Phenolic: [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick.
6. Polyisocyanurate: [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick.
7. Polyolefin: [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick.
F. Piping system filter-housing insulation shall be the following:

2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. (32-kg/cu. m) nominal
density.
3. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.

3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
A. Domestic Cold Water:
1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.

b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.
c. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.
2. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:

b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
c. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:
1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:

C. Stormwater and Overflow:

D. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies:


E. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing
Fixtures for People with Disabilities:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.

b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.
F. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F (16 Deg C):

G. Floor Drains, Traps, and Sanitary Drain Piping within 10 Feet (3 m) of Drain Receiving
Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F (16 Deg C):

C. Equipment, Concealed:
1. None.
2. PVC: 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick.
D. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches (1200 mm) in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72

Inches (1800 mm):
1. None.

E. Piping, Concealed:
1. None.
F. Piping, Exposed:
1. None.
3.22 UNDERGROUND, FIELD-INSTALLED INSULATION JACKET
A. For underground direct-buried piping applications, install underground direct-buried jacket over
insulation material.

SECTION 15083
HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
a. Flexible elastomeric.
b. Mineral fiber.
3. Adhesives.
4. Mastics.
5. Lagging adhesives.
6. Sealants.
11. Tapes.
12. Securements.
13. Corner angles.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 15 Section "Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation."
2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Insulation."
3. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittal:
of VOC content.

Allen & Shariff Engineering HVAC INSULATION
C. Shop Drawings:
type of insulation.
5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access
panels.
8. Detail field application for each equipment type.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
F. Field quality-control reports.


insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with


B. Protect stored on-site insulation materials from moisture damage.

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct
Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation
application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain
clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and
for space required for maintenance.
1.7 SCHEDULING
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
applied.
process.
F. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials with UV protective

coating. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet
materials.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:


G. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK
jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

H. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide
insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. For equipment applications, provide insulation with
factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.

b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.
d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.
f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
I. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

c. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation.
2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-
applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
J. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe Insulation Wicking System: Preformed pipe insulation complying with
ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with absorbent cloth factory applied to the entire inside surface
of preformed pipe insulation and extended through the longitudinal joint to outside surface of
insulation under insulation jacket. Factory apply a white, polymer, vapor-retarder jacket with
self-sealing adhesive tape seam and evaporation holes running continuously along the
longitudinal seam, exposing the absorbent cloth.

a. Knauf Insulation; Permawick Pipe Insulation.

b. Owens Corning; VaporWick Pipe Insulation.
K. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied FSK jacket complying with
ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612,
Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100
deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are
specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


2.3 ADHESIVES
B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.

b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.
c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.
d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.
C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone.

b. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.
c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.
d. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.
2.4 MASTICS
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content complying with the
requirements of SCAQMD rule 1168.
services.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film
thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
5. Color: White.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.
5. Color: White.
D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Encacel.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness.
5. Color: White.
E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.


2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.

5. Color: White.
2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content complying with
the requirements of SCAQMD rule 1168.

3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-
resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.
5. Color: White.
2.6 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:

compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

2. Joint Sealants for Polystyrene Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide one of the following:



7. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content complying with the
requirements of SCAQMD rule #1168.


5. Color: Aluminum.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

5. Color: White.
6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content complying with the
requirements of SCAQMD rule 1168.



4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing;
5. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented
barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and
with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according
to ASTM E 84.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

6. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented
barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and
with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according
to ASTM E 84.



8. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to
ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Pipe Insulation: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count
of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch for covering pipe and pipe fittings.


B. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Duct and Equipment Insulation: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd.
with a thread count of 5 strands by 5 strands/sq. inch for covering equipment.

C. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10
strands/sq. inch, in a Leno weave, for duct, equipment, and pipe.

minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,



3. Color: White.

D. Metal Jacket:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems.

b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit.
c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.
2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005,
Temper H-14.
a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.

b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene
and kraft paper.
d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded
polyethylene and kraft paper.
e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.

2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius
elbows.
3) Tee covers.
4) Flange and union covers.
5) End caps.
6) Beveled collars.
7) Valve covers.
8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not
available.
3. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M.
a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.

b. Material, finish, and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene
and kraft paper.
d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded
polyethylene and kraft paper.
e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.

2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius
elbows.
3) Tee covers.

4) Flange and union covers.
5) End caps.
6) Beveled collars.
7) Valve covers.
8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not
available.
E. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil- thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing
membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a
rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white
aluminum-foil facing.

a. Polyguard; Alumaguard 60.
F. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film
with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread
index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

a. Dow Chemical Company (The), Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film.
G. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier
film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-
spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

a. Dow Chemical Company (The), Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.
H. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive

covered by a removable protective strip.

a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560
Vapor Retarder Film.
2.11 TAPES


2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

2. Width: 3 inches.

2. Width: 2 inches.
3. Thickness: 6 mils.

2. Width: 2 inches.
E. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.

2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Film Thickness: 4 mils.
4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils.
F. PVDC Tape for Outdoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.

2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Film Thickness: 6 mils.
4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils.
2.12 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015
inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal.

3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch
thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for

capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of
insulation indicated.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

2) GEMCO; CD.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.

annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit
depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.

2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.

requirements:

b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches

square.
c. Spindle: Aluminum, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit
depth of insulation indicated.
4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened

to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely

in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
1) GEMCO; Nylon Hangers.

2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers.
b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
c. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation
indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches.


b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

c. Spindle: Aluminum, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit
depth of insulation indicated.
6. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick,

aluminum sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place
but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

2) GEMCO; R-150.
7. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-

thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place
but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

1) GEMCO.
2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.
C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.
D. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy.

following:
a. C & F Wire.
2.13 CORNER ANGLES
A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.
B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to
ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.
C. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according
to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or 316.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
defects.
3.2 PREPARATION

1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an
epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F.
Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods
for operating temperature range.
deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating
materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including
fittings, valves, and specialties.
for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system
schedules.
dry state.



2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
thickness.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4 PENETRATIONS

penetrations.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of
roof flashing.
B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush



least 2 inches.

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper
sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated.
For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves
and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation.
Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.
A. Mineral Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation
with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

joints.

c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end
joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions.
and vessels.
facing.
equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two
circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around
outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the
wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along
the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network
for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.
7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches.
nameplates.

adhesive.
C. Insulation Installation on Pumps:

1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box
joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt
flanges on 6-inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch- diameter fasteners with
wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism.
2. Fabricate boxes from aluminum, at least 0.050 inch thick.
3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations.
Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.
adhesive.
insulating cement.
barrier.

sealant.
following:
insulation.
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

pipe insulation.

available.
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
available.

available.
valve body.
E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation
pins.
for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-
discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure
laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c.
Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier
mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-
barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the
insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.
At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-
discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure
laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c.
Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier
mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-
barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the
insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.
5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and
inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with
individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive.

4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at
end joints.
C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks
and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof
sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12
inches o.c. and at end joints.
overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive
or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around

an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or less. The 33-1/2-inch- circumference limit
allows for 2-inch- overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of
jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal
for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.
3.10 FINISHES
A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket
Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9 painting
Sections.
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and

insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be
limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule,
General" Article.
inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the
"Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion
adequate to determine compliance.

General" Article.
C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
3.12 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.

2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.
3. Indoor, concealed return located in nonconditioned space.
4. Indoor, exposed return located in nonconditioned space.
5. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
6. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
B. Items Not Insulated:
1. Fibrous-glass ducts.
2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
5. Flexible connectors.
7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
3.13 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick
and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
B. Concealed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2
inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
C. Concealed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber Mineral-fiber blanket, 2

D. Concealed, Exhaust-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral- Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2
E. Exposed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2
F. Exposed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2

G. Exposed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral- Mineral-fiber blanket, 2 inches
thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
H. Exposed, Exhaust-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2
C. Chillers: Insulate cold surfaces on chillers, including, but not limited to, evaporator bundles,
suction piping, compressor inlets, tube sheets, water boxes, and nozzles with one of the
following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1 inch thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
2. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inch thick.
D. Heat-exchanger (water-to-water for cooling service) insulation shall be one of the following:
E. Chilled-water pump insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
F. Condenser-water pump insulation shall be the following:

G. Heating-hot-water pump insulation shall be the following:

H. Chilled-water expansion/compression tank insulation shall be one of the following:

I. Heating-hot-water expansion/compression tank insulation shall be one of the following:

J. Chilled-water air-separator insulation shall be one of the following:

K. Condenser-water air-separator insulation shall be one of the following:


L. Heating-hot-water air-separator insulation shall be one of the following:
2. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches thick.
1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.

3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
A. Chilled Water: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe Insulation Wicking System: 1 inch thick for pipe sizes less than or
equal to 1-1/2 inches and 1-1/2 inches thick for pipe sizes greater than 1-1/2 inches.
B. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and below: Insulation shall be the
following:
1. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 inch thick for pipe sizes less than or equal to
1-1/2 inches and 2 inches thick for pipe sizes greater than 1-1/2 inches.
C. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: Flexible elastomeric, 1 inch thick.
D. Condenser Water: Mineral Fiber, Performed Pipe, Type I: 1 inch thick for pipe sizes less than
or equal to 1-1/2 inches and 1-1/2 inches thick for pipe sizes greater than 1-1/2 inches.
3.17 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.
B. Condenser Water: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches thick.

C. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed:
1. PVC: 20 mils thick.
D. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches:

E. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72
Inches:
1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed with 1-1/4-Inch- Deep Corrugations: 0.032 inches thick.
F. Piping, Exposed:
3.19 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
C. Piping, Exposed:
1. Aluminum, smooth: 0.024 inches thick.

SECTION 15110
VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves:

1. Copper-alloy ball valves.
2. Ferrous-alloy butterfly valves.
3. Combination Balancing and Shut-off valves (circuit setters).
1. Division 2 piping Sections for general-duty and specialty valves for site construction
piping.
2. Division 13 fire-suppression piping and fire pump Sections for fire-protection valves.
3. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and charts.
4. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control valves and
actuators.
5. Division 15 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves:
1. CWP: Cold working pressure.

2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
3. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
4. PPS: Polyphenylene Sulfide.
5. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
6. SWP: Steam working pressure.
7. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials;
valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement;
dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include

Allen & Shariff Engineering VALVES
rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and
accessories.
A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.1 for power piping valves and ASME B31.9 for building
services piping valves.
1. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water, sanitary waste, and storm drainage piping
valves unless referenced.
B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and
design criteria.
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

2.2 VALVES, GENERAL
A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.
B. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Brass Valves: NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller with Vic Press 304™ ends, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 and larger with flanged or grooved ends, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Valve Actuators:
1. Chainwheel: For attachment to valves, of size and mounting height, as indicated in the
"Valve Installation" Article in Part 3.
2. Gear Drive: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger.
3. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
4. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves.
5. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10
plug valves, for each size square plug head.
H. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.
I. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and
ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.
J. Valve Grooved Ends: ASME/AWWA C606.
K. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
1. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate, and
globe valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.
2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
L. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
2.3 COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES
B. Manufacturers:
1. One-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.

c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
d. Grinnell Corporation.
e. Jamesbury, Inc.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:

b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e. Grinnell Corporation.
f. Hammond Valve.
g. Jamesbury, Inc.
h. Milwaukee Valve Company.
i. NIBCO INC.
j. Victaulic Company of America.
k. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
3. Three-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:

b. Grinnell Corporation.
c. Hammond Valve.
d. Jamesbury, Inc.
e. NIBCO INC.
f. Red-White Valve Corp.
4. Safety-Exhaust, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:

c. Hammond Valve.
d. Jamesbury, Inc.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company.
f. NIBCO INC.
C. Copper-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.
D. One-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with chrome-plated bronze ball,
PTFE or TFE seats, and 400-psig minimum CWP rating.
E. Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Bronze body with regular-port, chrome-plated bronze
ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.
F. Three-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Bronze body with regular-port, chrome-plated bronze
ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.

G. Safety-Exhaust, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Two-piece bronze body with exhaust vent opening,
chrome-plated ball with vent, blowout-proof stem, locking handle, and working pressure rating
for compressed air of at least 125 psig.
2.4 FERROUS-ALLOY BUTTERFLY VALVES
B. Manufacturers:
1. Flangeless, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Center Line.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
c. Dover Corp.; Dover Resources Company; Norriseal Div.
d. General Signal; DeZurik Unit.
f. Hammond Valve.
g. Metraflex Co.
i. Mueller Steam Specialty.
j. NIBCO INC.
2. Single-Flange, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Center Line.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
d. General Signal; DeZurik Unit.
f. Hammond Valve.
g. Metraflex Co.
i. Mueller Steam Specialty.
j. NIBCO INC.
3. Flanged, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves:

a. Grinnell Corporation.
b. Mueller Steam Specialty.
c. Tyco International, Ltd.; Tyco Valves & Controls.
4. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Butterfly Valves:
a. Central Sprinkler Co.; Central Grooved Piping Products.

c. Hammond Valve.
d. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
f. Mueller Steam Specialty.

g. NIBCO INC.
h. Victaulic Co. of America.
C. Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP-67, Type I, for tight shutoff, with disc and
lining suitable for potable water, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Flangeless, 150-psig CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one-piece
stem.
E. Single-Flange, 150-psig CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer-lug type with
one-piece stem.
F. Flanged, 150-psig CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Flanged-end type with one-
piece stem.
G. Grooved-End, 300-psig CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Ductile-iron. body with
grooved or shouldered ends in accordance with ASME/AWWA C606.
2.5 COMBINATION BALANCING AND SHUT-OFF VALVES (Circuit Setters)
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide valves by one of the

following:
1, Bell & Gossett.

2. Armstrong.
3. NIBCO.
4. Tour Anderson
B. Each valve shall have two 1/4” NPT brass metering ports with check valves and gasketted caps
located on both sides of valve seat. Two additional 1/4” NPT connections with brass plugs are
to be provided on the opposite side of the metering ports for use as drain connections. Drain
connections and metering ports are to be interchangeable to allow for measurement flexibility
when valves are installed in tight locations.
C. Valves are to be of the “Y” pattern, modified, equal percentage globe style and provide three
functions: 1) Precise flow measurement 2) Precision flow balancing 3) Positive drip-tight
shut-off valve shall provide multi-turn, 360° adjustment with a micrometer type indicator lo-
cated on valve handwheel. Valve handwheel shall have hidden memory feature which will pro-
vide a means for locking the valve position after the ystem is balanced. 90° turn adjustable
valves are not acceptable.
D. Valve Sizes: 1/2” – 2”
1. Valve body shall be bronze with ultra-high strength engineered resin plug. The plug
shall have precision-contoured channels to distribute flow uniformly across valve seat.
Bronze stem and high strength resin hardwheel and sleeve. Valve shall have a minimum
of four full 360° handwheel turns.
E. Valve Sizes: 2-1/2” – 12”

1. Valve body shall be either cast iron with integrated case iron flanges or ductile iron with
industrial standard grooved ends. Valve stem and plug disc shall be bronze with
handwheel with multi-turn handwheel adjustments.
2. The valve shall be installed with flow in the direction of the arrow on the valve body and
installed at least five pipe diameters downstream from any fitting, and at least ten pipe
diameters downstream from any pump. Two pipe diameters downstream from the valve
should be free of any fittings. When installed, easy and unobstructed access to the valve
handwheel and metering ports for adjustment and measurement are to be provided.
Mounting of valve in piping must prevent sediment build-up in metering ports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine grooved ends for conditions that might cause leakage. Ends should be free from
indentations or projections in the area from valve end to groove.
F. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
G. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated,
use the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Service: Ball, butterfly valves..
3. Pump Discharge: Triple duty valves.
4. Shut Off/Balancing: Circuit setter.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Chilled-Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:

1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: One-piece, 400-psig CWP rating, copper alloy, full port.
2. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flangeless, 150-psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy,
with EPDM liner.
3. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 300-psig CWP
rating.
D. Condenser Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:
2. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged, 150-psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy,
with EPDM liner.
rating.
E. Heating Water Piping (up to 230°F): Use the following types of valves:
2. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flangeless, 150-psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy,
with EPDM liner.
rating.
F. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder-joint or threaded ends, except provide
valves with threaded ends for heating hot water.
2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded ends.
3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
4. For Grooved-End, Copper Tubing and Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved. Do not
use for steam or steam condensate piping.
3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install valves with grooved joint couplings, unions or flanges at each piece of equipment
arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

F. Install chainwheel operators on valves NPS 4 and larger and more than 96 inches above floor.
Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor elevation.
G. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts
according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. All grooved couplings,
fittings, valves, and specialties shall be of the same manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of
the same manufacturer as the grooved components. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from
indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. Grooved coupling
manufacturer’s factory trained field representative shall provide on-site training for contractor’s
field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools, application of groove, and installation of
grooved piping products. Factory trained representative shall periodically inspect the product
installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.
C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-
alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

SECTION 15111
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Bronze angle valves.

2. Brass ball valves.
3. Bronze ball valves.
4. Iron ball valves.
5. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves.
6. Iron, grooved-end butterfly valves.
7. Bronze lift check valves.
8. Bronze swing check valves.
9. Iron swing check valves.
10. Iron swing check valves with closure control.
11. Iron, grooved-end swing check valves.
12. Iron, center-guided check valves.
13. Iron, plate-type check valves.
14. Bronze gate valves.
15. Iron gate valves.
16. Bronze globe valves.
17. Iron globe valves.
18. Lubricated plug valves.
1. Division 2 water distribution piping Sections for general-duty and specialty valves for
site construction piping.
2. Division 15 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections
only.
3. Division 15 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags
and schedules.

Allen & Shariff Engineering GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CWP: Cold working pressure.
B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.
C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
D. NRS: Nonrising stem.
E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
F. RS: Rising stem.
G. SWP: Steam working pressure.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance:
1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.
3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
D. Valve Actuator Types:
1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger.
2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller.
4. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 5
plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head.
5. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size
and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.
E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions and the following features:
1. Gate Valves: With rising stem.

2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and
protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or
3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.
F. Valve-End Connections:
1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.

2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.
3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
2.2 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES
A. Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves with Bronze Disc:

following:
a. Hammond Valve.
b. Milwaukee Valve Company.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.

b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.
d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem and Disc: Bronze.
f. Packing: Asbestos free.
g. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.
B. Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:

following:
a. American Valve, Inc.

b. NIBCO INC.
2. Description:

d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem: Bronze.
f. Disc: PTFE or TFE.
g. Packing: Asbestos free.
h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.
C. Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves with Bronze Disc:

following:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

b. Kitz Corporation.
2. Description:

c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet.
d. Ends: Threaded.

2.3 BRASS BALL VALVES
A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:

following:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

c. DynaQuip Controls.
d. Flow-Tek, Inc.; a subsidiary of Bray International, Inc.
e. Hammond Valve.
f. Jamesbury; a subsidiary of Metso Automation.
g. Jomar International, LTD.
h. Kitz Corporation.
i. Legend Valve.
j. Marwin Valve; a division of Richards Industries.
k. Milwaukee Valve Company.
l. NIBCO INC.
m. Red-White Valve Corporation.
n. RuB Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-110.

b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa).
d. Body Design: Two piece.
e. Body Material: Forged brass.
f. Ends: Threaded.
g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.
h. Stem: Brass.
i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
j. Port: Full.
B. Two-Piece, Regular-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:

following:
a. Jamesbury; a subsidiary of Metso Automation.

b. Marwin Valve; a division of Richards Industries.
2. Description:

e. Body Material: Brass or bronze.
f. Ends: Threaded.
h. Stem: Stainless steel.
i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented.
j. Port: Regular.
2.4 BRONZE BALL VALVES
A. One-Piece, Reduced-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

following:

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.
c. NIBCO INC.
2. Description:

c. Body Design: One piece.
d. Body Material: Bronze.
e. Ends: Threaded.
f. Seats: PTFE or TFE.
g. Stem: Bronze.
h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
i. Port: Reduced.
B. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

following:

c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
f. Legend Valve.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Red-White Valve Corporation.
j. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

e. Body Material: Bronze.
f. Ends: Threaded.
h. Stem: Bronze.
j. Port: Full.
C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:

following:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.

c. Hammond Valve.
d. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:

f. Ends: Threaded.
j. Port: Full.
D. Two-Piece, Regular-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

following:

d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
e. DynaQuip Controls.
f. Hammond Valve.

g. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
i. NIBCO INC.
2. Description:

f. Ends: Threaded.
h. Stem: Bronze.
j. Port: Regular.
E. Two-Piece, Regular-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:

following:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.

c. Hammond Valve.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company.
2. Description:

f. Ends: Threaded.
j. Port: Regular.
2.5 IRON BALL VALVES
A. Class 125, Iron Ball Valves:

following:


c. Kitz Corporation.
d. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.
e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:

c. Body Design: Split body.
d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron.
e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Seats: PTFE or TFE.
g. Stem: Stainless steel.
h. Ball: Stainless steel.
i. Port: Full.
2.6 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:

following:
a. ABZ Valve and Controls; a division of ABZ Manufacturing, Inc.

c. Cooper Cameron Valves; a division of Cooper Cameron Corporation.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
f. DeZurik Water Controls.
g. Flo Fab Inc.
h. Hammond Valve.
i. Kitz Corporation.
j. Legend Valve.
l. NIBCO INC.
m. Norriseal; a Dover Corporation company.
n. Red-White Valve Corporation.
o. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International, Inc.
p. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I.

c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated
pressure without use of downstream flange.
d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.
e. Seat: EPDM.
f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel.

g. Disc: Aluminum bronze.
B. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with NBR Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:

following:

c. Cooper Cameron Valves; a division of Cooper Cameron Corporation.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
f. DeZurik Water Controls.
g. Flo Fab Inc.
h. Hammond Valve.
i. Kitz Corporation.
j. Legend Valve.
l. NIBCO INC.
m. Norriseal; a Dover Corporation company.
n. Red-White Valve Corporation.
o. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International, Inc.
p. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:

e. Seat: NBR.
g. Disc: Aluminum bronze.
C. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Ductile-Iron Disc:

following:

b. American Valve, Inc.
c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.
d. Cooper Cameron Valves; a division of Cooper Cameron Corporation.
e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Center Line.
f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
g. DeZurik Water Controls.
h. Flo Fab Inc.
i. Hammond Valve.
j. Kitz Corporation.

k. Legend Valve.
l. Milwaukee Valve Company.
m. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation.
n. NIBCO INC.
o. Norriseal; a Dover Corporation company.
p. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International, Inc.
q. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.
r. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:

e. Seat: EPDM.
g. Disc: Nickel-plated or -coated ductile iron.
D. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with NBR Seat and Ductile-Iron Disc:

following:

e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Center Line.
h. Flo Fab Inc.
i. Hammond Valve.
k. Legend Valve.
n. NIBCO INC.
p. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International, Inc.
q. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.
r. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:


e. Seat: NBR.
g. Disc: Nickel-plated or -coated ductile iron.
E. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc:

following:

e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
h. Flo Fab Inc.
i. Hammond Valve.
k. Legend Valve.
n. NIBCO INC.
p. Red-White Valve Corporation.
q. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International, Inc.
r. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.
s. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:

e. Seat: EPDM.
g. Disc: Stainless steel.
F. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with NBR Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc:

following:
a. ABZ Valves and Controls; A div. of ABZ Manufacturing, Inc.

d. Cooper Cameron Valves; A div. of Cooper Cameron Corp.

e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
h. Flo Fab Inc.
i. Hammond Valve.
k. Legend Valve.
n. NIBCO INC.
p. Red-White Valve Corporation.
q. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International, Inc.
r. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.
s. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:

e. Seat: NBR.
g. Disc: Stainless steel.
2.7 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:

following:

e. Hammond Valve.
f. Kitz Corporation.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Powell Valves.
j. Red-White Valve Corporation.
k. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
l. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
2. Description:

c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.
d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.
e. Ends: Threaded.
f. Disc: Bronze.
B. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:

following:

c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Kitz Corporation.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Red-White Valve Corporation.
i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:

e. Ends: Threaded.
f. Disc: PTFE or TFE.
C. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:

following:

g. NIBCO INC.
i. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
2. Description:


e. Ends: Threaded.
f. Disc: Bronze.
2.8 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:

following:

d. Hammond Valve.
f. Legend Valve.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Powell Valves.
k. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.
l. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
m. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
2. Description:

c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.
d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Trim: Bronze.
g. Gasket: Asbestos free.
B. Class 250, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:

following:

d. Hammond Valve.
f. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.
d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Trim: Bronze.
g. Gasket: Asbestos free.
2.9 BRONZE GATE VALVES
A. Class 125, NRS Bronze Gate Valves:

following:

e. Hammond Valve.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Powell Valves.
k. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
l. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
2. Description:

d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint.
e. Stem: Bronze.
f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.
B. Class 125, RS Bronze Gate Valves:

following:


e. Hammond Valve.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Powell Valves.
k. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
2. Description:

e. Stem: Bronze.
C. Class 150, NRS Bronze Gate Valves:

following:
a. Hammond Valve.
b. Kitz Corporation.
c. Milwaukee Valve Company.
d. NIBCO INC.
e. Powell Valves.
f. Red-White Valve Corporation.
2. Description:

d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem: Bronze.
D. Class 150, RS Bronze Gate Valves:

following:

b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
c. Hammond Valve.
d. Kitz Corporation.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Powell Valves.
h. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
i. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
2. Description:

d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem: Bronze.
2.10 IRON GATE VALVES
A. Class 125, NRS, Iron Gate Valves:

following:

d. Flo Fab Inc.
e. Hammond Valve.
g. Legend Valve.
i. NIBCO INC.
j. Powell Valves.
k. Red-White Valve Corporation.
2. Description:

c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Trim: Bronze.
f. Disc: Solid wedge.

g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.
B. Class 125, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves:

following:

d. Flo Fab Inc.
e. Hammond Valve.
g. Legend Valve.
i. NIBCO INC.
j. Powell Valves.
k. Red-White Valve Corporation.
2. Description:

d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Trim: Bronze.
C. Class 250, NRS, Iron Gate Valves:

following:

c. NIBCO INC.
2. Description:

d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Trim: Bronze.

D. Class 250, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves:

following:

c. Hammond Valve.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company.
e. NIBCO INC.
f. Powell Valves.
2. Description:

d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Trim: Bronze.
2.11 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc:

following:

c. Hammond Valve.
d. Kitz Corporation.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Powell Valves.
i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
j. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
2. Description:


2.12 IRON GLOBE VALVES
A. Class 125, Iron Globe Valves:

following:

d. Hammond Valve.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Powell Valves.
i. Red-White Valve Corporation.
k. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
2. Description:

d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Trim: Bronze.
f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.
B. Class 250, Iron Globe Valves:

following:

d. Hammond Valve.
f. NIBCO INC.
2. Description:

d. Ends: Flanged.

e. Trim: Bronze.
f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.
2.13 LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES
A. Class 125, Regular-Gland, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Nordstrom Valves, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-78, Type II.

c. Body Material: ASTM A 48/A 48M or ASTM A 126, cast iron with lubrication-
sealing system.
d. Pattern: Regular or short.
e. Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant groove.
B. Class 125, Cylindrical, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends:

following:
a. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc.

b. Milliken Valve Company.
c. R & M Energy Systems; a unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-78, Type IV.

sealing system.
C. Class 250, Regular-Gland, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends:

following:
a. Nordstrom Valves, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-78, Type II.


sealing system.
D. Class 250, Cylindrical, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends:

following:
a. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc.

b. Milliken Valve Company.
c. R & M Energy Systems; a unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-78, Type IV.

sealing system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Center-Guided Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or gate valves.

2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type.
3. Throttling Service: Globe or angle or ball valves.
4. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:
a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.
b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron swing check valves with
lever and weight or with spring or iron, center-guided, metal-seat check valves.
c. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger for Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage: Iron
swing check valves with lever and weight or spring.
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-
joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends except where
threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends.
4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends.
5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends except where
threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends.
7. For Grooved-End Copper Tubing and Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.

3.5 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded
ends.
2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
3. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass or bronze with brass stainless-steel trim.
4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.
6. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): May be provided with threaded
ends instead of flanged ends.
2. Iron Ball Valves: Class 150.
3. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, aluminum-bronze
stainless-steel disc.
4. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves: 175 CWP.
5. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.
6. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control: Class 125, lever and spring].
7. Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves: 300 CWP.
8. Iron, Center-Guided Check Valves: Class 125, , metal seat.
9. Iron, Plate-Type Check Valves: Class 125; single plate; metal seat.
10. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, OS&Y.
11. Iron Globe Valves: Class 125.
3.6 SANITARY-WASTE AND STORM-DRAINAGE VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded
ends.
2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
3. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass or bronze with stainless-steel trim.
4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.
6. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): May be provided with threaded
ends instead of flanged ends.
2. Iron Ball Valves: Class 150.
3. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.
4. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control: Class 125, lever and spring.
5. Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves: 300 CWP.
6. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, OS&Y.

7. Iron Globe Valves: Class 125.
8. Lubricated Plug Valves: Class 125, regular gland, flanged.

SECTION 15126
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Thermometers.
2. Gages.
3. Test plugs.
1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for domestic and fire-protection water service
meters outside the building.
2. Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for domestic and fire-protection water
service meters inside the building.
3. Division 15 Section "Facility Natural-Gas Piping" for gas meters.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Schedule for thermometers and gages indicating manufacturer's number, scale
range, and location for each.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of thermometer and gage, signed by product manufacturer.

Allen & Shariff Engineering METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable

product by one of the following:
1. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.

2. Trerice, H. O. Co.
3. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
4. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
C. Case: Die-cast aluminum, 7 inches (178 mm) long.
D. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled, with magnifying lens.
E. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale

markings.
F. Window: Plastic.
G. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with
locking device.
H. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit
installation.
I. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of
1.5 percent of range.
2.2 DIRECT-MOUNTING, VAPOR-ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS

following:

1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.

2. KOBOLD Instruments, Inc.
3. Marsh Bellofram.

C. Case: Dry type, metal or plastic, 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) diameter.
D. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element.
E. Movement: Mechanical, connecting element and pointer.
F. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
G. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.
H. Window: Glass or plastic.
I. Ring: Metal or plastic.
J. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with
locking device.
K. Thermal System: Liquid- or mercury-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass

stem for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.
L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of
2.3 REMOTE-MOUNTING, VAPOR-ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS

following:

1. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.

3. Marsh Bellofram.
4. Miljoco Corp.
6. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation.
7. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.
11. Winters Instruments.
C. Case: Dry type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) diameter with holes for
panel mounting.
D. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element.
E. Movement: Mechanical, connecting element and pointer.

I. Ring: Metal.
J. Connector: Bottom union type.
K. Thermal System: Liquid- or mercury-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass

stem for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.
2.4 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS

following:


2. Ernst Gage Co.
3. Eugene Ernst Products Co.
4. Marsh Bellofram.
5. Miljoco Corp.
6. NANMAC Corporation.
7. Noshok, Inc.
14. WIKA Instrument Corporation.
C. Description: Direct-mounting, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers complying with

ASME B40.3.
D. Case: Dry type, stainless steel with 3-inch (76-mm) diameter.
E. Element: Bimetal coil.

I. Ring: Stainless steel.
J. Connector: Rigid, bottom type.
K. Stem: Metal, for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.
2.5 THERMOWELLS

following:


3. Ernst Gage Co.
4. Marsh Bellofram.
5. Miljoco Corp.
6. NANMAC Corporation.
7. Noshok, Inc.
C. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used.
D. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type,
diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.
2.6 PRESSURE GAGES

following:


3. Ernst Gage Co.
4. Eugene Ernst Products Co.
5. KOBOLD Instruments, Inc.
6. Marsh Bellofram.
7. Miljoco Corp.
8. Noshok, Inc.
C. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: Indicating-dial type complying with

ASME B40.100.
1. Case: Dry type, metal or plastic, 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) diameter.

2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4 (DN 8), bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type
is indicated.
4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
6. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.
7. Window: Glass or plastic.
8. Ring: Metal.
9. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale.
10. Vacuum-Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure (100 kPa of
vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure).
11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.
D. Remote-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: ASME B40.100, indicating-dial type.
1. Case: Dry type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) diameter with Insert
other for panel mounting.
2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4 (DN 8), bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type
is indicated.
4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
6. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.
7. Window: Glass or plastic.
8. Ring: Metal.
9. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale.

10. Vacuum-Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure (100 kPa of
vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure).
11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.
E. Pressure-Gage Fittings:
1. Valves: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) brass or stainless-steel needle type.

2. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 (DN 8) brass bushing with corrosion-resistant, porous-
metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
2.7 TEST PLUGS

following:

1. Flow Design, Inc.

2. MG Piping Products Co.
3. National Meter, Inc.
4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.
5. Sisco Manufacturing Co.
7. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
C. Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and gasketed and
threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping.
D. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F (3450 kPa at 93 deg C).
E. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves.
1. Insert material for water service at 20 to 200 deg F (minus 7 to plus 93 deg C) shall be
CR.
2. Insert material for water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F (minus 35 to plus 136
deg C) shall be EPDM.
F. Test Kit: Furnish one test kit(s) containing one pressure gage and adaptor, one thermometer(s),
and carrying case. Pressure gage, adapter probes, and thermometer sensing elements shall be of
diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.
1. Pressure Gage: Small bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch- (51- to 76-mm-)
diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be 0 to 200 psig (0 to 1380 kPa).
2. Low-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- (25- to 51-
mm-) diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 25 to 125
deg F (minus 4 to plus 52 deg C).

3. High-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- (25- to 51-
mm-) diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 0 to 220 deg F
(minus 18 to plus 104 deg C).
4. Carrying case shall have formed instrument padding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS
A. Install liquid-in-glass direct-mounting, vapor-actuated dial remote-mounting, vapor-actuated

dial bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers in the outlet of each domestic, hot-water storage
tank.
B. Install liquid-filled-case-type, -actuated dial thermometers at suction and discharge of each

pump.
C. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:
1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 180 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions (Minus 1 to plus 82
deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions).
2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions (Minus 18 to plus 38
deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions).
3.2 GAGE APPLICATIONS
A. Install dry-case-type pressure gages for discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.
B. Install liquid-filled-case-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump.
3.3 INSTALLATIONS
A. Install direct-mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B. Install remote-mounting dial thermometers on panel, with tubing connecting panel and
thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.
C. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches (51 mm) into fluid and in
vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated.
D. Install direct-mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most
readable position.
E. Install remote-mounting pressure gages on panel.
F. Install needle-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage.
G. Install test plugs in tees in piping.

H. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.
I. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable indicators in accessible locations.
J. Install thermometers and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance for thermometers, gages, machines, and equipment.
K. Adjust faces of thermometers and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

SECTION 15140
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and
specialties inside the building.
2. Encasement for piping.
3. Specialty valves.
5. Water meters furnished by utility company for installation by Contractor.
6. Escutcheons.
7. Sleeves and sleeve seals.
8. Wall penetration systems.
B. Related Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water-service piping outside the building
from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.
A. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand
effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following products:
1. Specialty valves.
5. Backflow preventers and vacuum breakers.
6. Escutcheons.

Allen & Shariff Engineering DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
7. Sleeves and sleeve seals.
8. Water penetration systems.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, including
printed statement of VOC content.
C. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.
D. Coordination Drawings: For piping in equipment rooms and other congested areas, drawn to
scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input
from Installers of the items involved:
1. Fire-suppression-water piping.
2. Domestic water piping.
3. HVAC hydronic piping.
E. Field quality-control reports.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components.
C. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging
to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Construction Manager Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed
interruption of water service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Construction Manager's
Owner's written permission.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C) water tube, drawn temper.
1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.
3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-
socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
5. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:
1) Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division.

2) NIBCO INC.
3) Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems.
b. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring
seal in each end.
c. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting
with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.
6. Copper Push-on-Joint Fittings:

of the following:
1) NVent LLC.
b. Description: Cast-copper fitting complying with ASME B16.18 or wrought-

copper fitting complying with ASME B 16.22; with stainless-steel teeth and
EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end instead of solder-joint ends.
7. Grooved-Joint Copper-Tube Appurtenances:

of the following:
1) Anvil International.
2) Victaulic Company.

b. Copper Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M) copper tube or
ASTM B 584 bronze castings.
c. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to
AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable
for hot and cold water, and bolts and nuts.
B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) water tube, annealed temper.
1. Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

2. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:

of the following:
1) Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division.

2) NIBCO INC.
3) Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems.
b. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring
seal in each end.
c. NPS 3 and NPS 4 (DN 80 and DN 100): Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting
with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.
2.3 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot
end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
1. Standard-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron.

2. Compact-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile iron.
a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts.
B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end
unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
1. Standard-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron.
a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
2. Compact-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile iron.
a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
C. Plain-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151.
1. Grooved-Joint, Ductile-Iron-Pipe Appurtenances:

of the following:
b. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Fittings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron castings

or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching pipe.
c. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron-Pipe Couplings: AWWA C606 for ductile-iron-pipe
dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for
hot and cold water, and bolts and nuts.
2.4 GALVANIZED-STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, , Standard Weight. Include ends
matching joining method.
1. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or

ASTM A 106/A 106M, Standard Weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
2. Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.
3. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-
socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface, and female threaded ends.
4. Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125, cast iron.
5. Grooved-Joint, Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:

of the following:
b. Galvanized, Grooved-End Fittings for Galvanized-Steel Piping:

ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron casting; ASTM A 106/A 106M, steel pipe; or
ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.
c. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Galvanized-Steel Piping: AWWA C606 for
steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gaskets
suitable for hot and cold water, and bolts and nuts.
2.5 CPVC PIPING
A. CPVC Pipe: ASTM F 441/F 441M, Schedule 40.
1. CPVC Socket Fittings: ASTM F 438 for Schedule 40.

2. CPVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM F 437, Schedule 80.
B. CPVC Piping System: ASTM D 2846/D 2846M, SDR 11, pipe and socket fittings.
C. CPVC Tubing System: ASTM D 2846/D 2846M, SDR 11, tube and socket fittings.

2.6 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40.

2. PVC Schedule 80 Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464.
2.7 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-
duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Piping and Tubing: ASTM F 493.
1. Use CPVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 490 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated
F. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to
ASTM F 656.
1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated
G. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
2.8 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING
A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
B. Form: Tube.
C. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008-inch (0.20-mm) High-density, cross-laminated PE film of

0.004-inch (0.10-mm) minimum thickness.
D. Color: Natural.

2.9 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping"
for general-duty metal valves.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for
balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers.
C. CPVC Union Ball Valves:

following:

b. NIBCO INC.
c. Sloane, George Fischer, Inc.
d. Spears Manufacturing Company.
e. Thermoplastic Valves Inc.
2. Description:

b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) at 73 deg F (23 deg C).
c. Body Material: CPVC.
d. Body Design: Union type.
e. End Connections for Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Detachable, socket.
f. End Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Detachable,
flanged.
g. Ball: CPVC; full port.
h. Seals: PTFE or EPDM-rubber O-rings.
i. Handle: Tee shaped.
D. CPVC Non-Union Ball Valves:

following:

b. Asahi/America, Inc.
c. King Bros. Industries.
d. Legend Valve.
e. NIBCO INC.
f. Spears Manufacturing Company.
g. Thermoplastic Valves Inc.
2. Description:

c. Body Material: CPVC.

d. Body Design: Non-union type.
e. End Connections: Socket or threaded.
f. Ball: CPVC; full or reduced port.
g. Seals: PTFE or EPDM-rubber O-rings.
h. Handle: Tee shaped.
E. CPVC Butterfly Valves:

following:
a. Fischer, George Inc.

b. Hayward Flow Control Systems; Hayward Industrial Products, Inc.
c. NIBCO INC.
d. Sloane, George Fischer, Inc.
e. Spears Manufacturing Company.
f. Thermoplastic Valves Inc.
2. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) at 73 deg F (23 deg C).
b. Body Material: CPVC.
c. Body Design: Lug or wafer type.
d. Seat: EPDM rubber.
e. Seals: PTFE or EPDM-rubber O-rings.
f. Disc: CPVC.
g. Stem: Stainless steel.
h. Handle: Lever.
F. CPVC Ball Check Valves:

following:

b. Asahi/America, Inc.
c. Colonial Engineering, Inc.
d. Fischer, George Inc.
e. Hayward Flow Control Systems; Hayward Industrial Products, Inc.
f. IPEX Inc.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Sloane, George Fischer, Inc.
i. Spears Manufacturing Company.
j. Thermoplastic Valves Inc.
2. Description:
c. Body Design: Union-type ball check.

d. End Connections for Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Detachable, socket.
e. End Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Detachable,
flanged.
f. Ball: CPVC.
g. Seals: EPDM- or FKM-rubber O-rings.
G. CPVC Gate Valves:

following:
a. Sloane, George Fischer, Inc.

b. Spears Manufacturing Company.
2. Description:
c. Body Design: Nonrising stem.
d. End Connections for Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Socket.
e. End Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged.
f. Gate and Stem: Plastic.
g. Seals: EPDM rubber.
h. Handle: Wheel.
A. General Requirements:
1. Same size as pipes to be joined.

2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.
3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system

fitting.
C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.

following:
a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing.

b. Dresser, Inc.; Dresser Piping Specialties.
c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).
d. JCM Industries.
e. Romac Industries, Inc.
f. Smith-Blair, Inc; a Sensus company.
g. Viking Johnson; c/o Mueller Co.

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:

following:
a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.

b. Harvel Plastics, Inc.
c. Spears Manufacturing Company.
2. Description: CPVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent

dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert and one solvent-cement-socket or
threaded end.
E. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:

following:
a. Colonial Engineering, Inc.

b. NIBCO INC.
c. Spears Manufacturing Company.
2. Description: CPVC four-part union. Include brass or stainless-steel threaded end,

solvent-cement-joint or threaded plastic end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material
body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and
temperature.
B. Dielectric Unions:

following:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.

c. EPCO Sales, Inc.
d. Hart Industries International, Inc.
e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.
2. Description:
b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric Flanges:

following:

c. EPCO Sales, Inc.
d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-
joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
D. Dielectric-Flange Kits:

following:

b. Calpico, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
E. Dielectric Couplings:

following:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corporation.
2. Description:
a. Galvanized-steel coupling.
c. End Connections: Female threaded.
d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic.
F. Dielectric Nipples:

following:
a. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

c. Victaulic Company.
2. Description:
a. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.

c. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
2.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

following:
1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.

2. Flexicraft Industries.
3. Flex Pression, Ltd.
4. Flex-Weld, Inc.
5. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
6. Mercer Rubber Co.
7. Metraflex, Inc.
8. Proco Products, Inc.
9. Tozen Corporation.
10. Unaflex, Inc.
11. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company
B. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering

and ends brazed to inner tubing.
1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa).

2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper
tube.
3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.
C. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel

wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.
1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa).

2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.
3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.

2.13 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.
B. One Piece, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with setscrews.
C. One Piece, Deep Pattern: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish.
D. One Piece, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with spring clips.
E. Split Casting, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge and setscrew.
F. Split Plate, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge, spring clips.
G. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
H. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
2.14 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Fabricated of cast iron, and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed

with welded longitudinal joint.
C. Molded-PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing
flange for attaching to wooden forms.
D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
E. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
F. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc-
coated, with plain ends.
G. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
2.15 SLEEVE SEALS

following:
1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

2. Calpico, Inc.
3. Metraflex, Inc.

4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, used to fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.16 WALL PENETRATION SYSTEMS

following:
1. SIGMA.
B. Description: Wall-sleeve assembly, consisting of housing and gland, gaskets, and pipe sleeve.
1. Carrier-Pipe Deflection: Up to 5 percent without leakage.

2. Housing: Ductile-iron casting with hub, waterstop, anchor ring, and locking devices.
Include gland, bolts, and nuts.
3. Housing-to-Sleeve Gasket: EPDM rubber.
4. Housing-to-Carrier-Pipe Gasket: AWWA C111, EPDM rubber.
5. Pipe Sleeve: AWWA C151, ductile-iron pipe or ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, zinc-
coated steel pipe.
2.17 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-

cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and
backfilling.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic
water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to
layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600
and AWWA M41.
D. Install underground copper tube and ductile-iron pipe in PE encasement according to

ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
E. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in
Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and
Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.
F. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
G. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with

requirements in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure-reducing
valves.
H. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.
I. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
J. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint
devices.
K. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
L. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
otherwise.
M. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and
coordinate with other services occupying that space.
N. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
O. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

P. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher
than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
Q. Install piping free of sags and bends.
R. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
S. Install PEX piping with loop at each change of direction of more than 90 degrees.
T. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and
specialty.
U. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump and packaged
booster pump. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages for
Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages.
V. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements in Division 15

Section "Domestic Water Pumps" for thermostats.
W. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with
requirements in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

damaged.
D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"
"Brazed Joints" Chapter.
E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and
fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
F. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by
fitting manufacturer.
G. Copper-Tubing, Push-on Joints: Clean end of tube. Measure insertion depth with
manufacturer's depth gage. Join copper tube and push-on-joint fittings by inserting tube to
measured depth.

H. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool
designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating
stop, and braze branch tube into collar.
I. Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll groove end of tube. Assemble coupling with housing,
gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join copper tube and grooved-end fittings according to
AWWA C606 for roll-grooved joints.
J. Ductile-Iron-Piping Grooved Joints: Cut groove end of pipe. Assemble coupling with housing,
gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join ductile-iron pipe and grooved-end fittings according to
AWWA C606 for ductile-iron-pipe, cut-grooved joints.
K. Steel-Piping Grooved Joints: Cut or roll groove end of pipe. Assemble coupling with housing,
gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606
for steel-pipe grooved joints.
L. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and
thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to
ASME B31.9.
M. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements. Apply primer.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
N. PEX Piping Joints: Join according to ASTM F 1807.
O. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both
piping systems.
A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves

for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.
B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures
that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping,
and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 15 Section
"Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.

D. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each
pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball
valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)
and larger. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties" for balancing valves.
E. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side
of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop
flow. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties"
for calibrated balancing valves.
3.5 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:
1. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.

2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.
C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water PipingNPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
Plastic-to-metal transition unions.
3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.
C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric flanges.
D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
3.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION
A. Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each domestic water
pump and in suction and discharge manifold connections to each domestic water booster pump.
B. Install bronze-hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing.
C. Install stainless-steel-hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping.
3.8 WATER METER INSTALLATION
A. Rough-in domestic water piping, and install water meters according to utility company's
requirements.

B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company.
C. Install water meters according to AWWA M6, utility company's requirements, and the
following:
D. Install compound-type water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and outlet and on
valved bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.
E. Install fire-service water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and outlet and on full-
size valved bypass around meter. Support meter, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.
F. Install remote registration system according to standards of utility company and of authorities
having jurisdiction.
A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m) If Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44,
pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4 (DN 25 and DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
5. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
6. NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.

F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).
G. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Smaller: 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2 (DN 80 and DN 90): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
7. NPS 6 (DN 150): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
8. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.
H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
I. Install vinyl-coated hangers for CPVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: 36 inches (900 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 (DN 32 to DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm)
rod.
4. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm)
rod.
5. NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
J. Install supports for vertical CPVC piping every 60 inches (1500 mm) for NPS 1 (DN 25) and
smaller, and every 72 inches (1800 mm) for NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and larger.
K. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PEX piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
L. Install hangers for vertical PEX piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
M. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm)
rod.
rod.

N. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
O. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.10 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect
to the following:
1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping.

2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 15 plumbing
fixture Sections for connection sizes.
4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3.11 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
B. Escutcheons for New Piping:
1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.
2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass
with polished chrome-plated finish stamped steel with spring clips.
3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with
polished chrome-plated finish One piece or split plate, stamped steel with set screw.
4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, cast brass with rough-brass finish
stamped steel with spring clips.
5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, cast brass stamped steel with set screw or
spring clips.
6. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor plate.

3.12 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in
floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.
F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation
using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements
in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.
G. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using
joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.
H. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using
wall penetration systems specified in this Section.
I. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
J. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.
K. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:
1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Steel pipe.
2. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical Equipment Areas
or Other Wet Areas: Steel pipe.
a. Extend sleeves 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

b. For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing, extend cast-iron sleeve
fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Comply with
requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
3. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum-Board Partitions:
a. PVC pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
b. Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger.
c. Exception: Sleeves are not required for water supply tubes and waste pipes for
individual plumbing fixtures if escutcheons will cover openings.
4. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Roof Slabs: Steel pipe.

5. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Exterior Concrete Walls:
a. Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
b. Cast-iron wall pipe sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger.
c. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation when sleeve seals are used.
d. Do not use sleeves when wall penetration systems are used.
6. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Interior Concrete Walls:
a. Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
b. Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger.
L. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements
in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestop materials and
installations.
3.13 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water-service piping entries into
building.
B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in
center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe
and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
make watertight seal.
3.14 WALL PENETRATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install wall penetration systems in new, exterior concrete walls.
B. Assemble wall penetration system components with sleeve pipe. Install so that end of sleeve
pipe and face of housing are flush with wall. Adjust locking devices to secure sleeve pipe in
housing.
3.15 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Identification

for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.
B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.

B. Piping Inspections:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or
inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Piping Tests:
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound
and that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test
source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects that must be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.17 ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping
to provide flow of hot water in each branch.
b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during
installation.
6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
3.18 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable and non-potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if
methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
(50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200
ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are
not prescribed, follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.19 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground
copper tubing.
D. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building service piping, NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller, shall
be the following:
1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper pressure-seal
fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.
E. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 4 to NPS 8 (DN 100 to

DN 200) and larger, shall be the following:
1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); wrought-copper solder-
joint fittings; and brazed joints.
2. Mechanical-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard- pattern mechanical-joint fittings; and
mechanical joints.
3. Push-on-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard- pattern push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed
joints.
4. Plain-end, ductile-iron pipe; grooved-joint, ductile-iron-pipe appurtenances; and grooved
joints.
F. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be the following:
1. Hard or soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper
pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.
G. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be the following:
1. Galvanized-steel pipe and nipples; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded
joints.
2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C); cast- copper solder-
joint fittings; and soldered joints.
3. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C); copper pressure-seal-
joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.
4. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C); copper push-on-joint
fittings; and push-on joints.
5. CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 40 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented
joints.
6. CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 80 threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

7. CPVC Tubing System: CPVC tube; CPVC socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and NPS 2 (DN 50) CPVC pipe with CPVC socket fittings may be
used instead of tubing.
H. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100), shall be the
following:
2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C); copper pressure-seal-
joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.
3. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C); grooved-joint copper-
tube appurtenances; and grooved joints.
joints.
5. Galvanized-steel pipe; grooved-joint, galvanized-steel-pipe appurtenances; and grooved
joints.
joints.
I. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 5 to NPS 8 (DN 125 to DN 200), shall be the
following:
2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C); grooved-joint copper-
tube appurtenances; and grooved joints.
joints.
4. Galvanized-steel pipe; grooved-joint, galvanized-steel-pipe appurtenances; and grooved
joints.
joints.
3.20 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use
butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use
butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves.
4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.

C. Iron grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.
D. CPVC valves matching piping materials may be used.

SECTION 15145
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:
1. Vacuum breakers.
2. Backflow preventers.
3. Water pressure-reducing valves.
4. Balancing valves.
5. Temperature-actuated water mixing valves.
6. Strainers.
7. Outlet boxes.
8. Hose stations.
9. Hose bibbs.
10. Wall hydrants.
11. Ground hydrants.
12. Post hydrants.
13. Drain valves.
14. Water hammer arresters.
15. Air vents.
16. Trap-seal primer valves.
17. Trap-seal primer systems.
1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure gages, and flow
meters in domestic water piping.
2. Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.
3. Division 15 Section "Medical Plumbing Fixtures" for thermostatic mixing valves for sitz
baths, thermostatic mixing-valve assemblies for hydrotherapy equipment, and outlet
boxes for dialysis equipment.
4. Division 15 Section "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures" for water tempering equipment.
5. Division 15 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers" for water filters for water
coolers.
6. Division 15 Section "Water Filtration Equipment" for water filters in domestic water
piping.

Allen & Shariff Engineering DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig (860 kPa), unless
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
domestic water piping components.
2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:

the following:
following:
a. Ames Co.
b. Cash Acme.
c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
d. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
e. Rain Bird Corporation.
f. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div.

h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
3. Standard: ASSE 1001.

4. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 (DN 8 to DN 80), as required to match connected piping.
5. Body: Bronze.
6. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.
7. Finish: Chrome plated.
B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:

the following:
following:
a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc.

b. Cash Acme.
c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
d. Legend Valve.
e. MIFAB, Inc.
f. Prier Products, Inc.
h. Woodford Manufacturing Company.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

4. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.
5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.
6. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.
C. Pressure Vacuum Breakers:

the following:
following:
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Insert
manufacturer's name; product name or designation or a comparable product by one of the
following:
a. Ames Co.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
d. Flomatic Corporation.
e. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div.

g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

5. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
6. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
D. Spill-Resistant Vacuum Breakers:

the following:
following:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

b. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

5. Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).
6. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type, on inlet and outlet.
2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers:

the following:
following:
a. Cash Acme.
d. Honeywell Water Controls.
e. Legend Valve.

5. Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).
6. Body: Bronze.
7. End Connections: Solder joint.
8. Finish: Rough bronze.

B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:

the following:
following:
following:
a. Ames Co.
d. Flomatic Corporation.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

7. Size: 3”
8. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying
with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
9. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
10. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow.
11. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet ofNPS 2 (DN 50) and
smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.
C. Dual-Check-Valve Backflow Preventers:

the following:
following:
a. Cash Acme.
d. Legend Valve.
e. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.

5. Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).
6. Body: Bronze with union inlet.
D. Double-Check, Detector-Assembly Backflow Preventers:

the following:
following:
following:
a. Ames Co.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
4. Standard: ASSE 1048 and FMG approved or UL listed.

7. Size: 6”
8. Design Flow Rate: 500 gpm
9. Body: Cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA
approved.
10. End Connections: Flanged.
11. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow.
12. Accessories:
a. Valves: Outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet.
b. Bypass: With displacement-type water meter, shutoff valves, and reduced-
pressure backflow preventer.
E. Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers:

the following:
following:

b. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
c. Woodford Manufacturing Company.

4. Operation: Up to 10-foot head of water (30-kPa) back pressure.
5. Inlet Size: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20).
6. Outlet Size: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
7. Capacity: At least 3-gpm (0.19-L/s) flow.
F. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits:

the following:
following:
following:

b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
c. Flomatic Corporation.
4. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-
procedure instructions.
2.3 WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
A. Water Regulators:

the following:
following:
a. Cash Acme.
c. Honeywell Water Controls.
3. Body: Bronze with chrome-plated finish for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with
interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and
NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80).
4. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass.
5. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and
NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80).
B. Water Control Valves:

the following:
following:
following:
a. CLA-VAL Automatic Control Valves.

b. Flomatic Corporation.
c. OCV Control Valves.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Ames Fluid Control Systems.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Watts ACV.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
4. Description: Pilot-operation, diaphragm-type, single-seated main water control valve.

5. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum with
AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, interior epoxy coating. Include small pilot-control
valve, restrictor device, specialty fittings, and sensor piping.
6. Main Valve Body: Cast- or ductile-iron body with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved,
interior epoxy coating; or stainless-steel body.
a. Size:
b. Pattern: Angle-valve design.
c. Trim: Stainless steel.
7. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
2.4 BALANCING VALVES
A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves:

the following:
following:
following:
a. Armstrong International, Inc.

b. Flo Fab Inc.
c. ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett Div.
d. NIBCO INC.
e. TAC Americas.
f. Taco, Inc.

4. Type: Ball valve with two readout ports and memory setting indicator.
5. Body: Brass,
6. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2 (DN 50).
7. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.
B. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:

the following:
following:

d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e. Hammond Valve.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Red-White Valve Corp.
3. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves.

4. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP.
5. Size: NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller.
6. Body: Copper alloy.
7. Port: Standard or full port.
8. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
9. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
10. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded.
11. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.
2.5 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES
A. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves:

the following:
following:
following:
a. Armstrong International, Inc.

b. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.
c. Leonard Valve Company.
d. Powers; a Watts Industries Co.

e. Symmons Industries, Inc.

5. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
6. Type: Exposed-mounting, thermostatically controlled water mixing valve.
7. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
8. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet.
9. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies,
and adjustable, temperature-control handle.
10. Valve Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
11. Tempered-Water Setting: <110 deg F
12. Valve Finish: Chrome plated.
13. Piping Finish: Copper.
2.6 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying
with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and
larger.
3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller;flanged for NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Perforation Size:
a. StrainersNPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 0.020 inch (0.51 mm).

b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): 0.045 inch (1.14 mm).
c. Strainers NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: 0.10 inch (2.54 mm).
6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.
2.7 HOSE BIBBS
A. Hose Bibbs:
1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.

2. Body Material: Bronze.
3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.
4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) threaded or solder-joint
inlet.
5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral or field-installation, nonremovable, drainable, hose-
connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011.
8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.
9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze.

10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.
11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.
12. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key.
13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.
14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.
15. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.
2.8 WALL HYDRANTS
A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:

the following:
following:
a. Josam Company.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Prier Products, Inc.
d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
g. Woodford Manufacturing Company.
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
3. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.

5. Operation: Loose key.
6. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall
clamp.
7. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1 (DN 20 or DN 25).
8. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7.
9. Box: Deep, flush mounting with cover.
10. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze.
11. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7.
12. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze.
13. Operating Keys(s): Two with each wall hydrant.
14. rant.
B. Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants:

the following:

following:
a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc.

b. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC.
c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
d. Prier Products, Inc.
e. Smith, Jay. R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
g. Woodford Manufacturing Company.
3. Standard: ASSE 1019, Type A or Type B.

4. Type: Freeze-resistant, automatic draining with integral air-inlet valve.
5. Classification: Type A, for automatic draining with hose removed or Type B, for
automatic draining with hose removed or with hose attached and nozzle closed.
7. Operation: Loose key.
8. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall
clamp.
9. Inlet: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20).
10. Outlet: Exposed with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
2.9 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Water Hammer Arresters:

the following:
following:
a. AMTROL, Inc.
b. Josam Company.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. PPP Inc.
e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
h. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
3. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.

4. Type: Copper tube with piston.
5. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.10 AIR VENTS
A. Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents:
1. Body: Bronze.
2. Pressure Rating: 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F (60 deg C).
3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
5. Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) minimum inlet.
6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.
B. Welded-Construction Automatic Air Vents:
1. Body: Stainless steel.

2. Pressure Rating: 150-psig (1035-kPa) minimum pressure rating.
3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
5. Size: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum inlet.
6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.
2.11 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES
A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:

the following:
following:
a. MIFAB, Inc.
b. PPP Inc.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum.
5. Body: Bronze.
6. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded, union, or solder joint.
7. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded or solder joint.
8. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not
chrome finished.
B. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:

the following:

following:
a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
3. Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum, trap makeup
connection.
4. Size: NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) minimum.
5. Material: Chrome-plated, cast brass.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to
other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.

2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap
fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe
diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or
under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
C. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with memory-stop
balancing valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D. Install water control valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with globe valve.
Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
E. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
F. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets
and with shutoff valve on outlet.
1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified.

2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.
G. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each water pressure-reducing valve, and
pump.
H. Install nonfreeze, nondraining-type post hydrants set in concrete or pavement.

I. Install freeze-resistant yard hydrants with riser pipe set in concrete or pavement. Do not encase
canister in concrete.
J. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
K. Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto floor
drain.
L. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a
minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for
proper flow.
M. Install drainage-type, trap-seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down
toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.
N. Install trap-seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of
1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust system for proper flow.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
general arrangement of piping and specialties.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
C. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or

sign on or near each of the following:
1. Pressure vacuum breakers.

2. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers.
3. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers.
4. Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies.
5. Carbonated-beverage-machine backflow preventers.
6. Dual-check-valve backflow preventers.
7. Reduced-pressure-detector, fire-protection backflow-preventer assemblies.
8. Double-check, detector-assembly backflow preventers.
9. Water pressure-reducing valves.
10. Calibrated balancing valves.
11. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves.
12. Manifold, thermostatic, water-mixing-valve assemblies.
13. Photographic-process, thermostatic, water-mixing-valve assemblies.
14. Primary water tempering valves.
15. Outlet boxes.
16. Hose stations.

17. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.
18. Trap-seal primer systems.
B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to
identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Identification."
A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:
1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer

double-check backflow-prevention assembly and double-check, detector-assembly
backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference
standard.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified
above.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.
C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.

SECTION 15150
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Special pipe fittings.
3. Encasement for underground metal piping.
1. Division 15 Section "Sewage Pumps."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.
B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
C. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
E. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).
2. Sanitary Sewer, Force-Main Piping: 50 psig (345 kPa).

Allen & Shariff Engineering SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be capable
of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. LEED Submittal:
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for selecting
seismic restraints.
2. Sovent Drainage System: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.
D. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping;
"NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and
"NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
product selection:

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.

2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class(es).
B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.
2.4 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant

fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
1. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated

shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
a. Manufacturers:
1) ANACO.
2) Fernco, Inc.
3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp.
4) Mission Rubber Co.
5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.
2. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-

steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
a. Manufacturers:
1) ANACO.
2) Clamp-All Corp.
3. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, two-piece, cast-iron

housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
a. Manufacturers:
1) MG Piping Products Co.
C. Rigid, Unshielded Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type, reducing- or transition-type

mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion-resistant-metal
tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:

a. ANACO.
A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.
1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought
copper, solder-joint fittings.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M (ASTM B 88M, Types B and C), water tube,
drawn temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-

copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket,
metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, annealed temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-

copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2.6 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste,
and vent patterns.
B. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:
1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated
2.7 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS
A. Flexible, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type,
reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and
corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.

b. Fernco, Inc.
c. Logan Clay Products Company (The).

d. Mission Rubber Co.
e. NDS, Inc.
f. Plastic Oddities, Inc.
2. Sleeve Materials:
a. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.

b. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
c. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe
materials being joined.
B. Shielded Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-
length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and
tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.

b. Mission Rubber Co.
C. Rigid, Unshielded, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type reducing- or

transition-type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion-
resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. ANACO.
D. Pressure Pipe Couplings: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type same size as, with pressure rating at
least equal to, and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined.
1. Manufacturers:

b. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div.
c. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc.
d. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div.
e. JCM Industries, Inc.
f. Romac Industries, Inc.
g. Smith-Blair, Inc.
h. Viking Johnson.
2. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.
4. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.
E. Flexible Ball Joints: Ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends
complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include gasketed ball-joint section and
ductile-iron gland, rubber gasket, and steel bolts.

1. Manufacturers:
a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc.
F. Expansion Joints: Two or three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve(s)

with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying with
AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated.
Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
1. Manufacturers:

b. Romac Industries, Inc.
c. Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div.
G. Wall-Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing
sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with
AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
1. Manufacturers:
a. SIGMA Corp.
2.8 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING
A. Description: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, minimum thickness.
B. Form: tube.
C. Color: natural.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel couplings;
and hubless-coupling joints.

3. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.
C. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be the following:
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and
hubless-coupling joints.
D. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be the following:
3. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.
a. Option for Vent Piping, NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 and DN 90): Hard
copper tube, Type M (Type C); copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
E. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

3. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
F. Underground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

3. Solid-wall, Schedule 40, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
G. Aboveground sanitary-sewage force mains NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50) shall be
the following:
1. Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B); copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
2. Steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints.
H. Aboveground sanitary-sewage force mains NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6 (DN 65 to DN 150) shall be the
following:
3. Grooved-end steel pipe, grooved-joint system fittings and couplings, and grooved joints.
A. Sanitary sewer piping outside the building is specified in Division 2 Section "Sanitary
Sewerage."

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 15

Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
D. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers.
E. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping.
F. Install underground, steel, force-main piping.
G. Install underground, ductile-iron, force-main piping according to AWWA C600. Install buried
piping inside the building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to sanitary sewer
piping outside the building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-
block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.
1. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
H. Install underground, copper, force-main tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
I. Install underground, ductile-iron, special pipe fittings according to AWWA C600.
J. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
K. Install wall-penetration fitting at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make
installation watertight.
L. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
M. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used
on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,
double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side
with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.

N. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past
each joint as completed.
O. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3
(DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4
(DN 100) and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
P. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:
1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Sovent Drainage System: Comply with ASSE 1043 and sovent fitting manufacturer's
written installation instructions.
3. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
Q. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab
is without membrane waterproofing.
R. Install ABS soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2661.
S. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.
T. Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
U. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
C. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.
D. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.

E. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-
F. Grooved Joints: Assemble joint with keyed coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to
coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
G. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.
A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."
B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge.
1. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
2. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sewage
pump discharge.
D. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to sewage backflow.
1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type, unless
2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves, unless drain has integral backwater valve.
3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
4. Backwater valve are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."
A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls

and Seismic Restraints."
B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Install
the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:
c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
C. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum
rods.
F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
rod.
rod.
5. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm)
rod.
G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
J. Install hangers for stainless-steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
K. Install supports for vertical stainless-steel piping every 10 feet (3 m).
L. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
rod.

M. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).
N. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
rod.
3. NPS 4 and 5 (DN 100 and 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
rod.
O. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
P. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code.
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated,
and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
D. Connect force-main piping to the following:
1. Sanitary Sewer: To exterior force main or sanitary manhole.

2. Sewage Pumps: To sewage pump discharge.

A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction
or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed
before it was tested.
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with
water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15
minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop.
Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps
filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-
stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into
piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer
inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain
constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect
plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
E. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence
of published procedures, as follows:
1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before
it was tested.
2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating

3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-
based latex paint.
END OF SECTION 15150END OF SECTION 15150

SECTION 15155
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:
1. Backwater valves.
2. Cleanouts.
3. Floor drains.
4. Trench drains.
5. Air-admittance valves.
6. Roof flashing assemblies.
7. Through-penetration firestop assemblies.
8. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
9. Flashing materials.
10. Solids interceptors.
1. Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for trench drains for storm
water, channel drainage systems for storm water, roof drains, and catch basins.
2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for hair interceptors.
3. Division 15 Section "Medical Plumbing Fixtures" for plaster sink interceptors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.
B. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
C. PP: Polypropylene plastic.
D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

Allen & Shariff Engineering SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent terminals.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
B. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that accessories, and

components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
intended use.
C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary
piping specialty components.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BACKWATER VALVES
A. Horizontal, Cast-Iron Backwater Valves:

the following:
following:
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or a
comparable product by one of the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.

b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
4. Standard: ASME A112.14.1.

5. Size: Same as connected piping.
6. Body: Cast iron.
7. Cover: Cast iron with bolted access check valve.
8. End Connections: Hub and spigot.
9. Type Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field
modified to hang closed.
10. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension to field-
installed cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover.
2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts:

the following:
following:

b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
g. Josam Company; Blucher-Josam Div.
4. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.
5. Size: Same as connected drainage piping
6. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected
piping.
7. Closure: Countersunk, brass plug.
8. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
9. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal.
B. Metal Floor Cleanouts:

the following:
following:

b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
g. Josam Company; Josam Div.
h. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
i. Josam Company; Blucher-Josam Div.
4. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout.

5. Size: Same as connected branch.
6. Type: Threaded, adjustable housing.
7. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.
8. Clamping Device: Not required.
9. Outlet Connection: Spigot.
10. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.
11. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with set-screws or other device.
12. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Polished bronze.
13. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
14. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
15. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.
17. Size: Same as connected branch.

18. Housing: Stainless steel.
19. Closure: Stainless steel with seal.
20. Riser: Stainless-steel drainage pipe fitting to cleanout.
C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:

the following:
following:

b. MIFAB, Inc.
4. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.

5. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
6. Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
7. Closure: , drilled-and-threaded brass plug.
9. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw.
10. Wall Access: Round, wall-installation frame and cover.
2.3 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:

the following:
following:
a. Commercial Enameling Co.

b. Josam Company; Josam Div.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. Prier Products, Inc.
e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
g. Watts Drainage Products Inc.


5. Pattern: Floor drain.
6. Body Material: Gray iron.
7. Seepage Flange: Required.
8. Anchor Flange: Required.
10. Outlet: Bottom.
11. Backwater Valve: Drain-outlet type.
12. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Not required.
13. Sediment Bucket: Not required.
14. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
15. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
16. Top Shape: Round.
17. Top Loading Classification: Light Duty.
18. Funnel: Not required.
19. Inlet Fitting: Gray iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal
primer valve connection.
20. Trap Material: Cast iron.
21. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
22. Trap Features: Trap-seal primer valve drain connection.
2.4 TRENCH DRAINS
A. Trench Drains:

the following:
following:

b. MIFAB, Inc.
4. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for trench drains.

5. Material: Ductile or gray iron.
6. Flange: Anchor.
8. Outlet: Bottom.
9. Grate Material: Ductile iron.
10. Grate Finish: Painted.

11. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
2.5 AIR-ADMITTANCE VALVES
A. Fixture Air-Admittance Valves:

the following:
following:
a. Ayrlett, LLC.
b. Durgo, Inc.
c. Oatey.
d. ProSet Systems Inc.
e. RectorSeal.
f. Studor, Inc.
3. Standard: ASSE 1051, Type A for single fixture or Type B for branch piping.
4. Housing: Plastic.
5. Operation: Mechanical sealing diaphragm.
6. Size: Same as connected fixture or branch vent piping.
B. Stack Air-Admittance Valves:

the following:
following:
a. Durgo, Inc.
b. Oatey.
c. Studor, Inc.
3. Standard: ASSE 1050 for vent stacks.

4. Housing: Plastic.
5. Operation: Mechanical sealing diaphragm.
6. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
2.6 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES
A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:

the following:
following:
a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div.

b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.
B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch- (1.6-
mm-) thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches (150 mm) from pipe, with
galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.
1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.

2. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.
3. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Open Drains:
1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot,
cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where
required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.
2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.
B. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:
1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal
primer valve connection.
2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) side inlet.
C. Air-Gap Fittings:
1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between
installed inlet and outlet piping.
2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.
3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.
4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.
5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect
waste piping.
D. Sleeve Flashing Device:
1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for
pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top

of fitting that will extend 1 inch (25 mm) above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe
extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.
2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.
E. Stack Flashing Fittings:
1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating

roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
F. Vent Caps:
1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include
vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.
G. Frost-Resistant Vent Terminals:
1. Description: Manufactured or shop-fabricated assembly constructed of copper, lead-

coated copper, or galvanized steel.
2. Design: To provide 1-inch (25-mm) enclosed air space between outside of pipe and
inside of flashing collar extension, with counterflashing.
H. Expansion Joints:
1. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M.

2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland.
3. End Connections: Matching connected piping.
4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.
2.8 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights
and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft. (15-kg/sq. m), 0.0469-inch (1.2-mm) thickness.
3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness.
B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft. (3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm) thickness.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft. (2.5 kg/sq. m or 0.27-mm) thickness.
C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-
inch (1.01-mm) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275) hot-dip
galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil (1.01-mm)
minimum thickness.
E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining
B. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout
deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to
remove valve cover for servicing.
C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger
drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller
and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
F. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.
Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less
than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
c. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not
greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.
3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
G. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Assemble and install ASME A112.3.1, stainless-steel channel drainage systems according to
ASME A112.3.1. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with surface.
I. Assemble non-ASME A112.3.1, stainless-steel channel drainage system components according

to manufacturer's written instructions. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with
adjacent surface.
J. Assemble FRP channel drainage system components according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with adjacent surface.
K. Assemble plastic channel drainage system components according to manufacturer's written

L. Install fixture air-admittance valves on fixture drain piping.
M. Install stack air-admittance valves at top of stack vent and vent stack piping.
N. Install air-admittance-valve wall boxes recessed in wall.
O. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
P. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
Q. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor

penetrations.
R. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch (25 mm) above floor.
S. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.
T. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer
connection.
1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
U. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping

discharge into sanitary drainage system.

V. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof
membrane.
W. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.
X. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch
(25-mm) clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.
Y. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy
access and maintenance.
Z. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch (25-mm)
clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.
AA. Assemble components of FOG disposal systems and install on floor. Install trap, vent, fresh-air
inlet, and flow-control fitting according to authorities having jurisdiction. Install shelf fastened
to reinforcement in wall construction and adjacent to unit, unless otherwise indicated. Install
culture bottle, culture metering pump, timer, and control on shelf. Install tubing between
culture bottle, metering pump, and chamber.
BB. Install grease interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to
authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing.
1. Above-Floor Installation: Set unit with bottom resting on floor, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Flush with Floor Installation: Set unit and extension, if required, with cover flush with
finished floor.
3. Recessed Floor Installation: Set unit in receiver housing having bottom or cradle
supports, with receiver housing cover flush with finished floor.
4. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral cleanout
on outlet.
CC. Install grease removal devices on floor. Install trap, vent, and flow-control fitting according to
authorities having jurisdiction. Install control panel adjacent to unit, unless otherwise indicated.
DD. Install oil interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to
authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing. Coordinate oil-interceptor
storage tank and gravity drain with Division 15 Section "Facility Fuel-Oil Piping."
EE. Install solids interceptors with cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors that do not
have integral cleanout on outlet. Install trap on interceptors that do not have integral trap and
are connected to sanitary drainage and vent systems.
FF. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.
GG. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.

HH. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. FOG Disposal Systems: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, connect flow-control fitting and fresh-
air inlet piping to unit inlet piping, and connect vent piping between trap and media chamber.
Connect electrical power.
D. Grease Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, and connect flow-control fitting and vent
to unit inlet piping. Install valve on outlet of automatic drawoff-type unit.
E. Grease Removal Devices: Connect controls, electrical power, factory-furnished accessories,

and inlet, outlet, and vent piping to unit.
F. Oil Interceptors: Connect inlet, outlet, vent, and gravity drawoff piping to unit; flow-control
fitting and vent to unit inlet piping; and gravity drawoff and suction piping to oil storage tank.
G. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
H. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm)
thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch
(1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors
and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches (250
mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm)
around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
(200 mm) around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made
flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing
into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or

sign on or near each of the following:
1. FOG disposal systems.

2. Grease interceptors.
3. Grease removal devices.
4. Oil interceptors.
5. Solids interceptors.
B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to
identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 15 Section "Identification for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect field-assembled and their installation, including piping and electrical connections,
and to assist in testing.
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

SECTION 15160
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Special pipe fittings.
3. Encasement for underground metal piping.
1. Division 15 Section "Sump Pumps."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.
B. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working-
pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).

2. Storm Drainage, Force-Main Piping: 50 psig (345 kPa).
B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be capable
of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum
Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures."

Allen & Shariff Engineering STORM DRAINAGE PIPIN
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. LEED Submittal:
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for selecting
seismic restraints.
2. Controlled-Flow Storm Drainage System: Include calculations, plans, and details.
D. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF-
sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
product selection:

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service Extra-Heavy class(es).

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.
2.4 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant

fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
1. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated

shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
a. Manufacturers:
1) ANACO.
2) Fernco, Inc.
2. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-

steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
a. Manufacturers:
1) ANACO.
2) Clamp-All Corp.
3. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, two-piece, cast-iron

housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
a. Manufacturers:
1) MG Piping Products Co.
C. Rigid, Unshielded Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type, reducing- or transition-type

mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion-resistant-metal
tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. ANACO.

2.5 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS
A. Flexible, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type,
reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and
corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.

b. Fernco, Inc.
c. Logan Clay Products Company (The).
d. Mission Rubber Co.
e. NDS, Inc.
f. Plastic Oddities, Inc.
2. Sleeve Materials:
a. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.

b. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
c. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe
materials being joined.
B. Shielded Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-
length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and
tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:

b. Mission Rubber Co.
C. Rigid, Unshielded, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type reducing- or

transition-type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion-
resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. ANACO.
D. Pressure Pipe Couplings: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type same size as, with pressure rating at
least equal to, and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined.
1. Manufacturers:

b. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div.
c. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc.
d. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div.
e. JCM Industries, Inc.
f. Romac Industries, Inc.

g. Smith-Blair, Inc.
h. Viking Johnson.
2. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.
4. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.
E. Flexible Ball Joints: Ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends
complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include gasketed ball-joint section and
ductile-iron gland, rubber gasket, and steel bolts.
1. Manufacturers:
F. Expansion Joints: Two or three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve(s)

with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying with
AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated.
Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
1. Manufacturers:

b. Romac Industries, Inc.
c. Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div.
G. Wall-Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing
sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with
AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
1. Manufacturers:
a. SIGMA Corp.
2.6 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING
A. Description: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, high-density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.004-

inch (0.10-mm) or LLDPE film of 0.008-inch (0.20-mm) minimum thickness.
B. Form: tube.
C. Color: natural.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aboveground storm drainage piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller shall be the following:
coupled joints.
C. Aboveground, storm drainage piping NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger shall be the following:
coupled joints.
D. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller shall be the following:
2. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexible, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining
dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.
E. Underground, storm drainage piping NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger shall be the following:
2. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexible, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining
dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.
F. Aboveground storm drainage force mains NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50) shall be
the following:
G. Aboveground storm drainage force mains NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 6 (DN 65 and DN 150) shall be
the following:
3. Grooved-end steel pipe, grooved-joint system fittings and couplings, and grooved joints.

A. Storm sewer and drainage piping outside the building are specified in Division 2 Section "Storm
Drainage."
B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 15

Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
D. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm
sewers. Cleanouts are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."
E. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main
piping.
F. Install underground, steel, force-main piping. Install encasement on piping according to

ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
G. Install underground, ductile-iron, force-main piping according to AWWA C600. Install buried
piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to storm sewer
piping outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-block
supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.
H. Install underground, copper, force-main tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
I. Install underground, ductile-iron, special pipe fittings according to AWWA C600.
J. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15
K. Install wall-penetration fitting system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.
Make installation watertight.
L. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
M. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and
long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of

standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of
drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
N. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past
each joint as completed.
O. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3
(DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4
(DN 100) and larger.
2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
P. Install force mains at elevations indicated.
Q. Install engineered controlled-flow storm drainage piping in locations indicated.
R. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab
is without membrane waterproofing.
S. Install ABS storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2661.
T. Install PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665.
U. Install underground PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
V. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic
B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron
Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
C. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Calked Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.
D. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast
Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.
E. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-

F. Grooved Joints: Cut groove ends of pipe and assemble grooved ends of pipes, grooved-end
fittings, and grooved-end-piping couplings according to AWWA C606.
G. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.
A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."
B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each sump pump discharge.
1. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
2. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sump pump
discharge.
D. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow.
1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves.

2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
3. Backwater valve are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."
A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls

and Seismic Restraints."
B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Install
the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
C. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum
rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
rod.
rod.
rod.
6. Spacing for 10-foot (3-m) lengths may be increased to 10 feet (3 m). Spacing for fittings
is limited to 60 inches (1500 mm).
G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
J. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
rod.
K. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).
L. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
rod.

rod.
rod.
M. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
N. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting
to join dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.
D. Connect force-main piping to the following:
1. Storm Sewer: To exterior force main or storm manhole.

2. Sump Pumps: To sump pump discharge.
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in
absence of published procedures, as follows:
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed
before it was tested.
3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, except outside leaders, on completion of
roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow,
but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection
starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
E. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence
of published procedures, as follows:
1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before
it was tested.
2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

SECTION 15165
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping specialties:
1. Backwater valves.
2. Cleanouts.
3. Trench drains.
4. Roof drains.
5. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties.
6. Flashing materials.
1. Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties" for backwater valves, floor
drains, trench drains and channel drainage systems connected to sanitary sewer, air
admittance valves, FOG disposal systems, grease interceptors and removal devices, oil
interceptors, and solid interceptors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B. FOG: Fats, oils, and greases.
C. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
D. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.
E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
F. PP: Polypropylene plastic.
G. PUR: Polyurethane plastic.
H. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

Allen & Shariff Engineering STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BACKWATER VALVES
A. Horizontal, Cast-Iron Backwater Valves:

the following:
following:

b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

5. Size: Same as connected piping.
6. Body: Cast iron.
7. Cover: Cast iron with bolted access check valve.
8. End Connections: Hub and spigot.
9. Type Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field
modified to hang closed.
10. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension to field-
installed cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover.

2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts:

the following:
following:

b. MIFAB, Inc.
g. Josam Company; Blucher-Josam Div.
4. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.
5. Size: Same as connected drainage piping
6. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match
connected piping.
7. Closure: Countersunk, brass plug.
9. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal.
B. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:

the following:
following:

b. MIFAB, Inc.
4. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.

5. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
6. Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
7. Closure: Countersunk, drilled-and-threaded brass plug.

9. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw.
10. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-installation
frame and cover.
2.3 TRENCH DRAINS
A. Trench Drains:

the following:
following:

b. MIFAB, Inc.
4. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for trench drains.

5. Material: Ductile or gray iron.
6. Flange: Anchor.
8. Outlet: Bottom.
9. Grate Material: Ductile iron.
10. Grate Finish: Painted.
11. Top Loading Classification: Light Duty.
2.4 ROOF DRAINS
A. Metal Roof Drains:

the following:
following:

b. MIFAB, Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
4. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M.

5. Pattern: Roof drain.
6. Body Material: Cast iron.
7. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Not required.
8. Flow-Control Weirs: Not required.
9. Outlet: Bottom.
10. Dome Material: Cast iron.
11. Extension Collars: Not required.
12. Underdeck Clamp: Not required.
13. Sump Receiver: Required.
2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, 12 oz./sq. ft. (3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm) thickness.
B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-
inch (1.01-mm) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275) hot-dip
galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil (1.01-mm)
minimum thickness.
D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
G. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining
B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger
drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller
and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
E. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Assemble and install ASME A112.3.1, stainless-steel channel drainage systems according to
ASME A112.3.1. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with surface.
G. Assemble non-ASME A112.3.1, stainless-steel channel drainage system components according

to manufacturer's written instructions. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with
adjacent surface.
H. Assemble FRP channel drainage system components according to manufacturer's written

I. Assemble plastic channel drainage system components according to manufacturer's written

J. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor

penetrations.
K. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's
written installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in Division 7.
1. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so that there will be no leakage between drain
and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
L. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof
membrane.
M. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy
access and maintenance.
N. Install manufactured, gray-iron downspout boots at grade with top 6 inches (152 mm) above
grade. Secure to building wall.
O. Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade.

P. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm)
thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch
(1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors
and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches (250
mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm)
around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
(200 mm) around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and
specialties for the following:
1. Hot-water heating piping.

2. Chilled-water piping.
3. Condenser-water piping.
4. Makeup-water piping.
5. Condensate-drain piping.
6. Air-vent piping.
7. Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping.
1. Division 15 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic
piping.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
B. RTRF: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) fittings.
C. RTRP: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) pipe.
A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following
minimum working pressure and temperature:
1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 160 psig at 200 deg F.

2. Chilled-Water Piping: 60 psig at 200 deg F.
3. Condenser-Water Piping: 32 psig at 150 deg F.

Allen & Shariff Engineering HYDRONIC PIPING
4. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F.
5. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F.
6. Blowdown-Drain Piping: 200 deg F.
7. Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F.
8. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to
which it is attached.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following:
1. Plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cement.

2. RTRP and RTRF with adhesive.
3. Pressure-seal fittings.
4. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for
calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.
5. Air control devices.
6. Chemical treatment.
7. Hydronic specialties.
B. LEED Submittal:
C. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers,
supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of
the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion
joints and loops.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
F. Field quality-control test reports.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty
valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
H. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at
Project site.
A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by the pressure-seal joint
manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe
couplings and fittings.
2. Fiberglass Pipe and Fitting Installers: Installers of RTRF and RTRP shall be certified by
the manufacturer of pipes and fittings as having been trained and qualified to join
fiberglass piping with manufacturer-recommended adhesive.
B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX.
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,
products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME
label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Water-Treatment Chemicals: Furnish enough chemicals for initial system startup and for
preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve and automatic flow control valve,
include flowmeter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.
B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.
C. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV.
D. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

following:
a. Anvil International, Inc.

b. Victaulic Company of America.

2. Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze
casting.
3. Tongue and recess couplings will be acceptable only with the use of a torque wrench per
manufacturer’s installation instructions. Contractor shall remove and replace any
improperly installed grooved joints.
4. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions, rigid pattern with offsetting
angle-pattern, bolt pads, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting. Ductile-iron
housing with key matching pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated FlushSeal® EPDM
gasket rated for minimum 230 deg F for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts,
Victaulic Series 607 “Quick Vic”.
E. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as
indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.
C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.
D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.
E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised
ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
F. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.
G. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts,
nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
1. Material Group: 1.1.

2. End Connections: Butt welding.
3. Facings: Raised face.
H. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:

following:
a. Anvil International, Inc.

b. Victaulic Company of America.
2. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M,
Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated

steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders constructed to
accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to
secure grooved pipe and fittings.
3. Tongue and recess couplings will be acceptable only with the use of a torque wrench per
manufacturer’s installation instructions. Contractor shall remove and replace any
improperly installed grooved joints.
4. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central
cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to
secure grooved pipe and fittings.
I. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in
which they are installed.
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper
with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
a. Use CPVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 490 g/L or less when
b. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated
2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

a. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when
b. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated
H. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
1. Use fiberglass adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated
I. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working
temperatures and pressures.
A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:

the following:

b. IPEX Inc.
c. KBi.
2. CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with one threaded brass or copper insert and one
Schedule 80 solvent-cement-joint end.
B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:

the following:

b. IPEX Inc.
c. KBi.
d. NIBCO INC.
2. MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC union. Include brass or copper end, Schedule 80 solvent-
cement-joint end, rubber gasket, and threaded union.
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper-alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-
joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions:

the following:

c. Hart Industries International, Inc.
d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; AquaSpec Commercial Products Division.
2. Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180

deg F.
D. Dielectric Flanges:

the following:

c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working

pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric-Flange Kits:

the following:

b. Calpico, Inc.
2. Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type

neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and
steel backing washers.
3. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
F. Dielectric Couplings:

the following:

a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corporation.
2. Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining; threaded

ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
G. Dielectric Nipples:

the following:
a. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d. Victaulic Company of America.
2. Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain,
threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.6 VALVES
A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in
Division 15 Section "Valves."
B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements

specified in Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls."
C. Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves:

the following:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Body: Bronze or brass.

3. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.
4. Seat: Brass.
5. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.
6. Diaphragm: EPT.
7. Low inlet-pressure check valve.
8. Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown.
9. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.

10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed,
with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.
D. Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves:

the following:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Body: Bronze or brass.

3. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.
4. Seat: Brass.
5. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.
6. Diaphragm: EPT.
7. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber.
8. Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown.
9. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.
10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating
pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.
E. Automatic Flow-Control Valves:

the following:
a. Flow Design Inc.

b. Griswold Controls.
2. Body: Brass or ferrous metal.

3. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self cleaning, and removable.
4. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve.
5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate.
6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed.
7. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure
fluctuations.
8. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig.
9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F.

2.7 AIR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Amtrol, Inc.
2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
4. Taco.
B. Manual Air Vents:
1. Body: Bronze.
2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.
4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.
5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.
6. CWP Rating: 150 psig.
C. Automatic Air Vents:
1. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
3. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float.
4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.
5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4.
D. Expansion Tanks:
1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum
operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank
for gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested with taps fabricated and labeled according to
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
2. Air-Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and
stainless-steel ball check, 100-gal. unit only; sized for compression-tank diameter.
Provide tank fittings for 125-psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating
temperature.
3. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig working pressure and
240 deg F maximum operating temperature; constructed to admit air to compression tank,
drain water, and close off system.
4. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4-inch- diameter gage glass,
and slotted-metal glass guard.
E. Diaphragm -Type Expansion Tanks:

1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum
operating temperature. Factory test with taps fabricated and supports installed and
labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
2. Diaphragm: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to
maintain required expansion capacity.
3. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.
F. Tangential-Type Air Separators:
1. Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig minimum working
pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature.
2. Air Collector Tube: Perforated stainless steel, constructed to direct released air into
expansion tank.
3. Tangential Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged
connections for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
4. Blowdown Connection: Threaded.
5. Size: Match system flow capacity.
G. In-Line Air Separators:
1. Tank: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to
maximize air separation.
2. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig.
3. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F.
H. Air Purgers:
1. Body: Cast iron with internal baffles that slow the water velocity to separate the air from
solution and divert it to the vent for quick removal.
2. Maximum Working Pressure: 150 psig.
2.8 CHEMICAL TREATMENT
A. Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; 5-gal.
capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.
1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent

accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.
2. Provide bypass feeder for each closed loop system.
2.9 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and
larger.

3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50
percent free area.
B. Basket Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain
connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and
larger.
percent free area.
C. T-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end cap for strainer
maintenance.
2. End Connections: Grooved ends.
percent free area.
D. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective

jacket.
2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected.
3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.
E. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Fiber-reinforced rubber body.

2. End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges.
3. Performance: Capable of misalignment.
F. Expansion fittings are specified in Division 15 Section "Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.
B. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:
1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges
and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.
2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved,
mechanical joints.
C. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:
D. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:
mechanical joints.
E. Condenser-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:
F. Condenser-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:
mechanical joints.
G. Makeup-Water Piping Installed Belowground and within Slabs: Type K, annealed-temper

copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. Use the fewest possible joints.
H. Condensate-Drain Piping: Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent welded joints.
I. Blowdown-Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the
service in which blowdown drain is installed.
J. Air-Vent Piping:
1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic
piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Outlet: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.
K. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining
methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-to-
plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection
to each piece of equipment.
B. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main.
C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.
D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.
E. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to
the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation
requirements.
F. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping
as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
otherwise.
D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
F. Install piping at indicated slopes.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing
of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple
with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to
the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.
P. Install valves according to Division 15 Section "Valves."
Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere
as indicated.
S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-
line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown
connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for
strainers smaller than NPS 2.
T. Install expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides as specified in
Division 15 Section "Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops."
U. Identify piping as specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and
Supports." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or
longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with
copper pipe.
6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from
scratching pipe.
C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
12. NPS 14: Maximum span, 25 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch.
13. NPS 16: Maximum span, 27 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch.
14. NPS 18: Maximum span, 28 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches.
15. NPS 20: Maximum span, 30 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches.
D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
E. Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written
instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the
fewest practical rigid anchor points.
F. Fiberglass Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written
instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the
fewest practical rigid anchor points.
G. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll
grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe
wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.
3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required
for system air venting.
B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only.
Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.
C. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2
percent upward slope toward tank.
D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and
larger.
E. Install tangential air separator in pump suction. Install blowdown piping with gate or full-port
ball valve; extend full size to nearest floor drain.
F. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position
with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above the floor. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4
bypass line, from main with full-size, full-port, ball valve in the main between bypass
connections. Install NPS 3/4 pipe from chemical feeder drain, to nearest equipment drain and
include a full-size, full-port, ball valve.
G. Install expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge
tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank.
1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose.

2. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of
tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload building
components and structural members.
H. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank
is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.
3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment
connections.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are
installed, only one bypass is required.
D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according
to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test
pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace
strainer screens.
4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be
capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged
joints to isolate equipment.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to
protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to
freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be
used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use
drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.
3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any
vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to
pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum

yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building
Services Piping."
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,
joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6. Prepare written report of testing.
C. Perform the following before operating the system:
1. Open manual valves fully.

2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation.
3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure.
4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating
freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,
cooling towers, to specified values.
7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.

SECTION 15185
HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

2.Close-coupled, end-suction centrifugal pumps. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering
3.Separately coupled, horizontal, in-line centrifugal pumps.
4.Separately coupled, vertical, in-line centrifugal pumps.
5.1. SSeparately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction centrifugal pumps.
9.2. Automatic condensate pump units.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.
B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating
characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of
product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templates
for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.
2. Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on drawings and product submittals,
and be specifically identified with the applicable Victaulic style number.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.

Allen & Shariff Engineering HYDRONIC PUMPS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hydronic pumps through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of hydronic
pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
intended use.
D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces
and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe
openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
B. Store pumps in dry location.
C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.
D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.
E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.7 COORDINATION
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
product selection:

1.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
2.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Formatted: Bullets and Numbering
2.Aurora Pump; Division of Pentair Pump Group. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering
4.Burks Pumps; Div. of Crane Pumps & Systems.
5.Demming Div.; Crane Co.
6.Flowserve Corporation; Div. of Ingersoll-Dresser Pumps.
7.Grundfos Pumps Corporation.
8.Little Giant Pump Co.; Subsidiary of Tecumseh Products Co.
9.MEPCO (Marshall Engineered Products Co.).
10.PACO Pumps.
11.Patterson Pump Co.; a Subsidiary of The Gorman-Rupp Co.
12.Peerless Pump; a Member of the Sterling Fluid Systems Group.
5.Packing Seal: Stuffing box, with a minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided Formatted: Bullets and Numbering
yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing
gland.
Formatted: Bullets and Numbering
2.62.2 SEPARATELY COUPLED, BASE-MOUNTED, END-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1.American-Marsh Pumps.
2.1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering
3.Aurora Pump; Division of Pentair Pump Group.
4.2. Bell & Gossett; Div. of ITT Industries.
5.Buffalo Pumps, Inc.; an Ampco Pittsburgh Co.
6.Burks Pumps; Div. of Crane Pumps & Systems.
7.Deming Pumps; Div. of Crane Pumps & Systems.
8.Flowserve Corporation; Div. of Ingersoll-Dresser Pumps.
9.MEPCO (Marshall Engineered Products Co.).
10.PACO Pumps.
11.Scot Pump; Div. of Ardox Corp.
12.3. Taco, Inc.
13.4. Thrush Company Inc.
14.5. Weinman; Div. of Crane Pumps & Systems.
B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled,

end-suction pump designed for base mounting, with pump and motor shafts horizontal. Rate
pump for 175-psig minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225
deg F.
C. Pump Construction:
1. Casing: Cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage tappings at inlet
and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and flanged
connections. Provide integral mount on volute to support the casing, and attached piping

to allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnecting piping or requiring
the realignment of pump and motor shaft.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cCast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to
shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. Trim impeller to match specified
performance.
3. Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve or Stainless steel.
4. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel
spring, and Buna-N or EPT bellows and gasket.
5. Packing Seal: Stuffing box, with a minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated
braided yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze
packing gland.
6. Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings contained in cast-iron housing with
grease fittings.
D. Shaft Coupling: Molded rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration.
Couplings shall be drop-out type to allow disassembly and removal without removing pump
shaft or motor and EPDM coupling sleeve for variable-speed applications.
E. Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel;
removable; attached to mounting frame.
F. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from
ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and
motor.
G. Motor: Single speed, with permanently lubricated ball bearings, unless otherwise indicated;
secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment. Comply with requirements in
Division 15 Section "Motors."
2.112.4 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Suction Diffuser: Angle pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast or ductile-iron body and end cap,
pump-inlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers; bronze
or stainless-steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory-fabricated support.
B. Grooved End Suction Diffuser: 300-psig pressure rating, ductile-iron body, 304 stainless steel
frame and perforated sheet diffuser with 5/32” diameter holes 3”-12” inlet sizes, or 3/16”
diameter holes 14”-16” inlet sizes. Removable 20 mesh stainless steel start-up prefilter, outlets
for pressure/temperature drain connections, and base support boss. Victaulic Series 731-G.
C. Triple-Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast or ductile-iron body,
pump-discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve
features. Brass gage ports with integral check valve, and orifice for flow measurement.
D. Tri-Service Valve Assembly: Straight pattern, combination shut-off, throttling and non-slam
check valve. Vic®-300 MasterSeal™ butterfly valve assembled with Style 779 Venturi Check
and grooved joint couplings (style to be determined by system requirements). Working pressures
to 300 PSI. (Optional: Vic-Plug valve Series 377 assembled with Venturi Check Style 779,

working pressure to 175 PSI). Memory stops standard. Transition couplings Style 307 required
for plug valve assembly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.13.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
pump installation.
C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps and controllers. Refer to Division 15
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
B. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3.
3.3 PUMP INSTALLATION

B.A. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
C.B. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and
weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
D.C. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration
Isolation”. Fabricate brackets or supports as required. Hanger and support materials are
specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
F.D. Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling before setting. Do not
reconnect couplings until alignment procedure is complete.

1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal wedges with
small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches
between pump base and foundation for grouting.
2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check coupling
faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are level and plumb.
3.4 ALIGNMENT
A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on foundation, grout has been
set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and piping connections have been made.
B. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
C. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment.
D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill
baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in
place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to pump to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.
D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
E. Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps.
F. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.
G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between
pump casing and valves.
H. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge, at integral pressure-gage tapping, or
install single gage with multiple input selector valve.
J.I. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
K.J. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
L.K. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
L. Grooved Joint Installation: Grooved joint piping systems shall be installed in accordance with
the manufacturer’s guidelines and recommendations. All grooved piping specialties shall be the
products of a single manufacturer. Grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained field

representative shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the installation of
grooved piping products. Factory trained representative shall periodically review the product
installation. Contractor shall remove or replace any improperly installed products.
3.6 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Check piping connections for tightness.
3. Clean strainers on suction piping.
4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:
a. Verify bearing lubrication.

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is
free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate
until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.
5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
6. Start motor.
7. Open discharge valve slowly.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures and Demonstration and Training."

SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following HVAC water-treatment systems:
1. Bypass chemical-feed equipment.

2. Chemical treatment test equipment.
3. HVAC water-treatment chemicals.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EEPROM: Electrically erasable, programmable read-only memory.
B. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or
for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.
C. TDS: Total dissolved solids.
A. Water quality for HVAC systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological
growth for optimum efficiency of HVAC equipment without creating a hazard to operating
personnel or the environment.
B. Base HVAC water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, HVAC system
equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating
personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Closed hydronic systems, including hot-water heating and chilled water, shall have the
following water qualities:
1. pH: Maintain a value within 9.0 to 10.5.

2. "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm.
3. Boron: Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm.
4. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm.

Allen & Shariff Engineering HVAC WATER TREATMENT
5. Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 2000 ppm.
6. TDS: Maintain a maximum value of 2000 ppm.
7. Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.
8. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.
9. Microbiological Limits:
a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/ml.

b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml.
c. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml.
d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml.
e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml.
D. Passivation for Galvanized Steel: For the first 60 days of operation.
1. pH: Maintain a value within 7 to 8.

2. Calcium Carbonate Hardness: Maintain a value within 100 to 300 ppm.
3. Calcium Carbonate Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 300 ppm.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories for the following products:
1. Bypass feeders.
2. Chemical test equipment.
3. Chemical material safety data sheets.
4. Centrifugal separators.
B. Shop Drawings: Pretreatment and chemical treatment equipment showing tanks, maintenance
space required, and piping connections to HVAC systems. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sensors, injection pumps, water filtration units, and
controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
E. Other Informational Submittals:
1. Water-Treatment Program: Written sequence of operation on an annual basis for the

application equipment required to achieve water quality defined in the "Performance
Requirements" Article above.
2. Water Analysis: Illustrate water quality available at Project site, based on site sampling
and lab analysis.
3. Passivation Confirmation Report: Verify passivation of galvanized-steel surfaces, and
confirm this observation in a letter to Architect.

A. HVAC Water-Treatment Service Provider Qualifications: An experienced HVAC water-

treatment service provider capable of analyzing water qualities, installing water-treatment
equipment, and applying water treatment as specified in this Section.
intended use.
1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Scope of Maintenance Service: Provide chemicals and service program to maintain water
conditions required above to inhibit corrosion, scale formation, and biological growth for
cooling, chilled-water piping and heating, hot-water piping and equipment. Services and
chemicals shall be provided for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion, and
shall include the following:
1. Initial water analysis and HVAC water-treatment recommendations.

2. Startup assistance for Contractor to flush the systems, clean with detergents, and initially
fill systems with required chemical treatment prior to operation.
3. Field service and consultation, monthly.
4. Customer report charts and log sheets.
5. Laboratory technical analysis.
6. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with
government regulations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. ARC
2. Aquagy
3. Anderson Chemical Co, Inc.
4. Aqua-Chem, Inc.; Cleaver-Brooks Div.
5. Barclay Chemical Co.; Water Management, Inc.
6. Boland Trane Services
7. GE Betz.
8. GE Osmonics
9. H-O-H Chemicals, Inc.
10. Metro Group. Inc. (The); Metropolitan Refining Div.
11. G.F. Morin Company
12. ONDEO Nalco Company.
13. Watcon, Inc.

2.2 MANUAL CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT
A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch fill
opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or threaded fill
cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system
pressure in the vessel.
1. Capacity: 5 gal..
2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig.
2.3 STAINLESS-STEEL PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Stainless-Steel Tubing: Comply with ASTM A 269, Type 316.
B. Stainless-Steel Fittings: Complying with ASTM A 815/A 815M, Type 316, Grade WP-S.
C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Stainless-Steel Ball Valves: ASTM A 351, Type 316 stainless-steel
body; ASTM A 276, Type 316 stainless-steel stem and vented ball, carbon-filled TFE seats,
threaded body design with adjustable stem packing, threaded ends, and 250-psig SWP and 600-
psig CWP ratings.
2.4 CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Corrosion Test-Coupon Assembly: Constructed of corrosive-resistant material, complete with

piping, valves, and mild steel and copper coupons. Locate copper coupon downstream from
mild steel coupon in the test-coupon assembly.
1. Two-station rack for closed-loop systems.

2. Four-station rack for open systems.
2.5 CHEMICALS
A. Chemicals shall be as recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are

compatible with piping system components and connected equipment, and that can attain water
quality specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
2.6 FILTRATION EQUIPMENT
A. Centrifugal Separators:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product.
a. LAKOS; a div. of Claude Laval Corporation.
2. Description: Simplex separator housing with baffles and chambers for removing
particles from water by centrifugal action and gravity.
3. Housing: With manufacturer's proprietary system of baffles and chambers.

a. Construction: Fabricate and label steel separator housing to comply with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
b. Inlet: Designed with tangential entry to produce centrifugal flow of feedwater.
c. Vortex Chamber: Designed for downward vortex flow and gravity separation of
particles.
d. Collection Chamber: Designed to hold separated particles.
e. Outlet: Near top of unit.
f. Purge: At bottom of collection chamber.
g. Pipe Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded according to ASME B1.20.1.
h. Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Steel, Class 150 flanges according to
ASME B16.5 or grooved according to AWWA C606. Provide stainless-steel
flanges if tank is stainless steel.
4. Motorized Purge Valve: Gate or plug pattern valve.
a. Motorized Valves: Butterfly-type, flanged or grooved-end, ductile-iron body, with

EPDM valve seat and stem seal; with ASTM B 148 aluminum bronze disc.
5. Strainer: Stainless-steel basket type mounted on pump suction.

6. Piping: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, F, or E; Grade B, Schedule 40 black steel, with
flanged, grooved, or threaded joints and malleable, steel welding, or ductile-iron fittings.
7. Piping: ASTM B 88, Type L copper water tube, copper-alloy solder-joint fittings, and
brazed, flanged, or grooved joints.
8. Support: Hung. Fabricate supports to separator housing with reinforcement strong

enough to resist separator movement during a seismic event when separator base is
anchored to building structure.
9. Capacities and Characteristics: (As scheduled.)
10. Liquid Recover System: (As scheduled.)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER ANALYSIS
A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install chemical application equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain
manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require
servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate.
B. Install water testing equipment on wall near water chemical application equipment.
C. Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems, including hot-water heating and chilled
water, and equipped with the following:

1. Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings.
2. Install test-coupon assembly in bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings.
3. Install a gate or full-port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below feeder
inlet.
4. Install a swing check on inlet after the isolation valve.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Make piping connections between HVAC water-treatment equipment and dissimilar-metal

piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic
D. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water-treatment equipment inlet and outlet. Metal general-duty
valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."
E. Refer to Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers
required in makeup water connections to potable-water systems.
F. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in Division 16 Sections for connecting electrical

equipment.
G. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
H. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Report results in writing.
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and

electrical connections.

2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been
cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing
chemicals for water-treatment system.
3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during the
preliminary phase of HVAC systems' startup procedures.
4. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test
results are achieved.
5. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for
each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
6. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping until
it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before
it has been tested and approved.
7. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects.
8. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until no leaks exist.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E. At six-week intervals following Substantial Completion, perform separate water analyses on

hydronic systems to show that automatic chemical-feed systems are maintaining water quality
within performance requirements specified in this Section. Submit written reports of water
analysis advising Owner of changes necessary to adhere to Part 1 "Performance Requirements"
Article.
F. Comply with ASTM D 3370 and with the following standards:
1. Silica: ASTM D 859.

2. Steam System: ASTM D 1066.
3. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067.
4. Iron: ASTM D 1068.
5. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and equipment. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."
B. Training: Provide a "how-to-use" self-contained breathing apparatus video that details exact
operating procedures of equipment.

SECTION 15195
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.

2. Piping specialties.
3. Piping and tubing joining materials.
4. Valves.
5. Pressure regulators.
6. Service meters.
8. Grout.
9. Concrete bases.
10. Natural Gas Booster System
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:
1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig (690 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
2. Service Regulators: 100 psig (690 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
3. Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter: 3.5” water column.

Allen & Shariff Engineering FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: More than 0.25 psig (3.45 kPa) but not more
than 2 psig (13.8 kPa).
C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment,
including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using
performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following:
1. Piping specialties.
2. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with associated components.
3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of
selected models.
4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.
5. Service meters. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. Include bypass fittings and
meter bars supports.
8. Escutcheons.
9. Natural Gas Booster System. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.
B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and
elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple
pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building
structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch per foot (1:50).

2. Detail mounting, supports, and valve arrangements for service meter assembly and
pressure regulator assembly.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For natural-gas piping and equipment indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.
D. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is
shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items
involved.
E. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated with
other services and utilities.
F. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
G. Welding certificates.

H. Field quality-control reports.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pressure regulators and service meters to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging
coating, and protect from direct sunlight.
D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.
A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact
utility-locating service for area where Project is located.
B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply according to requirements
indicated:
1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption
of natural-gas service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Construction Manager's
written permission.

1.9 COORDINATION
B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind
finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and
Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.

2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket
welding.
3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,
and threaded ends.
4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150,
including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and
facings:
a. Material Group: 1.1.

b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.
c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.
d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings,
and spiral-wound metal gaskets.
e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel
underground.
5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of

epoxy, adhesive, and PE.
a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.
6. Mechanical Couplings:

of the following:
1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Division of Dresser, Inc.

2) Smith-Blair, Inc.
b. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish.

c. Buna-nitrile seals.
d. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts.

e. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or
steel pipe to steel pipe.
f. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory
equipped with anode.
B. Corrugated, Stainless-Steel Tubing: Comply with ANSI/IAS LC 1.

following:
a. OmegaFlex, Inc.
b. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Parflex Division.
c. Titeflex.
d. Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp.
2. Tubing: ASTM A 240/A 240M, corrugated, Series 300 stainless steel.

3. Coating: PE with flame retardant.
a. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products

according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1) Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2) Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
4. Fittings: Copper-alloy mechanical fittings with ends made to fit and listed for use with
corrugated stainless-steel tubing and capable of metal-to-metal seal without gaskets.
Include brazing socket or threaded ends complying with ASME B1.20.1.
5. Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations.
6. Manifolds: Malleable iron or steel with factory-applied protective coating. Threaded
connections shall comply with ASME B1.20.1 for pipe inlet and corrugated tubing
outlets.
7. Operating-Pressure Rating: 5 psig (34.5 kPa).
C. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: Comply with ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A).
1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper, and streamlined pattern.

2. Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24, Class 150.
a. Gasket Material: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings,
and spiral-wound metal gaskets.
b. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel or stainless steel.
3. Protective Coating for Underground Tubing: Factory-applied, extruded PE a minimum

of 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.
D. Annealed-Temper Copper Tube: Comply with ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A).
1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper, and streamlined pattern.

2. Flare Fittings: Comply with ASME B16.26 and SAE J513.

a. Copper fittings with long nuts.
b. Metal-to-metal compression seal without gasket.
c. Dryseal threads complying with ASME B1.20.3.
3. Protective Coating for Underground Tubing: Factory-applied, extruded PE a minimum

of 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.
E. Tin-Lined Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, seamless, annealed, with interior tin-plated lining.
1. Flare Fittings: Comply with ASME B16.26 and SAE J513.
a. Copper fittings with long nuts.

b. Metal-to-metal compression seal without gasket.
c. Dryseal threads complying with ASME B1.20.3.
d. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:
1) Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.

2) Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.
3) Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.
e. PE body with molded-in, stainless-steel support ring.

f. Buna-nitrile seals.
g. Acetal collets.
h. Electro-zinc-plated steel stiffener.
2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:
1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.

2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69.
3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75.
4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating.
5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa).
6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel.
7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
8. Maximum Length: 72 inches (1830 mm).
B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.
1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector.

2. Nitrile seals.
3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected.
4. For indoor or outdoor applications.
5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.
C. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for
3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50
percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa).
D. Basket Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain
connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for
percent free area.
E. T-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end cap for strainer
maintenance.
2. End Connections: Grooved ends.
percent free area.
F. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire
screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end
connection.
A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F (540 deg C) complying
with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are
prohibited.
2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.
B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Comply with
ASME B16.33.

2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.
4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"
Articles.
5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for
valves 1 inch (25 mm) and smaller.
6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) to NPS 2 (DN 50) shall have initials
"WOG" permanently marked on valve body.
C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Comply with
ASME B16.38.

2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.
3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"
Articles.
4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.
D. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

following:
a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.
d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.
2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

3. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.
5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.
6. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends.
7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
E. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

following:


3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.
5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.
6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.
F. Two-Piece, Regular-Port Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

following:


3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.
5. Seats: Reinforced TFE.
6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.
G. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.

following:
a. Lee Brass Company.

b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

3. Plug: Bronze.

4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff
5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.
6. Pressure Class: 125 psig (862 kPa).
H. Cast-Iron, Nonlubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.

following:
a. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

b. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.
c. Xomox Corporation; a Crane company.
2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B.

3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron.
4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic.
5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas.
6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve
Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
I. Cast-Iron, Lubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.

following:
a. Flowserve.
b. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc.
c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
d. Milliken Valve Company.
e. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.
f. R&M Energy Systems, A Unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc.
2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B.

3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron.
4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic.
5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas.
6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve
Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. General Requirements:
1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas.

2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.
3. Elevation compensator.
4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for
regulators NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
B. Service Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.

following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Actaris.
b. American Meter Company.
c. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.
d. Invensys.
e. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.
3. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.

4. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.
5. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.
6. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the
valve port.
7. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
8. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
9. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum
pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.
10. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed
150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.
11. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.
12. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not
connected to vent piping.
13. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig (690 kPa).
C. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.

following:

a. Actaris.
b. American Meter Company.
c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc.
d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.
e. Invensys.
f. Maxitrol Company.
g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.
3. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.

6. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the
valve port.
7. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
9. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum
pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.
10. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed
150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.
11. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.
12. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not
connected to vent piping.
13. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig (13.8 kPa).
D. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.

following:
a. Canadian Meter Company Inc.

b. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div.
c. Harper Wyman Co.
d. Maxitrol Company.
e. SCP, Inc.
3. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.

6. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.
8. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish.
9. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by
10. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig (13.8 kPa).

A. Dielectric Unions:

following:

c. Hart Industries International, Inc.
e. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
f. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1034 kPa).

3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials.
4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas.
5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint,
plain, or welded end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Dielectric Flanges:

following:

c. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
d. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials.
C. Dielectric-Flange Kits:

following:

b. Calpico Inc.

3. Companion-flange assembly for field assembly.
4. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or PE bolt
sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

2.7 SLEEVES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
2.8 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.

following:

b. Calpico Inc.
c. Metraflex Company (The).
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe and sleeve.
3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one nut and bolt for each
sealing element.
2.9 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General Requirements for Escutcheons: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor
plates, with ID to fit around pipe or tube, and OD that completely covers opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Escutcheons: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-

plated finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated or rough brass.
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated or rough brass.

E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: With spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: With hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.
G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Escutcheons: Cast-iron floor plate.
H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Escutcheons: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.10 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.11 NATURAL GAS BOOSTER SYSTEM
A. Description: Provide hermetic gas booster of multistage centrifugal design built in overhung con-
struction where the impellers are mounted on an extended motor shaft.
1. Design: Booster shall compress a maximum 9,000 ICFH of natural gas at 13.8" w.c.
boost pressure with inlet conditions of 70°F and 14.7 PbSIA. The specific gravity of the
gas shall be 0.6.
2. The pressure shall remain practically constant from the surge limit to the full volume rat-
ing while the power consumption shall increase in direct proportion to the volume of gas
handled at operating speed. The gas booster performance and design shall be approved
and listed by Underwriters Laboratories.
B. Motor: The motor shall be capable of operating continuously in the natural gas environment.
1. Rating: The motor shall be rated at 1.0 HP and suitable for operation on
230/460V/3PH/60HZ at 3500 RPM.
2. Enclosure: Shall be explosion proof per NEMA Class 1, Division 1, Group D classifica-
tion with thermal overload protection.
C. Gas Booster Casing: Shall be cylindrical fabricated steel construction. The enclosing
heads shall be of similar metal, properly braced for strength. The inlet and outlet connections
shall be flanged. The casing shall be leak tight to 10-3 cc/sec, with drive fans contained within
casing shell.
D. Impellers: The impeller peripheral speed shall not exceed 25,000 FPM. There shall be at least
1/8 inch clearance between each impeller and all stationary parts. Impellers shall be fabricated
from high strength aluminum alloy, and shall be attached to the shaft by a clamped or tapered
bushing hub.
E. Deflectors: Fabricated steel deflectors with properly curved guide vanes for directing the gas to
each succeeding impeller shall be provided.

F. Shaft and Bearings: The motor shall have an oversized, extended shaft supported by two over-
sized, anti-friction grease lubricated bearings designed to absorb both thrust and radial loads.
Each shaft shall be sized so that the rotating assembly shall operate at a minimum of 20% below
the first critical speed.
G. Vibration and Performance Test: Each motor and compressor assembly shall be balanced for
minimum vibration (1.5 mils or less for 3500 RPM units) and shall be capable of operation
throughout its’ design range without the need for hold down or mounting bolts. Each unit shall
be given a complete factory performance test over its full range. The results of this test shall be
comparable to ASME Code Test requirements. A multiple orifice plate shall be installed on the
end of a fabricated still pipe section. For this test the pipe section will be at least one and one
-half pipe diameters long and the same diameter as the blower outlet on which it will be installed.
The outlet sections shall be sized for maximum velocity of 4600 FPM and 100% rated flow.
Pressure taps flush with the inside diameter of the test section shall be installed at least one-half
pipe diameter before the orifice plate. Sharp-edged orifices shall be opened to atmosphere, a few
at a time and pressure, temperature, speed, voltage, amperage, and kilowatt readings shall be rec-
orded for each test point. The air volume at a particular discharge pressure shall then be read
from a calibrated orifice chart and this volume shall be multiplied by the number of open orifices.
On request, certified performance curves shall then be supplied showing the exact performance
and efficiencies of each specific machine. Prior tests on similar or identical machines shall not be
acceptable.
H. Flexible Joints: To the inlet and discharge of each gas booster shall be installed a flanged expan-
sion joint suitable for natural gas service. Flexible joints shall be of the same diameter as the gas
booster’s inlet and discharge (4”) and shall serve as vibration isolation between the gas booster
and the gas train piping.
I. Isolation Valves: A lubricated plug valve shall be installed on the inlet and discharge of each gas
booster. Valves shall be gas tight and approved for natural gas service. Valves shall be of the
same diameter as the gas booster inlet and discharge (4”) and shall serve to isolated gas flow to
and from each gas booster. A valve shall also be installed between the inlet and discharge piping
to act as a service by-pass to allow gas to flow down stream if the booster is ever taken out of
service.
J. Check Valve: A check valve (4”) shall be installed on the common inlet main to the gas booster
and on the inlet piping to each gas booster. Valves shall be low-pressure drop type, approved for
natural gas service and shall be of the same diameter as the gas booster inlet. Valves shall be
mounted in a horizontal position and shall serve to prevent reversal of gas flow.
K. Gas Pressure Regulator: A gas pressure regulator shall be installed on the discharge piping of the
gas booster. The regulator shall be of the service type with lock-up feature and approved for natural
gas service. The regulator shall serve to limit the discharge pressure to 13.5 Inches W.C.G. Two (2)
flanged isolation of lubricated plug type shall be installed at a point 2-feet upstream and 2-feet
downstream of the regulator.
L. Low Pressure Switch: Provide one (1) UL Approved, manual reset type low inlet pressure
switch. The switch shall be used to shut down the on-line booster in the event of below
normal supply pressure. The switch shall be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure, and preset at
3.5” w.c.

M. Pressure Gauges: A pressure gauge shall be installed at the inlet main to the gas booster,
at the discharge of the gas booster and at the discharge of the pressure regulator. Gauges
shall have a scale of 0-30 inches W.C. and shall be suitable by the manufacturer for natural
gas service. Gauges shall be installed in a straight section of pipe in an upright position
and at least two (2) diameters from any device or elbow. Gauges shall include shut-off
cocks.
N. Manual Bypass Valve (For Low/No Flow Operation): Install a booster recirculating by-pass line
from the common booster discharge main to the common booster inlet main. The by-pass line
shall include a 2-inch diameter shut-off valve designed for natural gas service. The by-pass shall
serve to insure a nominal amount of gas flow is maintained through the booster and that slight
heat rise of gas is dissipated during low/no flow operation.
O. Control Panel (Single Operation): Provide a NEMA 12 Control Panel for the operation of one (1)
Spencer Natural Gas Booster. The control panel shall be manufactured by the gas booster
manufacturer and shall be built in accordance with UL508A Standards for Industrial Control
Panels and shall include:
1. One (1) OSHA type lock-out/tag-out circuit breaker disconnect switch.
2. One (1) ATL magnetic, non-reversing motor starter for 1.0 HP, 230/460V/3PH/60HZ GB
motor.
3. One (1) Control transformer.
4. One (1) Hand – Off – Auto selector switch to control Gas Booster.
• Hand - Allows start/shutdown from local pushbuttons only.
• Off - Off
• Auto – Allows start/shutdown of on-line booster via remote signal (dry contact).
5. Loss of Power Sequencing: In the event of supply power loss to the Spencer Control
Panel (SCP), the SCP shall “power up” automatically upon restoration of power supply
when the Hand-Off-Auto selector switch is in the Hand position (i.e.: facility power out-
age and restoration by an emergency supply). When in the Auto position, the booster
shall “power up” automatically only if a remote dry contact from the process controls is
maintained in the “closed” position (i.e.: calling for booster to run).
6. One (1) Set of Start/Stop push buttons.
7. Provisions (dry contacts) for remote start/shutdown of booster via a signal from process
controls.
8. Provisions for a low inlet gas pressure switch to shutdown the on-line booster, energize a
warning light, and energize the common alarm relay upon low supply pressure.
9. Provision for a N.C. motor high temperature switch to shut down the on-line booster,
energize a warning light, and energize the common alarm relay.
10. Provisions for a motor starter overload relay to shut down the on-line booster, flash the
booster running pilot light, and energize the common alarm relay.
11. One (1) Lamp Test push button to energize all pilot lights for a lamp test.
12. Panel Display lights for:
• Power “ON”
• Booster “Running”
• Low Supply Pressure
• High Motor Temperature
• Starter Overload Fault
13. One (1) Alarm horn (mounted in panel door) with reset and silence push buttons

14. One (1) Provision (dry contacts) to activate a remote alarm when panel common alarm is
activated.
15. One (1) - Red mushroom-type emergency shutdown button in panel door
16. One (1) Elapsed “run time” hour meter.
17. Miscellaneous components and hardware to assure proper functioning.
P. Start-Up: An authorized factory-trained manufacturer’s representative shall perform system start

-up services including inspection of the installation and training of owner’s personnel in the
operation and maintenance of the system.
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4
mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core
encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is
buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored yellow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping
connections before equipment installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.
B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 to determine that natural-gas utilization

devices are turned off in piping section affected.
C. Comply with NFPA 54 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.
3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.
B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches (900 mm) below finished
grade. Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching,
and backfilling.
1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches (900 mm) below finished grade,
install it in containment conduit.

C. Install underground, PE, natural-gas piping according to ASTM D 2774.
D. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:
1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.
2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating
manufacturer.
3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.
E. Copper Tubing with Protective Coating:
1. Apply joint cover kits over tubing to cover, seal, and protect joints.
2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating
manufacturer.
F. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
G. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in diameter.
H. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm)
annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
I. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for
pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and
install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that
cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
J. Install pressure gage downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in
Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."
3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to
layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
otherwise.
F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
G. Locate valves for easy access.
H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.
I. Install piping free of sags and bends.
J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K. Install escutcheons at penetrations of interior walls, ceilings, and floors.
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
b. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass
type with polished chrome-plated finish.
c. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-
steel type.
d. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
polished chrome-plated finish.
e. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type
and set screw.
f. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-brass
finish.
g. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set
screw or spring clips.
h. Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.
i. Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw or
spring clips.
j. Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.
2. Existing Piping:
a. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass

type with chrome-plated finish.
b. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-
steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips.
c. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type
with chrome-plated finish.
d. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type
with concealed hinge and set screw.

e. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with rough-
brass finish.
f. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with
concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips.
g. Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type.
h. Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with set screw or
spring clips.
i. Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate type.
L. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements
in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
M. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
N. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for
roughing-in requirements.
O. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including
service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install
where condensate is subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.
Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm)
long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove
plug or cap.
P. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure
protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
Q. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or
floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.
R. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas

piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe
with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to
outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be
installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit.
2. In Floors: Install natural-gas piping with welded or brazed joints and protective coating
in cast-in-place concrete floors. Cover piping to be cast in concrete slabs with minimum
of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other
metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not
embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate.
3. In Floor Channels: Install natural-gas piping in floor channels. Channels must have
cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation.
4. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from
physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports.

a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker
barriers.
5. Prohibited Locations:
a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash
chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator
shafts.
b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.
S. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side
down.
T. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
U. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to
each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.
V. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.
W. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated
valve.
X. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are
specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."
3.5 SERVICE-METER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
A. Install service-meter assemblies aboveground, on concrete bases.
B. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service regulators. Shutoff valves are not required at
second regulators if two regulators are installed in series.
C. Install strainer on inlet of service-pressure regulator and meter set.
D. Install service regulators mounted outside with vent outlet horizontal or facing down. Install
screen in vent outlet if not integral with service regulator.
E. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service meters. Install dielectric fittings downstream
from service meters.
F. Install service meters downstream from pressure regulators.
G. Install metal bollards to protect meter assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 5
Section "Metal Fabrications" for pipe bollards.

A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel
tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.
B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.
C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate
for servicing and testing.
D. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing.
E. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.
3.7 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C. Threaded Joints:
1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.
2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe.
4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal
D. Welded Joints:
1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and

welding operators.
2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds
and where damage to coating occurs during construction.
Chapter.
F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas
service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.
G. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare
dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not
overtighten.

H. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
A. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices
specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 15 Section
"Hangers and Supports."
C. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum
rod sizes:
1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches (2438 mm); minimum rod size,
3/8 inch (10 mm).
2. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm);
minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).
4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod
size, 1/2 inch (13 mm).
5. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 5/8 inch
(15.8 mm).
D. Install hangers for horizontal drawn-temper copper tubing with the following maximum spacing
and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/8 (DN 10): Maximum span, 48 inches (1220 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
2. NPS 1/2 and NPS 5/8 (DN 15 and DN 18): Maximum span, 72 inches (1830 mm);
3. NPS 3/4 and NPS 7/8 (DN 20 and DN 22): Maximum span, 84 inches (2134 mm);
4. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 96 inches (2440 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10
mm).
E. Install hangers for horizontal, corrugated stainless-steel tubing with the following maximum
spacing and minimum rod sizes:
(10 mm).
(10 mm).

3. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Larger: Maximum span, 96 inches (2440 mm); minimum rod size,
3/8 inch (10 mm).
3.9 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.
B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment
grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.
C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.
D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within
72 inches (1800 mm) of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve
and appliances or equipment.
E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as
practical to inlet of each appliance.
A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for piping and
valve identification.
B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished
grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.11 PAINTING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for painting interior and exterior
natural-gas piping.
B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars,
earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or
protective coating.
1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (flat).
d. Color: Gray.
C. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars,
earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or
protective coating.
1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q.

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat).
d. Color: Gray.
2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (flat).
d. Color: Gray.
D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and
by procedures to match original factory finish.
3.12 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm)
larger in both directions than supported unit.
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of the base.
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
6. Use 3000-psig (20.7-MPa), 28-day, compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as
specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.14 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain earthquake valves.
3.15 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Underground natural-gas piping shall be the following:
1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion, or mechanical couplings; service-line risers
with tracer wire terminated in an accessible location.
2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints, or mechanical couplings. Coat
pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
3. Annealed-temper copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Coat pipe
and fittings with protective coating for copper tubing.
B. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be the following:
1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.
3. Annealed-temper copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints.
C. Branch Piping in Cast-in-Place Concrete to Single Appliance: Annealed-temper copper tube

with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Install piping embedded in concrete with no
joints in concrete.
D. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and
fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
3.16 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG (3.45
kPa)
A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be the following:
1. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with mechanical fittings having socket or threaded ends
to match adjacent piping.
2. Annealed-temper, tin-lined copper tube with flared joints and fittings.
3. Annealed-temper, copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints.
4. Aluminum tube with flared fittings and joints.
B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following:

3. Drawn-temper copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints.
C. Underground, below building, piping shall be the following:

D. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and
fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
E. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded or
wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective
coating for steel piping.
3.17 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES MORE THAN 0.5 PSIG (3.45
kPa) AND LESS THAN 5 PSIG (34.5 kPa)
A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be the following:
1. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with mechanical fittings having socket or threaded ends
to match adjacent piping.
2. Annealed-temper, tin-lined copper tube with flared joints and fittings.
3. Annealed-temper, copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints.
4. Aluminum tube with flared fittings and joints.
B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following:

2. Steel pipe with steel welding fittings and welded joints.
3. Drawn-temper copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints.
C. Underground, below building, piping shall be the following:

D. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat
underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
E. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded or
wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective
coating for steel piping.
3.18 UNDERGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping utility's
gas mains and listed by an NRTL.
B. Underground:
1. PE valves.

2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze plug valves.
3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron, lubricated plug valves.
3.19 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller at service meter shall be the following:
1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.

2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
3. Bronze plug valve.
B. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger at service meter shall be the following:

3. Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valve.
C. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller shall be the following:

D. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger shall be the following:

3. Cast-iron, lubricated plug valve.
E. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be the following:


SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components:
1. Faucets for lavatories.

2. Flushometers.
3. Toilet seats.
4. Protective shielding guards.
5. Fixture supports.
6. Dishwasher air-gap fittings.
7. Disposers.
8. Water closets.
9. Urinals.
10. Lavatories.
11. Kitchen sinks.
12. Service basins.
1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for exterior plumbing fixtures and hydrants.
2. Division 15 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers."
3. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers, floor drains, and
specialty fixtures not included in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with
disabilities.
B. Cast Polymer: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material. This material includes cultured-marble and

solid-surface materials.
C. Cultured Marble: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material with surface coating.

Allen & Shariff Engineering PLUMBING FIXTURE
D. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings
specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub
spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are
included where indicated.
E. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
F. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.
G. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
H. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-,

scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim,
fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials
and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit WE 2: Documentation indicating flow and water consumption
requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category
through one source from a single manufacturer.
1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single
manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that
category.
intended use.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities" for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy
Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"
for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing
fixtures:
1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.

2. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M.
3. Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1.
4. Stainless-Steel Commercial, Handwash Sinks: NSF 2 construction.
5. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
6. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.
7. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory
and sink faucets:
1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M.
2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M.
3. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
4. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
5. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
6. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
7. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.
8. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
9. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
10. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.
11. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous fittings:
1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.

2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.
3. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
4. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
5. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409.
6. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
7. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.
J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430.

2. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
3. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.
4. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3.
5. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.
6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
7. Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499.
8. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.
9. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
10. Plastic Shower Receptors: ANSI Z124.2.
11. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
12. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
13. Whirlpool Bathtub Equipment: UL 1795.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of whirlpools that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures of unit shell.

b. Faulty operation of controls, blowers, pumps, heaters, and timers.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Period for Commercial Applications: One year(s) from date of Substantial
Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Shells: Five years from date of
Substantial Completion.
4. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Pumps and Blowers: Five years from
date of Substantial Completion.
5. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Electronic Controls: Five years from
date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
3. Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed,
but no fewer than 12 of each type.
4. Provide hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, with separate
compartments for each type and size of extra materials listed above.

5. Flushometer Tank, Repair Kits: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed, but
no fewer than 2 of each type.
6. Water-Closet Tank, Repair Kits: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed.
7. Toilet Seats: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LAVATORY FAUCETS
A. Lavatory Faucets,:

the following:
following:
a. American Standard Companies, Inc.

b. Bradley Corporation.
c. Chicago Faucets.
d. Delta Faucet Company.
e. Elkay Manufacturing Co.
f. Just Manufacturing Company.
g. Speakman Company.
h. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.
j. Chicago Faucets.
k. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC.
l. Hydrotek International, Inc.
m. Just Manufacturing Company.
n. Sloan Valve Company.
4. Description: Single-control mixing valve. Include hot- and cold-water indicators;

coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and
fixture receptor.
a. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass.

b. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
c. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm (1.5 L/min.).
d. Maximum Flow: 0.25 gal. (0.95 L).
e. Centers: Single hole.
f. Mounting: Deck, exposed.
g. Valve Handle(s): Lever.
h. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 (DN 10) tubing, with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) male adaptor.
i. Spout: Rigid type.
j. Spout Outlet: Aerator.

k. Operation: Sensor.
l. Drain: Grid.
m. Tempering Device: Thermostatic.
2.2 SINK FAUCETS
A. Sink Faucets:

the following:
following:

b. Bradley Corporation.
c. Chicago Faucets.
d. Delta Faucet Company.
e. Eljer.
f. Elkay Manufacturing Co.
g. Just Manufacturing Company.
h. Moen, Inc.
i. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.
j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.
k. Hydrotek International, Inc.
l. Speakman Company.
4. Description: Kitchen faucet without spray. Include hot- and cold-water indicators;
coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and
fixture receptor.
a. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass General-duty, solid brass or copper or

brass underbody with brass cover plate.
b. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
c. Maximum Flow Rate: 1.5 gpm, unless otherwise indicated.
d. Mixing Valve: Single control.
e. Backflow Protection Device for Hose Outlet: Not required.
f. Backflow Protection Device for Side Spray: Not required.
g. Centers: Adjustable.
h. Mounting: Deck,.
i. Handle(s): Lever.
j. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 (DN 10) tubing with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) male adapter.
k. Spout Type: Swing, round tubular Swivel gooseneck.
l. Spout Outlet: Aerator.
m. Vacuum Breaker: Not required.
n. Operation: Noncompression, manual.
o. Drain: Lift and turn.

2.3 FLUSHOMETERS
A. Urinal Flushometers,:

the following:
following:
a. Coyne & Delany Co.

b. Delta Faucet Company.
c. Sloan Valve Company.
d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.
e. Hydrotek International, Inc.
f. Sloan Valve Company.
4. Description: Flushometer for urinal water-closet-type fixture. Include brass body with
corrosion-resistant internal components, non-hold-open feature, control stop with check
valve, vacuum breaker, copper or brass tubing, and polished chrome-plated finish on
exposed parts.
a. Internal Design: Intergral Solenoid Operator.

b. Style: Exposed.
c. Trip Mechanism: Hardwired sensor actuator.
d. Consumption: 0.13 gal./flush (0.5 L/flush).
e. Tailpiece Size: NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and length to top of bowl.
2.4 TOILET SEATS
A. Toilet Seats,:

the following:
following:

b. Bemis Manufacturing Company.
c. Church Seats.
d. Eljer.
4. Description: Toilet seat for water-closet-type fixture.

a. Material: Molded, solid plastic with antimicrobial agent.
b. Configuration: Open front without cover.
c. Size: Elongated.
d. Hinge Type: SR, self-raising.
e. Class: Standard commercial.
f. Color: White.
2.5 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers,:

the following:
following:
a. Engineered Brass Co.

b. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc.
c. TCI Products.
d. TRUEBRO, Inc.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.
3. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-
water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA) requirements.
B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures,:

the following:
following:
a. TRUEBRO, Inc.
3. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and
cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.
2.6 FIXTURE SUPPORTS

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Josam Company.
2. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc.
3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc.
6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
C. Water-Closet Supports,:
1. Description: Combination carrier designed for standard mounting height of wall-

mounting, water-closet-type fixture. Include single or double, vertical or horizontal, hub-
and-spigot or hubless waste fitting as required for piping arrangement; faceplates;
couplings with gaskets; feet; and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include
additional extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide pipe space.
D. Urinal Supports,:
1. Description: Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and
fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture for wall-mounting, urinal-type fixture.
Include steel uprights with feet.
2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.
2.7 DISHWASHER AIR-GAP FITTINGS
A. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings,:

the following:
following:
a. B & K Industries, Inc.

b. Brass Craft Mfg. Co.; a Subsidiary of Masco Corporation.
c. Brasstech Inc.; Newport Brass Div.
d. Dearborn Brass; a div. of Moen, Inc.
e. Geberit Manufacturing, Inc.
f. JB Products; a Federal Process Corporation Company.
g. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
h. Watts Brass & Tubular; a division of Watts Regulator Co.
3. Description: Fitting suitable for use with domestic dishwashers and for deck mounting;
with plastic body, chrome-plated brass cover; and capacity of at least 5 gpm (0.32 L/s);
and inlet pressure of at least 5 psig (35 kPa) at a temperature of at least 140 deg F (60
deg C). Include 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) ID inlet and 7/8-inch- (22-mm-) ID outlet hose
connections.
4. Hoses: Rubber and suitable for temperature of at least 140 deg F (60 deg C).
a. Inlet Hose: 5/8-inch (16-mm) ID and 48 inches (1219 mm) long.

b. Outlet Hose: 7/8-inch (22-mm) ID and 48 inches (1219 mm) long.
2.8 DISPOSERS
A. Disposers,:

the following:
following:

b. In-Sink-Erator; a div. of Emerson Electric Co.
c. KitchenAid.
d. Maytag Co.
4. Description: Continuous-feed household, food-waste disposer. Include reset button; wall

switch; corrosion-resistant chamber with jam-resistant, cutlery- or stainless-steel grinder
or shredder; NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) outlet; quick-mounting, stainless-steel sink flange;
antisplash guard; and combination cover/stopper.
a. Type: Continuous-feed household.

b. Model: Sound-insulated chamber.
c. Motor: 115-V ac, 1725 rpm, 1/3 hp with overload protection.
2.9 WATER CLOSETS
A. Water Closets,:

the following:
following:
a. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.

b. American Standard Companies, Inc.
c. American Standard Companies, Inc.
d. Gerber
4. Description Accessible, wall-mounting, back-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed for

flushometer valve operation.

a. Style: One piece.
1) Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design.

2) Design Consumption: 1.6 gal./flush & 1.1 gal./flush.
3) Color: White.
b. Supply: NPS 1 chrome-plated brass or copper with screwdriver stop.

c. Style: Flushometer valve.
1) Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design.

2) Design Consumption: 1.6 gal./flush & 1.1 gal./flush.
3) Color: White.
2.10 URINALS
A. Urinals,:

the following:
following:

b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.
c. Mansfield Plumbing Products, Inc.
d. Gerber
4. Description: Accessible, wall-mounting, back-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed for

ultra low flush flushometer valve operation.
a. Type: Ultra low flush.

b. Strainer or Trapway: Open trapway with integral trap.
c. Design Consumption: 1 gal./flush (3.8 L/flush).
d. Color: White.
e. Supply Spud Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
f. Outlet Size: NPS 2 (DN 50).
2.11 LAVATORIES
1. Description: Counter-mounting, vitreous-china fixture.
a. Type: Self-rimming.
b. Oval Lavatory Size: 19 by 16 inches (483 by 406 mm).
c. Faucet Hole Punching: One hole.
d. Faucet Hole Location: Top.

e. Color: White.
f. Faucet: Lavatory for separate drain.
g. Supplies: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) chrome-plated copper with stops.
h. Drain: Grid with offset waste.
1) Location: Near back of bowl.
i. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/4 by NPS 1-1/2 (DN 32 by DN 40) chrome-plated, cast-
brass P-trap;, 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick tubular brass waste to wall; and wall
escutcheon.
j. Drain Piping: Schedule 40 PVC, NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) P-trap;, tubular waste to
wall; and wall escutcheon.
1) Exception: Omit P-trap if hair interceptor is required.
k. Hair Interceptor: Not required.

l. Protective Shielding Guard(s):
2.12 KITCHEN SINKS
A. Kitchen Sinks,:

the following:
following:
a. Commercial Enameling Company.

b. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC.
c. American Standard Companies, Inc.
d. Eljer.
e. Dayton Products, Inc.
f. Elkay Manufacturing Co.
g. Just Manufacturing Company.
h. Moen, Inc.
i. Sink Faucet:
j. Supplies: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) chrome-plated copper with stops.
k. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) chrome-plated, cast-brass P-trap; 0.045-inch-
(1.1-mm-) thick tubular brass waste to wall; and wall escutcheon(s).
l. Drain Piping: Schedule 40 PVC, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) P-trap; tubular waste to wall;
continuous waste; and wall escutcheon(s).
m. Disposer: .
n. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fitting: Not required.
o. Hot-Water Dispenser: Not required

2.13 SERVICE BASINS
A. Service Basins,:

the following:
following:
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Acorn Engineering Company.

b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.
c. Florestone Products Co., Inc.
d. Precast Terrazzo Enterprises, Inc.
e. Stern-Williams Co., Inc.
f. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.
g. Florestone Products Co., Inc.
h. Mustee, E. L. & Sons, Inc.
i. Swan Corporation (The).
j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
4. Description: Flush-to-wall, floor-mounting, precast terrazzo fixture with rim guard.
a. Shape: Square.
b. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).
c. Height: 6 inches (150 mm).
d. Tiling Flange: Not required.
e. Rim Guard: On all top surfaces.
f. Color: Not applicable.
g. Faucet: Sink.
h. Drain: Grid with NPS 3 (DN 80) outlet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.
B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be
installed.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers'
B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.
1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.
C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building

substrate.
E. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
F. Install floor-mounting, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate and wall
bracket and onto waste fitting seals.
G. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
H. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
I. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture.
Valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."
J. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to
sanitary drainage system.
K. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage
system.
L. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide
side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with
disabilities to reach.
M. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of
compartment.
N. Install toilet seats on water closets.
O. Install trap-seal liquid in dry urinals.

P. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are
not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
Q. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop
valves.
R. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if
faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
S. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.
T. Install traps on fixture outlets.
1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
U. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have disposer. Install switch where indicated
or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.
V. Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in countertop with spout over sink.
W. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Escutcheons are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
X. Set service basins in leveling bed of cement grout. Grout is specified in Division 15 Section
"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
Y. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
D. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where
installed.

B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified
components.
C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate
properly.
E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings,
and controls.
B. Operate and adjust disposers and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units and
controls.
C. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.
D. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods
and materials. Do the following:
1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers
and spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.
B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect
exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by
Owner.

SECTION 15415
DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Style W, wall-mounting drinking fountains.

2. Type PB, pressure with bubbler, Style W, wall-mounting water coolers.
3. Fixture supports.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
C. Operation and maintenance data.
intended use.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public
Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for fixtures for people with disabilities.
C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"
for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
D. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers" for style
classifications.
E. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI 1010, "Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-
Water Coolers," for water coolers and with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water
Coolers" for type and style classifications.
F. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of
Refrigerants" for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant unless

Allen & Shariff Engineering DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLER
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS
A. Water Coolers,:

the following:
following:
a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.

b. Halsey Taylor.
c. Haws Corporation.
d. Larco, Inc.
e. Oasis Corporation.
f. Sunroc Corp.
4. Description: Accessible, ARI 1010, Type PB, pressure with bubbler, Style W, wall-
mounting water cooler for adult-mounting height.
a. Cabinet: , all stainless steel.

b. Bubbler: One, with adjustable stream regulator, located on each cabinet deck.
c. Control: Push button.
d. Supply: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) with ball, gate, or globe valve.
e. Filter: One or more water filters complying with NSF 42 and NSF 53 for cyst and
lead reduction to below EPA standards; with capacity sized for unit peak flow rate.
f. Drain(s): Grid with NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) minimum horizontal waste and trap
complying with ASME A112.18.1.
g. Cooling System: Electric, with hermetically sealed compressor, cooling coil, air-
cooled condensing unit, corrosion-resistant tubing, refrigerant, corrosion-resistant-
metal storage tank, and adjustable thermostat.
1) Capacity: 8 gph (0.0084 L/s) of 50 deg F (10 deg C) cooled water from 80
deg F (27 deg C) inlet water and 90 deg F (32 deg C) ambient air
temperature.
2) Electrical Characteristics: 1/6 hp; 120-V ac; single phase; 60 Hz.
h. Support: Type II, water cooler carrier. Refer to "Fixture Supports" Article.
2.2 FIXTURE SUPPORTS


B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Josam Co.
2. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc.
3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc.
6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
C. Description: ASME A112.6.1M, water cooler carriers. Include vertical, steel uprights with feet
and tie rods and bearing plates with mounting studs matching fixture to be supported.
1. Type I: Hanger-type carrier with two vertical uprights.

2. Type II: Bilevel, hanger-type carrier with three vertical uprights.
3. Supports for Accessible Fixtures: Include rectangular, vertical, steel uprights instead of
steel pipe uprights.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Use carrier off-floor supports for wall-mounting fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Set freestanding and pedestal drinking fountains on floor.
C. Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate and attach wall-mounting fixtures, unless
B. Install fixtures level and plumb. For fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by
C. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations where they can be
easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."
D. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage
system.
E. Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern
escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Escutcheons are specified in
Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

F. Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant,
silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 7
Section "Joint sealants."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, traps, and risers, and with soil, waste, and vent piping.
Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
C. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
A. Water Cooler Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with
requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
1. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

2. Report test results in writing.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.
B. Adjust water cooler temperature settings.

SECTION 15446
SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following sump pumps and accessories, inside the building, for
building storm drainage systems:
1. Submersible sump pumps.

2. Sump pump basins and pits.
3. Packaged, submersible, drainage pump units.
1. Division 15 Section "Sewage Pumps" for application in sanitary drainage systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of sump pump specified. Include certified performance
curves with operating points plotted on curves, and rated capacities of selected models,
furnished specialties, and accessories.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each sump pump to include in emergency, operation, and
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of sump
pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
intended use.

Allen & Shariff Engineering SUMP PUMPS
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases and pits. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
product selection:

2.2 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. ABS Pumps, Inc.

2. Aermotor Pumps, Inc.
3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Industries.
4. Goulds Pumps; ITT Industries.
5. Grundfos Pumps Corp.
6. Little Giant Pump Co.
7. Stancor, Inc.
8. Weil Pump Company, Inc.
9. Zoeller Company.
B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, simplex, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction,

submersible, direct-connected sump pumps complying with UL 778 and HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3
for submersible sump pumps.
C. Casing: Cast iron; with cast-iron inlet strainer, legs that elevate pump to permit flow into
impeller, and vertical discharge with companion flange for piping connection.

D. Impeller: stainless steel; statically and dynamically balanced, semiopen nonclog design,
overhung, single suction, keyed and secured to shaft.
E. Casing: Stainless steel; with stainless-steel inlet strainer, legs that elevate pump to permit flow
into impeller, and vertical discharge with companion flange suitable for piping connection.
F. Impeller: Stainless steel or other corrosion-resistant material.
G. Casing and Impeller: Cast-iron casing with metal inlet strainer and brass, bronze, or cast-iron
impeller.
H. Casing and Impeller: Cast-iron or plastic casing with inlet strainer and metal or plastic impeller.
I. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory-sealed, grease-lubricated ball bearings.
J. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type, with built-in overload protection; three-
conductor waterproof power cable of length required, and with grounding plug and cable-
sealing assembly for connection at pump. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section
"Motors."
1. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor with moisture alarm.
K. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40,
galvanized-steel pipe or PVC.
L. Basin or Pit Cover: Cast iron or steel with bituminous coating and strong enough to support
controls. See Part 2 "Sump Pump Basins and Pits" Article for other requirements.
M. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal-mounted float switch; with float, float rod,
and rod buttons.
N. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal-mounted float switch; with float, float rod,
and rod buttons. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on successive
cycles and to operate multiple units if one pump cannot handle load.
O. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal mounted unless wall mounting is indicated;
with two mercury-float switches in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric
cables.
P. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal mounted unless wall mounting is indicated;
with three mercury-float switches in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric
cables. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on successive cycles
and to operate multiple units if one pump cannot handle load.
1. Float Guide: Pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins of depth greater than 60
inches (1500 mm).
2. High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm, with electric bell; 120-V
ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell.

3. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with mercury-float-
switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 120-V ac, with transformer and contacts
for remote alarm bell.
Q. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 6, 120-V ac, float switch, mounted on discharge piping.
2.3 SUMP PUMP BASINS
A. Description: Factory fabricated basin with sump, pipe connections, and separate cover.
B. Sump: Fabricate watertight, with sidewall openings for pipe connections.
1. Material: Fiberglass.
2. Reinforcement: Mounting plates for pumps, fittings, and accessories.
3. Anchor Flange: Same material as or compatible with sump, cast in or attached to sump,
in location and of size required to anchor basin in concrete slab.
C. Cover: Fabricate with openings having gaskets, seals, and bushings, for access to pumps, pump
shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables.
1. Material: Steel with bituminous coating.

2. Reinforcement: Steel or cast iron, capable of supporting foot traffic for basins installed
in foot-traffic areas.
D. Capacity and Characteristics:
1. Material: Fiberglass.
2. Diameter: 48”
3. Depth: 60”
4. Inlet No. 1:
a. Drainage Pipe Size: 4”

b. Type: Threaded outside.
5. Inlet No. 2:
a. Drainage Pipe Size: 4”

b. Type: Threaded outside.
6. Cover:
a. Material: Steel with bituminous coating.

b. Diameter: 48”
c. Manhole Required: No.
d. Vent Size: 2”

2.4 SUMP PUMP PITS
A. Description: Concrete pit with sump, pipe connections, curb frame, and separate cover.
B. Sump: Construct of watertight, cast-in-place, reinforced concrete with sidewall openings for
pipe connections. Cast-in-place concrete, formwork, and reinforcement are specified in
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1. Pipe Connections: Sleeved openings large enough for mechanical sleeve seals for
drainage piping. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods," and drainage piping is specified in
Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping."
C. Curb Frame and Cover:
1. Curb Frame Material: Galvanized steel or steel with bituminous coating.
a. Pattern: Z-cross-section shape with raised outer rim of height matching cover, for
recessed mounting having installed cover flush with top of floor slab.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Anamet, Inc.
2. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.
3. Flexicraft Industries.
4. Flex-Pression, Ltd.
5. Flex-Weld, Inc.
6. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
7. Mercer Rubber.
8. Metraflex, Inc.
9. Proco Products, Inc.
10. Tozen America Corporation.
11. Unaflex Inc.
B. Description: 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating and ends matching pump
connection:
1. Bronze Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze inner tubing covered with bronze wire
braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze welded to tubing.
2. Stainless-Steel Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel inner tubing covered
with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or flanges, welded to
tubing.

2.6 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTERFACE
A. Provide auxiliary contacts in pump controllers for interface to building automation system.
Include the following:
1. On-off status of each pump.

2. Alarm status.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of plumbing piping to verify actual locations of storm drainage piping
connections before sump pump installation.
3.2 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps and controllers. Refer to Division 15
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of base.
B. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3.
3.3 SUMP PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
B. Install sump pumps according to applicable requirements in HI 1.4.
C. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance including removal of motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.
D. Set submersible sump pumps on basin or pit floor. Make direct connections to storm drainage
piping.
E. Install sump pump basins and connect to drainage piping. Brace interior of basins according to
manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or collapse during concrete placement.
Set basin cover and fasten to basin top flange. Install cover so top surface is flush with finished
floor.

F. Construct sump pump pits and connect to drainage piping. Set pit curb frame recessed in and
anchored to concrete. Fasten pit cover to pit curb flange. Install cover so top surface is flush
with finished floor.
G. Install packaged, pedestal, drainage pump units and make direct connection to storm drainage
piping.
H. Install packaged, submersible, drainage pump unit basins on floor or concrete base unless
recessed installation is indicated. Make direct connections to storm drainage piping.
I. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping."
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to sump pumps to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect storm drainage piping to pumps. Install discharge piping equal to or greater than size
of pump discharge piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping."
1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in discharge piping.

2. Install check and shutoff valves on discharge piping from each pump. Install unions on
pumps having threaded pipe connections. Install valves same size as connected piping.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves for drainage piping.
D. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
E. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

2. Verify bearing lubrication.
3. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation.
4. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. If pump is bound or drags, do not
operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
5. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
B. Start pumps without exceeding safe motor power:
1. Start motors.
2. Open discharge valves slowly.
3. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
D. Remove and replace damaged and malfunctioning components.
1. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation as
required for system application.
2. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated, or if not
indicated, for normal operation.
E. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to
two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain controls and pumps. Refer to Division 1 Section " Demonstration
and Training."

SECTION 15485
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following electric water heaters:

1. Flow-control, instantaneous electric water heaters.
2. Commercial, storage electric water heaters.
3. Water heater accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that units comply with
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 7 - "Service Water Heating."
C. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial and instantaneous electric water heater,
signed by product manufacturer.
E. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that commercial water

heaters, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15
Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

Allen & Shariff Engineering ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
F. Source quality-control test reports.
G. Field quality-control test reports.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric water heaters to include in emergency, operation,
I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of electric water heaters through one source from a
single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of electric
water heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Product Requirements."
intended use.
D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-

2004.
E. ASME Compliance: Where indicated, fabricate and label commercial water heater storage
tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
F. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9," for all components that will be in contact with potable water.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of electric water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.

a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.
b. Faulty operation of controls.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:
a. Instantaneous Electric Water Heaters: One year(s).
b. Commercial Electric Water Heaters:
1) Storage Tank: Three years.

2) Controls and Other Components: Three years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
product selection:

2.2 INSTANTANEOUS ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Flow-Control, Instantaneous Electric Water Heaters: Comply with UL 499 for tankless electric
(water heater) heating appliance.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Controlled Energy Corporation.

b. Eemax, Inc.
c. Hot Aqua, Inc.
d. IMI Waterheating, Ltd.
e. Stiebel Eltron, Inc.
2. Construction: Copper piping or tubing complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for
potable water, without storage capacity.
a. Connections: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

c. Heating Element: Resistance heating system.
d. Temperature Control: Flow-control fitting.

e. Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.
f. Jacket: Aluminum or steel with enameled finish or plastic.
3. Support: Bracket for wall mounting.

4. Capacity and Characteristics:
a. Temperature Control: Flow-control fitting.
1) Flow-Control Fitting: 1 gpm

2) Water Temperature Rise: 65 degrees
2.3 COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Commercial, Storage Electric Water Heaters: Comply with UL 1453 requirements for storage-
tank-type water heaters.
a. American Water Heater Company.

b. Bradford White Corporation.
c. Lochinvar Corporation.
d. PVI Industries, LLC.
e. Rheem Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company.
f. Ruud Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company.
g. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company.
h. State Industries, Inc.
2. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code, steel vertical arrangement.
a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank and piping

connections. Attach tappings to tank before testing.
1) NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
2) NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5
for steel and stainless-steel flanges, and according to ASME B16.24 for
copper and copper-alloy flanges.

c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank
linings, including extending lining material into tappings.
3. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:
a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.

b. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005.
c. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
d. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.
e. Heating Elements: Electric, screw-in or bolt-on immersion type arranged in
multiples of three.

1) Staging: Input not exceeding 18 kW per step.
f. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.

g. Safety Controls: High-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or systems.
h. Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3,
for combination temperature and pressure relief valves. Include one or more relief
valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include
pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select one relief
valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
4. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction.

5. Building Automation System Interface: Normally closed dry contacts for enabling and
disabling water heater.
a. Capacity: 30 gallon
b. Recovery: at 100 deg F (56 deg C) temperature rise.
c. Temperature Setting: 140 deg F (60 deg C).
d. Number of Heating Elements: Two.
1) Number of Stages: One.

2) Kilowatt per Stage: 6
2.4 COMPRESSION TANKS
A. Description: Steel pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed
butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AMTROL Inc.
c. Honeywell Sparco.
d. Myers, F. E.; Pentair Pump Group (The).
e. Smith, A. O.; Aqua-Air Div.
f. State Industries, Inc.
g. Taco, Inc.
h. Watts Regulator Co.
2. Construction:
a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.

Include ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread.
b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank
linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

a. Working-Pressure Rating: 100 psig (690 kPa).
b. Capacity Acceptable: 2 gal. (7.6 L) minimum.
2.5 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and
complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and
include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with
sensing element that extends into storage tank.
B. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3.
Include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating.
C. Water Heater Stand and Drain-Pan Units: High-density-polyethylene-plastic, 18-inch- (457-

mm-) high, enclosed-base stand complying with IAPMO PS 103 and IAS No. 2. Include
integral or separate drain pan with raised edge and NPS 1 (DN 25) drain outlet with
ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
D. Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel stand for floor
mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. Include dimension that will
support bottom of water heater a minimum of 18 inches (457 mm) above the floor.
E. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket
for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water.
F. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than base
of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
G. Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet piping
arrangement for multiple-unit installation. Include piping and valves for field assembly that are
capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced flow through each water
heater.
H. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 or ASHRAE 90.2-2004.
I. Water Regulators: ASSE 1003, water-pressure reducing valve. Set at 25-psig- (172.5-kPa-)
maximum outlet pressure, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect water heater storage tanks, specified to be ASME-code construction, according
to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
B. Hydrostatically test commercial water heater storage tanks before shipment to minimum of one
and one-half times pressure rating.

C. Prepare test reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.
1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand,
bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.
2. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic
B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so
controls and devices needing service are accessible.
C. Install seismic restraints for commercial water heaters. Anchor to substrate.
D. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use
relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater
relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward
pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
E. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in water piping for water heaters
without storage. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as
domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto
closest floor drain.
F. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or
over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters
that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for hose-end
drain valves.
G. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and
Gages" for thermometers.
H. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping of household, collector-to-tank, solar-electric

water heaters. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers.
I. Install pressure gage(s) on inlet and outlet of commercial electric water- heater piping. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages.
J. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters. Fabricate,
modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water heater. Include
shutoff valve, thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each
water heater outlet. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves and to
Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers.

K. Install water regulator, with integral bypass relief valve, in booster-heater inlet piping and water
hammer arrester in booster-heater outlet piping.
L. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without
integral or fitting-type heat traps.
M. Fill water heaters with water.
N. Charge compression tanks with air.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for
easy removal of water heaters.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation.
equipment.
C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified
above.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain commercial and instantaneous electric water heaters. Refer to
Division 1 Section " Demonstration and Training."

SECTION 15513
CONDENSING BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged, factory-fabricated and -assembled, gas-fired, pulse-combustion

condensing boilers, trim, and accessories for generating hot water.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of
selected model, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), installation and start-up
instructions, along with furnished accessory information.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions,

weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for boilers including

ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between
portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
D. Source quality-control test reports.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For boilers to include in emergency, operation, and
G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
H. Other Informational Submittals:
1. ASME Stamp Certification and Report: Submit "A," "S," or "PP" stamp certificate of
authorization, as required by authorities having jurisdiction, and document hydrostatic
testing of piping external to boiler.

Allen & Shariff Engineering CONDENSING BOILERS
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturing of pulse

combustion, high efficiency, condensing boilers, of types and sizes required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
B. The hot water boiler maximum working pressure will be 160 psig.
C. The entire boiler system and its installation shall conform to the manufacturer's instructions,
applicable codes and associated National Board requirements.
D. The equipment shall, as a minimum, be in strict compliance with the requirements of this
specification and shall be the manufacturer’s standard commercial product unless specified
otherwise. Additional equipment features, details, accessories, etc. which are not specifically
identified but which are a part of the manufacturer’s standard commercial product, shall be
included in the equipment being furnished.
E. The equipment shall be of the type, design, and size that the manufacturer currently offers for sale
and appears in the manufacturer’s current catalog.
F. The equipment shall fit within the allocated space, leaving ample allowance for maintenance and
inspection.
G. The equipment shall be new and fabricated from new materials. The equipment shall be free from
defects in materials and workmanship.
H. All units of the same classification shall be identical to the extent necessary to ensure
interchangeability of parts, assemblies, accessories, and space parts wherever possible.
I. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
intended use.
J. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code.
K. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "Gas
and Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements."
L. LEED-NC Prerequisite EA 2 requires minimum efficiency equal to requirements in

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004.
M. DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B, Appendix N,
"Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers."
N. UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 795, "Commercial-Industrial Gas Heating
Equipment." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.

1.5 COORDINATION
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Boiler manufacturer shall guarantee in writing equipment to be free of defects for one year af-
ter start-up date or 18 months from factory shipment, and to repair or replace at manufactur-
er's expense any defective parts. Unit shall receive such factory tests as are deemed advisable
by the manufacturer to check construction and operation.
B. The pressure vessel shall be guaranteed against thermal shock for 10 years when utilized in a
closed loop hydronic heating system with a maximum temperature differential rating of up to
170 °F. The boiler pressure vessel shall be guaranteed accordingly without a minimum flow
rate or return water temperature requirement. The boiler shall not require the use of flow
switches or other devices to ensure minimum flow.
C. The pressure vessel shall carry a 10-year warranty against material and workmanship defects.
D. The combustor and exhaust pipes (heat exchanger) shall be guaranteed against flue gas corro-
sion for a period of 10 years for carbon steel boilers and a period of 5 years for stainless steel
boilers.
E. All parts not covered by the above warranties shall carry a one-year warranty. This shall in-
clude all electrical and burner components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product

1. Gasmaster Industries Incorporated.

2. Hydrotherm, Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
3. AERCO International.
4. Lochinvar Corporation.
2.2 BOILER CONSTRUCTION
A. The exhaust decoupler shall be constructed of ¼”corrosion resistant Corten and include a flue
gas condensate drain.
B. The combustor shall be constructed of SA-53B ERW pipe.

C. The pressure vessel shell shall be SA-53B ERW pipe or SA-285 Grade C plate. The heads
shall be SA-516 Grade 70 plate. The pressure vessel shall be fully insulated with 2” of high
temperature insulation.
D. The pulse combustor location shall be such that all combustor assembly components are lo-
cated within water-backed areas.
E. The boiler’s pressure vessel, combustor, and exhaust decoupler shall be encased in an 18
gauge metal cabinet with primer and finish coat of paint.
F. Boilers utilizing copper heat exchanger construction are not acceptable.
2.3 BOILER DESIGN
A. Boiler shall be fire-tube design, utilizing the principles of pulse combustion. The boiler shall
be self-aspirating and require no forced or induced draft fan to supply air for combustion after
ignition.
B. External convection and radiation heat losses to the boiler room from the boiler shall be less
than 0.5% of the rated boiler input. The boiler shall not contain any refractory, refractory lin-
ing or ceramic in the furnace or firebox.
C. The boiler shall be designed for operation in a condensing mode, in order to extract the latent
heat from the combustion products. The boiler shall have a minimum acceptable fuel-to-
water efficiency of 91% at a return water temperature of 80 °F and at the full rated input ca-
pacity of the boiler. Overall efficiency at the low fire rated input capacity will be 98%.
D. The boiler shall be able to operate without the use of a 3-way valves or primary/secondary
piping loops.
E. The boiler shall have no minimum return water temperature requirements.
F. The boiler shall have no minimum flow rate requirements.
2.4 CONTROLS
A. The flame safeguard system shall be Fulton Model RM7865 with LED display module. The
control shall provide a 35-second pre-purge and post-purge. The control shall maintain a
running history of operating hours, number of cycles, and the most recent six faults. The con-
trol shall have the capability to be connected to a keyboard display module that will retrieve
this information.
B. Pulse Combustion controls shall include the following:
1. Operating Temperature Controller for automatic start/stop of the pulse combustion

process. Controller will have auto-tune PID capabilities for simplified loop configuration
and fast response to water temperature fluctuations. A Type J temperature sensor shall be
located in the boiler pressure vessel.
2. High limit temperature aquastat with manual reset.

3. One low water cutoff probe in the boiler shell with manual reset and push-to-test capa-
bility.
4. Air safety switch to prevent operation unless sufficient pre-purge air is assured.
5. High condensate cut-off probe located in the exhaust decoupler.
6. A Proof of Flame switch and Flame Rod operating in parallel, to prove combustion.
C. A combustion control system shall be furnished which provides a turndown ratio of 5:1 per
ANSI Z21.13 (3:1 for LPG Fired Boilers) over the input range from high to low fire. The
supply temperature and setpoint temperature shall be displayed at all times by the operating
temperature control. Firing rate shall be controlled by a continuous 4-20mA analog signal to
a modulation motor.
D. All controls to be panel mounted and so located on the boiler as to provide ease of servicing
the boiler without disturbing the controls and also located to prevent possible damage by wa-
ter according to CSA requirements. Electrical power supply shall be 120 volts, 60 cycle, sin-
gle phase, 10 Amps maximum. Boiler shall draw less than 1 Amp while in run mode. No ad-
ditional electric power shall be required for devices such as forced draft fans.
E. A sequencing control system shall be provided to stage the boilers. The control shall include
automatic rotation of the lead boiler, an adjustable outdoor reset schedule, multiple setback
schedules, hydronic system interface, multiple setpoint control modes, BMS interface, alarm
status and history, SMS text messaging, and a digital display. The sequencing control system
shall stage each boiler on at low fire. After all boilers are running, the sequencing control
system will then modulate the boilers as a group. To ensure proper integration with the boiler
controls, the boiler manufacturer shall supply the sequencing control system.
2.5 MAIN GAS TRAIN COMPONENTS
A. The boiler shall have an integral gas train, factory assembled and installed. The main gas
train will include:
1. One manual shut-off valve at gas inlet.
2. Gas inlet trap.
3. Gas regulator rated for a maximum 14”wc supply pressure.
4. Two safety shut-off valves. One to be solenoid and one motorized valve.
5. Independent low and high gas pressure switches shall be supplied.
2.6 BOILER FITTINGS
A. Boiler shall be supplied with a ASME Section IV approved, side outlet type safety valve.
The safety relief valve size shall be in accordance with ASME code requirements.
B. Temperature and pressure gauges shall be mounted on top of the boiler.
C. A condensate drain connection shall be provided in the exhaust decoupler. A condensate

drain kit will be provided to collect and drain the flue gas condensate.

2.7 ELECTRICAL POWER
A. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in
Division 16 Sections.
B. Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers,
transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power
connection to boiler.
1. House in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

2. Wiring shall be numbered and color-coded to match wiring diagram.
3. Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a metal raceway.
4. Field power interface shall be to a nonfused disconnect switch.
5. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls.
6. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection.
C. Provide non-fused disconnect switch for each boiler.
2.8 VENTING
A. The boiler shall be CSA approved as a direct vent boiler. A conventional chimney or stack
shall not be required. Direct venting shall be accomplished with AL-29-4C stainless steel,
single (or double) wall. Vent piping shall be installed in accordance with applicable national
and local codes and per the boiler manufacturers’ recommendations.
B. The boiler shall have the outside combustion air intake supply ducted with PVC pipe. An air
intake muffler shall be provided by the boiler manufacturer and mounted within 10 feet of the
boiler intake connection.
C. An external muffler to be provided by the boiler manufacturer and mounted within 10 feet of
the boiler exhaust connection.
2.9 EMISSIONS
A. The boiler shall operate with CO emissions less than 100 PPM corrected to 3% O₂ and shall
with NOx emissions less than 50 PPM corrected to 3% O₂ over the entire turndown range.
2.10 OPERATING MANUAL
A. Instructions for installation, operation and maintenance of the boiler shall be contained in a
manual provided with each boiler unit.
B. A wiring diagram corresponding to the boiler configuration shall be permanently affixed to

the boiler near the electrical panel.

A. Burner and Hydrostatic Test. Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dio-
xide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combus-
tion efficiency; perform hydrostatic test.
B. Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping. According to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before boiler installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt sizes
and locations, and piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other
conditions affecting boiler performance, maintenance, and operations.
1. Final boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations
before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.
B. Examine mechanical spaces for suitable conditions where boilers will be installed.
3.2 BOILER INSTALLATION
A. Equipment and materials shall be installed in an approved manner and in accordance with the
boiler manufacturers’ installation requirements.
B. The installer shall construct a level continuous concrete pad (min. 3-1/2 inches high) for the
entire boiler system according to the boiler manufacturer's erecting instructions.
C. Assemble unit sections and parts shipped loose or unassembled for shipment purposes. Fol-
low manufacturer's installation recommendations and instructions, assemble and install boiler
trim.
D. Install electrical control items furnished by manufacturer per wiring diagram provided by
manufacturer. Install control wiring to field mounted electrical devices.
E. Complete water piping installation as required by manufacturer for operation of system.
F. Provide air intake and exhaust piping, size and type as recommended by the manufacturer.
G. Provide boiler manufacturer recommended manifold pipe and fittings from each boiler to
nearest floor drain or as indicated.

3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance.
C. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least
full size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required.
D. Connect piping to boilers, except safety relief valve connections, with flexible connectors of
materials suitable for service. Flexible connectors and their installation are specified in
Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
E. Connect gas piping to boiler gas-train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gas
train connection. Provide a reducer if required.
F. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or
flange at each connection.
G. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.
H. Install piping from safety valves to drip-pan elbow and to nearest floor drain.
I. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
J. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

to assist in starting and testing.
1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
3. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust
air-fuel ratio and combustion.
equipment.
a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set
points of fuel supply, water level and water temperature.
b. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D. Arrange with National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors for inspection of boilers
and piping. Obtain certification for complete boiler units, delivered to Owner, and obtain receipt.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Video record the training sessions.

SECTION 15629
SCROLL WATER CHILLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Packaged, water-cooled, electric-motor-driven, scroll water chillers.
1. Division 15 Section "Refrigerant Monitoring and Safety Equipment" for refrigerant

monitors, alarms, supplemental breathing apparatus, and ventilation equipment
interlocks.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. COP: Coefficient of performance. The ratio of the rate of heat removal to the rate of energy
input using consistent units for any given set of rating conditions.
B. EER: Energy-efficiency ratio. The ratio of the cooling capacity given in terms of Btu/h to the
total power input given in terms of watts at any given set of rating conditions.
C. IPLV: Integrated part-load value. A single number part-load efficiency figure of merit
calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and referenced to ARI standard rating
conditions.
D. kW/Ton: The ratio of total power input of the chiller in kilowatts to the net refrigerating
capacity in tons at any given set of rating conditions.
E. NPLV: Nonstandard part-load value. A single number part-load efficiency figure of merit
calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and intended for operating conditions other
than the ARI standard rating conditions.

Allen & Shariff Engineering SCROLL WATER CHILLERS
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include refrigerant, rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished

specialties, and accessories.
1. Performance at ARI standard conditions and at conditions indicated.

2. Performance at ARI standard unloading conditions.
3. Minimum evaporator flow rate.
4. Refrigerant capacity of water chiller.
5. Oil capacity of water chiller.
6. Fluid capacity of evaporator.
7. Fluid capacity of condenser.
8. Characteristics of safety relief valves.
9. Minimum entering condenser-water temperature.
10. Performance at varying capacity with constant design condenser-water temperature.
Repeat performance at varying capacity for different condenser-water temperatures from
design to minimum in 5 deg F (3 deg C) increments.
11. Minimum entering condenser-air temperature
12. Performance at varying capacity with constant design entering condenser-air temperature.
Repeat performance at varying capacity for different entering condenser-air temperatures
from design to minimum in 10 deg F (6 deg C) increments.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EA 4: Documentation required by Credit EA 4 indicating that

equipment and refrigerants comply.
C. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's prints of water chiller assemblies, control
panels, sections and elevations, and unit isolation. Include the following:
1. Assembled unit dimensions.

2. Weight and load distribution.
3. Required clearances for maintenance and operation.
4. Size and location of piping and wiring connections.
5. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
D. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown
and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Structural supports.
2. Piping roughing-in requirements.
3. Wiring roughing-in requirements, including spaces reserved for electrical equipment.
4. Access requirements, including working clearances for mechanical controls and electrical
equipment, and tube pull and service clearances.
E. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

F. Source quality-control test reports.
G. Startup service reports.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each water chiller to include in emergency, operation,
I. Warranty: Sample of warranty.
A. ARI Certification: Certify chiller according to ARI 590 certification program.
B. ARI Rating: Rate water chiller performance according to requirements in ARI 550/590, "Water
Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle."
C. ASHRAE Compliance: ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration.
D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-

2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and stamp water chiller heat exchangers to comply with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
G. Qualifications: Equipment manufacturer must specialize in the manufacture of the products

specified and have five years experience with similar equipment and the refrigerant offered.
A. Ship water chillers from the factory fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil.
B. Comply with the manufacturer’s instructions for rigging and handling equipment.
1.8 COORDINATION
B. Coordinate sizes, locations, and anchoring attachments of structural-steel support structures.
C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
actual equipment provided.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. The equipment manufacturer’s warranty shall be for a period of one year from date of
equipment start-up but not more than 18 months from shipment. The warranty shall cover
defective materials and workmanship within the above period, excluding refrigerant.
1. Compressor Warranty Period: Five years from date of substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PACKAGED WATER-COOLED WATER CHILLERS

1. Carrier.
2. Trane.
3. York.
2.2 UNIT DESCRIPTION
Provide and install as shown on the plans factory assembled, factory charged, and factory run
tested water-cooled scroll compressor packaged chillers in the quantity specified. Each chiller
shall consist of multiple hermetic scroll compressors, multi-circuit brazed plate or shell-and –tube
evaporator, shell-and-tube water-cooled condensers, control system and all components necessary
for controlled unit operation. Refrigerant shall be R-410A.
2.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide a complete scroll packaged chiller as specified herein and as shown on
the drawings. The unit shall be in accordance with the standards referenced in section
1.02 and any local codes in effect.
B. Performance: Refer to the schedule of performance on the drawings. Performance shall
be in accordance with applicable ARI Standard.
C. Acoustics: Sound power levels (without sound insulation) for the unit shall not exceed
the following specified levels. The manufacturer shall provide the necessary sound treat-
ment to meet these levels if required. Sound data shall be provided with the quotation.
Test shall be in accordance with ARI Standard 575 octave band readings are flat dB.
Octave Band
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Overall dBA

46 50 61 83 75 80 75 63 86
2.4 CHILLER COMPONENTS

A. Compressors: The compressors shall be sealed hermetic scroll type with crankcase oil
heater and suction strainer. The compressor motor shall be refrigerant gas cooled, high
torque, hermetic induction type, two-pole, with inherent thermal protection on all three
phases and shall be mounted on RIS vibration isolator pads.
B. Evaporator: On units 30 tons to 130 tons, the evaporator shall be direct expansion type
with stainless steel plates brazed together. It shall be insulated with 3/4 inch (19mm)
closed cell polyurethane insulation and have 653 psi (4500 kPa) water side working pres-
sure.
Units from 135 to 200 tons, the evaporator shall be shell-and-tube construction, insulated
with 3/4 inch (19mm) closed cell polyurethane insulation, and with 150 psi (1033kPa)
water-side working pressure.
C. Condenser: Horizontal shell and finned tube type with steel shell and integral finned
copper tubes rolled into steel tube sheets. The chiller shall be equipped with intermediate
tube supports. Construct condenser in accordance with the requirements of ASME Sec-
tion VIII Unfired Pressure Vessel Code and ANSI B9.1 Safety Code. It shall be designed
for 232 psi (1599 kPa) water side working pressure and 450 psig (3104 kPa) refrigerant
side pressure and be provided with ASME, ANSI B9.1 pressure relief valves.
D. Refrigerant Circuit: Each refrigerant circuit shall include a liquid line shutoff valve, rep-
laceable core or sealed filter-drier, sight glass with moisture indicator, liquid line solenoid
valve, thermal expansion valve, and insulated suction line.
E. Control Panel: The control panel shall contain a microprocessor controller providing op-
erating and equipment protection controls plus motor starting equipment, factory wired,
operationally tested, and ready for operation. Standard components shall include a control
transformer with primary and secondary fusing, microprocessor transformers with
integral fusing, compressor contactors, circuit breakers, single-point wiring arrangement
and switches for each circuit pumpdown and unit control power. The control panel shall
have a hinged tool-locked door.
The control system shall stage the compressors based on the leaving water temperature.
Equipment protection devices controlled by the microprocessor include motor protection,
high pressure, loss of refrigerant, loss of water flow, freeze protection, and low refrige-
rant pressure. Controls shall include auto/stop switch, chilled water setpoint adjustment,
anti-recycle timer, and digital display with water temperature and setpoint, operating
temperatures and pressures, and diagnostic messages. The following features and func-
tions shall be included:
1. The LCD-type display shall have a minimum of 20 characters with all messages
in plain English. Coded messages are not acceptable.
2. Critical parameters shall have their own section of control and shall be password
protected.
3. Resetting chilled water temperature by a remote 4-20mA DC signal.
4. A soft load function to prevent the system from operating at full load during the
chilled water pulldown period.

5. An electronic time clock to allow programming of a yearly schedule accommo-
dating weekends and holidays.
6. Auto restart after a power failure, not requiring external battery backup or aux-
iliary power for maintaining program memory.
7. Shutdowns shall be date and time stamped with system temperatures and pres-
sures recorded. A minimum of six previous occurrences shall be kept in a revolv-
ing memory.
8. Start-to-start and stop-to-start timers to provide minimum compressor off-time
with maximum motor protection.
9. Capability of communication with a PC or remote monitoring through a twisted
pair RS-232 interface.
10. Lead/lag manually or automatically by compressor number of starts.
11. Continuous diagnostic checks of unit to provide a pre-alarm signal in advance of
a shutdown allowing time for remedial action to be taken.
12. The controller shall contain the following features as a minimum:
Equipment Protection
The unit shall be protected in two ways: (1) by alarms that shut the unit down and
require manual reset to restore unit operation and (2) by limit alarms that reduce
unit operation in response to some out-of-limit condition. Shut down alarms shall
activate an alarm signal.
Shutdown Alarms
• No evaporator water flow
• Low evaporator pressure
• High condenser pressure
• Motor protection system
• Phase voltage protection (Optional)
• Outside ambient temperature
• Evaporator freeze protection
• Sensor failures
Limit Alarms
• Condenser pressure stage down, unloads unit at high discharge pressures
• Low ambient lockout, shuts off unit at low ambient temperatures
• Low evaporator pressure hold, holds stage #1 until pressure rises
• Low evaporator pressure unload, shuts off one compressor
Unit Enable Selection
Enables unit operation from local keypad, digital input, or BAS
Unit Mode Selection
Selects cooling, ice, glycol, or test operation mode
Analog Inputs
Reset of leaving water temperature, 4-20 mA
Digital Inputs
• Unit off switch
• Remote start/stop

• Flow switch
• Ice mode, converts operation and setpoints for ice production
• Motor protection
Digital Outputs
• Shutdown alarm; field wired, activates on an alarm condition, off when alarm
is cleared
• Evaporator pump; field wired, starts pump when unit is set to start
Building Automation System (BAS) Interface
The unit shall be equipped with an factory-installed BAS communication module
Factory mounted DDC controller(s) shall support operation on a BACnet®,
Modbus® or LONMARKS ® network via one of the data link / physical layers
listed below as specified by the successful Building Automation System (BAS)
supplier.
• BACnet MS/TP master (Clause 9)
• BACnet IP, (Annex J)
• BACnet ISO 8802-3, (Ethernet)
• LONMARKS FTT-10A. The unit controller shall be LONMARKS® cer-
tified.
The information communicated between the BAS and the factory mounted unit
controllers shall include the reading and writing of data to allow unit monitoring,
control and alarm notification as specified in the unit sequence of operation and the
unit points list.
For chillers communicating over a LONMARK network, the corresponding
LONMARK eXternal Interface File (XIF) shall be provided with the chiller sub-
mittal data.
All communication from the chiller unit controller as specified in the points list
shall be via standard BACnet objects. Proprietary BACnet objects shall not be al-
lowed. BACnet communications shall conform to the BACnet protocol
(ANSI/ASHRAE135-2001). A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance
Statement (PICS) shall be provided along with the unit submittal.
F. The following options are to be included:
• Hot gas bypass on all circuits.
• Chilled water flow switch to be field mounted in the chilled water line and field
wired to terminals in the control panel.
• Disconnect switch
• Single point power connection
A. Perform functional test of water chillers before shipping.
B. For water chillers located indoors, rate sound power level according to ARI 575 procedure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before water chiller installation, examine roughing-in for equipment support, anchor-bolt sizes
and locations, piping, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other
conditions affecting water chiller performance, maintenance, and operations.
1. Water chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact

locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.
3.2 WATER CHILLER INSTALLATION
A. Install water chillers on support structure indicated. Adjust and level chiller in alignment on
supports.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install water chiller on concrete bases using elastomeric mounts.
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 15 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete
base.
C. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. Maintain manufacturer's

recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
D. Charge water chiller with refrigerant if not factory charged and fill with oil if not factory
installed.
E. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed. Provide all
appurtenances required to ensure a fully operations and functional chiller.
F. Coordinate electrical installation with electrical contractor.
G. Coordinate controls with control contractor.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping." Drawings indicate


B. Install piping adjacent to chiller to allow service and maintenance.
C. Evaporator Fluid Connections: Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible
connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to evaporator outlet with
shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with
pressure gage, flow meter, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to water chiller
with a union, flange, or mechanical coupling.
D. Condenser Fluid Connections: Connect to condenser inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible
connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to condenser outlet with
shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with
pressure gage, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to water chiller with a
union, flange, or mechanical coupling.
E. Refrigerant Pressure Relief Valve Connections: For water chillers installed indoors, extend
vent piping to the outside without valves or restrictions. Comply with ASHRAE 15.
F. Connect each drain connection with a union and drain pipe and extend pipe, full size of
connection, to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each connection if required.
G. Provide bypass piping, two-way valve, and controller to maintain minimum flow through
evaporator.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical

connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.
C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and
perform the following:
1. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and water chiller has been leak tested.
2. Verify that pumps are installed and functional.
3. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed.
4. Operate water chiller for run-in period.
5. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels.
6. Verify that refrigerant pressure relief device for chillers installed indoors is vented
outside.
7. Verify proper motor rotation.
8. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during water chiller
startup and shutdown.
9. Verify and record performance of chilled- and condenser-water flow and low-temperature
interlocks.
10. Verify and record performance of water chiller protection devices.
11. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment.

D. Prepare a written startup report that records results of tests and inspections.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain water chillers. Video record the training sessions.

SECTION 15640
COOLING TOWERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Open-circuit, forced-draft, counterflow cooling towers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BMS: Building management system.
B. FRP: Fiber-reinforced polyester.
A. Delegated Design: Design cooling tower support structure and seismic restraints and wind
restraints, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer,
using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Cooling tower support structure shall withstand the effects of gravity
loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated
according to SEI/ASCE 7.
1. Live Loads: 5330 lbs..
2. Deflection Limits: Design system to withstand design loads without deflections greater
than the following:
a. Those specified by isolation manufacturer’s standards.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, pressure drop, fan
performance data, rating curves with selected points indicated, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
1. Maximum flow rate.

Allen & Shariff Engineering COOLING TOWERS
2. Minimum flow rate.
3. Drift loss as percent of design flow rate.
4. Sound power levels in eight octave bands for operation with fans off, fans at minimum,
and design speed.
5. Performance curves for the following:
a. Varying entering-water temperatures from design to minimum.

b. Varying ambient wet-bulb temperatures from design to minimum.
c. Varying fan operation (off, minimum, and design speed).
6. Fan airflow, brake horsepower, and drive losses.

7. Motor amperage, efficiency, and power factor at 100 percent of nameplate horsepower, to
minimum.
8. Electrical power requirements for each cooling tower component requiring power.
B. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's prints of cooling tower assemblies, control
panels, sections and elevations, and unit isolation. Include the following:
1. Assembled unit dimensions.

2. Weight and load distribution.
3. Required clearances for maintenance and operation.
4. Sizes and locations of piping and wiring connections.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cooling tower support structure indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases,
rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for
designing vibration isolation bases.
D. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown
and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:
1. Structural supports.
2. Piping roughing-in requirements.
3. Wiring roughing-in requirements, including spaces reserved for electrical equipment.
4. Access requirements, including working clearances for mechanical controls and electrical
equipment, and tube pull and service clearances.
E. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Startup service reports.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each cooling tower to include in emergency, operation,
H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Certified by CTI.
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-

D. CTI Certification: Cooling tower thermal performance according to CTI STD 201,
"Certification Standard for Commercial Water-Cooling Towers Thermal Performance."
1.7 COORDINATION
B. Coordinate sizes, locations, and anchoring attachments of structural-steel support structures.
C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
1.8 WARRANTY

replace the following components of cooling towers that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period:
1. Fan assembly including fan, drive, and motor.

2. All components of cooling tower.
3. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OPEN-CIRCUIT, FORCED-DRAFT, COUNTERFLOW COOLING TOWERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

1. Baltimore Aircoil Company; Models VTL, VTO, and VT1.

2. Evapco Inc.; Models LPT.
B. Cooling tower designed to resist wind load of 30 lbf/sq. ft. (1.44 kPa).
C. Casing and Frame:
1. Casing and Frame Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G235 (Z700)
coating.

2. Frame Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G235 (Z700) coating.
3. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
4. Joints and Seams: Sealed watertight.
5. Welded Connections: Continuous and watertight.
D. Collection Basin:
1. Material: Stainless steel.

2. Strainer: Removable stainless-steel strainer with openings smaller than nozzle orifices.
3. Overflow and drain connections.
4. Makeup water connection.
5. Basin Sweeper Distribution Piping and Nozzles:
a. Pipe Material: PVC.

b. Nozzle Material: Plastic.
c. Configure piping and nozzles to minimize sediment from collecting in the
collection basin.
E. Electronic, Collection Basin Water-Level Controller with Solenoid Valve:
1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4 <Insert type>.

2. Sensor: Solid-state controls with multiple electrode probes and relays factory wired to a
terminal strip to provide control of water makeup valve, low- and high-level alarms, and
output for shutoff of pump on low level.
3. Electrode Probes: Stainless steel.
4. Solenoid Valve: Slow closing with stainless-steel body, controlled and powered through
level controller in response to water-level set point.
5. Electrical Connection Requirements: 120 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
F. Electric Basin Heater:
1. Stainless-Steel Electric Immersion Heaters: Installed in a threaded coupling on the side

of the collection basin.
2. Heater Control Panel: Mounted on the side of each cooling tower cell.
3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4.
4. Magnetic contactors controlled by a temperature sensor/controller to maintain collection
basin water-temperature set point. Water-level probe shall monitor cooling tower water
level and de-energize the heater when the water reaches low-level set point.
5. Control-circuit transformer with primary and secondary side fuses.
6. Terminal blocks with numbered and color-coded wiring to match wiring diagram.
7. Single-point, field-power connection to a fused disconnect switch and heater branch
circuiting complying with NFPA 70.
G. Pressurized Water Distribution Piping: Main header and lateral branch piping designed for
even distribution over heat-exchanger coil or fill throughout the flow range without the need for
balancing valves and for connecting individual, removable, nonclogging spray nozzles.
1. Pipe Material: PVC.

2. Spray Nozzle Material: ABS Plastic.
3. Piping Supports: Corrosion-resistant hangers and supports to resist movement during
operation and shipment.

H. Fill:
1. Materials: Inert PVC, with maximum flame-spread index of 5 according to ASTM E 84.
2. Minimum Thickness: 20 mils (0.5 mm), before forming.
3. Fabrication: Fill-type sheets, fabricated, formed, and bonded together after forming into
removable assemblies that are factory installed by manufacturer.
4. Fill Material Operating Temperature: Suitable for entering-water temperatures up
through 120 deg F (49 deg C).
I. Drift Eliminator:
1. Material: PVC; with maximum flame-spread index of 5 according to ASTM E 84.

2. UV Treatment: Inhibitors to protect against damage caused by UV radiation.
3. Configuration: Multipass, designed and tested to reduce water carryover to achieve
performance indicated.
J. Centrifugal Fan: Double-width, double-inlet, forward-curved blades, and statically and

dynamically balanced at the factory after assembly.
1. Number of Fans: Each cooling tower cell shall have a single fan or multiple fans
connected to a common shaft.
2. Fan Wheel and Housing Materials: Galvanized steel.
3. Fan Shaft: Steel, coated to resist corrosion.
4. Protective Enclosure: Removable, galvanized-steel, wire-mesh screens complying with
OSHA regulations.
5. Fan Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball or roller bearings with
moisture-proof seals and premium, moisture-resistant grease suitable for temperatures
between minus 20 and plus 300 deg F (minus 29 and plus 149 deg C). Bearings designed
for an L-10 life of 75,000 hours.
6. Bearings Grease Fittings: Extended lubrication lines to an easily accessible location.
K. Fan Motor:
1. General Requirements for Fan Motors: Comply with NEMA designation and
temperature-rating requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment" and not indicated below.
2. Motor Enclosure: Totally enclosed air over (TEAO) with epoxy or polyurethane finish.
3. Energy Efficiency: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
4. Service Factor: 1.15.
5. Insulation: Class F.
6. Variable-Speed Motors: Inverter-duty rated per NEMA MG-1, Section IV, "Performance
Standard Applying to All Machines," Part 31, "Definite-Purpose, Inverter-Fed, Polyphase
Motors."
7. Severe-duty rating with the following features:
a. Rotor and stator protected with corrosion-inhibiting epoxy resin.

b. Double-shielded, vacuum-degassed bearings lubricated with premium, moisture-
resistant grease suitable for temperatures between minus 20 and 300 deg F (minus
29 and 149 deg C).
c. Internal heater automatically energized when motor is de-energized.

8. Motor Base: Adjustable, or other suitable provision for adjusting belt tension.
L. Vibration Switch: For each fan drive.
1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4.

2. Vibration Detection: Sensor with a field-adjustable, acceleration-sensitivity set point in a
range of 0 to 1 g and frequency range of 0 to 3000 cycles per minute. Cooling tower
manufacturer shall recommend switch set point for proper operation and protection.
3. Provide switch for field connection to a BMS and hardwired connection to fan motor
electrical circuit.
4. Switch shall, on sensing excessive vibration, signal an alarm through the BMS and shut
down the fan.
M. Controls: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and

Controls."
N. Control Package: Factory installed and wired, and functionally tested at factory before
shipment.
1. NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure with removable internally mount backplate.

2. Control-circuit transformer with primary and secondary side fuses.
3. Terminal blocks with numbered and color-coded wiring to match wiring diagram. Spare
wiring terminal block for connection to external controls or equipment.
4. Microprocessor-based controller for automatic control of fan based on cooling tower
leaving-water temperature with control features to improve operating efficiency based on
outdoor ambient wet-bulb temperature by using adaptive logic.
5. Factory-installed and -wired, collection basin electric/electronic level controller.
6. Collection basin electronic level controller complying with requirements in "Electronic,
Collection Basin Water-Level Controller with Solenoid Valve" Paragraph.
7. Electric basin heaters with temperature control and low-water-level safety switch for each
cell, complying with requirements in "Electric Basin Heater" Paragraph.
8. Vibration switch for fan, complying with requirements in "Vibration Switch" Paragraph.
9. Single-point, field-power connection to a fused disconnect switch.
a. Branch power circuit to each motor and electric basin heater and to controls with a
disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
b. NEMA-rated motor controller, hand-off-auto switch, and overcurrent protection
for each motor. Provide variable frequency controller with manual bypass and line
reactors for variable-speed motor indicated.
10. Factory-installed wiring outside of enclosures shall be in metal raceway, except make
connections to each motor and electric basin heater with liquidtight conduit.
11. Visual indication of status and alarm for each motor.
12. Audible alarm and silence switch.
13. Cooling tower shall have hardware to enable BMS to remotely monitor and display the
following:
a. Operational status of each motor.

b. Cooling tower leaving-fluid temperature.
c. Fan vibration alarm.
d. Collection basin high- and low-water-level alarms.

e. VFD status.
O. Personnel Access Components:
1. Doors: Large enough for personnel to access cooling tower internal components from
both cooling tower end walls. Doors shall be operable from both sides of the door.
2. External Ladders with Safety Cages: Aluminum, galvanized- or stainless-steel, fixed
ladders with ladder extensions to access external platforms and top of cooling tower from
adjacent grade without the need for portable ladders. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.27.
3. External Platforms with Handrails: Aluminum, FRP, or galvanized-steel bar grating at
cooling tower access doors when cooling towers are elevated and not accessible from
grade.
4. Handrail: Aluminum, galvanized steel, or stainless steel complete with kneerail and
toeboard, around top of cooling tower. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.23.
P. Characteristics:
1. Sound Pressure Level:
2. Sound Data:
Sound Data (Sound Pressure Levels in dB(A))
Fan Side Opp Fan Opp Side Top

S.P.L. dB(A) at 5’ 56 55 57 55 63
S.P.L. dB(A) at 50’ 44 42 45 42 53
Note 1: Sound Data shown is for 1 Cell operating at full speed.
2.2 NON-CHEMICAL COOLING WATER TREATMENT
A. Furnish and install a non-chemical Condenser Water Treatment System on the re-
circulating water system of each cooling tower. System shall be capable of han-
dling a maximum flow of 210 gallons per minute recirculating water. System
shall be Pulse~Pure ® by EVAPCO or approved equal. System shall have a 12
month money back guarantee if the system fails perform as outlined below.
B. The Non-Chemical Water Treatment System shall have the ability to maintain the
following re-circulated water parameters:
1. Conductivity range of 300 to 5,000 µS/cm.
2. pH range of 6.5 to 9.0.
3. Local environmental regulations may dictate the highest pH permitted for blowdown.
The conductivity setting can be adjusted up or down to change the pH by the balanc-
ing of fresh make-up water.
4. Total bacteria count (TBC) of less than 10,000 CFU’s/ml.

5. Keep condenser water system scale free and corrosion to levels acceptable by AWT
guidelines.
C. The Non-Chemical Water Treatment System shall meet the following electrical
requirements:
1. The system shall have a maximum power draw of 1.3 amps.
2. The system shall operate on a single 120V single, 1 Ø input as standard.
3. The system shall have a Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less than 15%.
4. The system shall meet UL and cUL specifications for electrical components.
5. The system shall have a shielded cable to minimize susceptibility to external electro-
magnetic field interference.
6. The system shall meet FCC requirements for electromagnetic emissions per Title 47
CFR part 18 for Industrial, Scientific and Medical Equipment.
7. The coil assemblies shall be enclosed in a NEMA 4 water resistant shell and be pro-
vided with indicator lights that signify the system is on and operational.
8. All water sensors for conductivity shall be torodial type.
D. The Non-Chemical Water Treatment System shall meet the following construction
requirements:
1. The Electrical Pulse Panel shall be a powder coated NEMA 4 enclosure .The use of
cooling fans to remove heat from the electrical pulse panel shall not be acceptable.
2. The system shall have remote start-up and monitoring capabilities via a control relay
wired from the pump or through the building management system using a MODBUS
protocol.
3. The Chamber shall contain two separate coil sections housing a minimum of four low
frequency and two high frequency coils per chamber.
4. The Conductivity controller shall be integral to the chamber control panel to allow
for simplified calibration and single source power. This single panel shall have a lo-
cal 60 day downloadable USB port for retrieving operational frequency of:
A) Bleed Valve
B) Panel operation
C) Output contact
D) Make-p/bleed metering
This single control panel per chamber shall have the capability of receiving input from
local make-up and bleed water meters and activating a 120 volt contact .
E. The Non-Chemical Water Treatment System provides physical water treatment by:
1. Changing surface scale formation to bulk solution powder formation.
2. Keeping the system free from mineral scale on all heat transfer surfaces (including fill,
coils, air inlet louvers, pipes, heat exchangers, valves and other components in the sys-
tem).

3. Controlling the population of microorganisms such as bacteria by incorporation into col-
loidal particles (encapsulation) to 10,000 CFU/ml or below when measured using plate
count agar at 35°C.
In addition, the non-chemical water treatment system shall provide:
1. A system operating with a reduced blow down volume resulting in water and energy sav-
ings.
2. Blow down containing no added chemicals and conforms to all sewer discharge regula-
tions.
3. FIFRA compliance per EPA requirements for Pesticide Programs of Title 40 CFR Sub-
chapter E.
Installation:
1. For open tower systems the components shall be mounted by the mechanical contractor.
For closed evaporative cooler or condensers all components shall be mounted by the
tower manufacturer during unit construction.
2. Supply all components (coils, transformers, conductivity meters, blowdown valves etc)
necessary for a completely automated stand alone system. Blowdown valves shall be mo-
torized ball valves power open, spring return.
3. The Non Chemical Water Treatment System representative will supervise all piping and
electrical hook-ups associated with the treatment program and will also give directions to
the contractor as to the various sampling, monitoring and the blow down required to en-
sure water chemistry of the system.
4. Any system requiring field installation shall have this preformed under the supervision of
a factory trained Pulse~Pure™ representative.
5. Immediately after hydrostatic testing of piping is completed, systems shall be drained,
flushed, cleaned and passivated. Subsequent to the cleaning process, each system shall
be re-filled with clean water prior to the system being placed into operation. Once filled
the condenser water pump and cooling tower fans shall be operated until conductivity set
point is achieved.
Passivation
The non-chemical water treatment system should initially be operated under blowdown settings or
protocol specified by the non-chemical water treatment system supplier. New galvanized steel cool-
ing towers must be passivated to prevent white rust formation. This conditioning is done by operat-
ing the tower for a period of 6 weeks with a pH between 6.5 and 8.0. After this conditioning period,
the tower may operate at normal pH levels. Controlling this pH may require a higher blowdown rate
for this 6 week period or in some cases additions of a pH reducing agent..
Monitoring and Service
The performance of the system will be monitored every month for the first twelve months of opera-
tion by the non-chemical water treatment system representative.
Each site visits from the non-chemical water treatment system representative shall include the follow-
ing:

1. Perform make-up and cooling water analysis as described below.
2. Inspection of the systems for functionality.
3. Inspection of the blow down system for functionality.
4. Calibration and cleaning of conductivity probes or other instrumentation related to blow
down.
5. Visual inspection of overall system condition (service visits may be timed to coincide with
the opening of certain system components such as a chiller)
An analysis of the following water chemistry parameters will be performed within 30 days of installa-
tion and every 30-45 days for first year of operation at no charge to the customer:
1. pH
2. Conductivity
3. Chloride
4. Alkalinity
5. Hardness
6. Heterotrophic Plate Count
Note: These parameters will be evaluated at a local commercial laboratory or using field-tests kits.
Copy of reports shall be submitted to owner’s representative and the cooling tower manufacturer with
7 days of testing.
A. Verification of Performance: Test and certify cooling tower performance according to

CTI STD 201, "Certification Standard for Commercial Water-Cooling Towers Thermal
Performance."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before cooling tower installation, examine roughing-in for tower support, anchor-bolt sizes and
locations, piping, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other
conditions affecting tower performance, maintenance, and operation.
1. Cooling tower locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact

locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cooling towers on support structure indicated.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install cooling tower using restrained spring isolator rail designed to
distribute tower weight on structural steel beam posted off of building structural design.
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 15 Section
"Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
1. Minimum Deflection: 1 inch (25 mm).
C. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
D. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to cooling towers to allow service and maintenance.
C. Install flexible pipe connectors for all pipe connections to cooling towers mounted on vibration
isolators.
D. Provide drain piping with valve at cooling tower drain connections and at low points in piping.
E. Connect cooling tower overflows and drains, and piping drains to sanitary sewage system.
F. Domestic Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section

"Domestic Water Piping." Connect to water-level control with shutoff valve and union, flange,
or mechanical coupling at each connection.
G. Supply and Return Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section
"Hydronic Piping." Connect to entering cooling tower connections with shutoff valve, balancing
valve, thermometer, plugged tee with pressure gage, and drain connection with valve. Connect
to leaving cooling tower connection with shutoff valve. Make connections to cooling tower
with a union, flange, or mechanical coupling.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.


C. Tests and Inspections: Comply with CTI ATC 105, "Acceptance Test Code for Water Cooling
Towers."
D. Cooling towers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical

connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.
C. Obtain performance data from manufacturer.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions

and perform the following:
a. Clean entire unit including basins.

b. Verify that accessories are properly installed.
c. Verify clearances for airflow and for cooling tower servicing.
d. Check for vibration isolation and structural support.
e. Lubricate bearings.
f. Verify fan rotation for correct direction and for vibration or binding and correct
problems.
g. Adjust belts to proper alignment and tension.
h. Operate variable-speed fans through entire operating range and check for harmonic
vibration imbalance. Set motor controller to skip speeds resulting in abnormal
vibration.
i. Check vibration switch setting. Verify operation.
j. Verify water level in tower basin. Fill to proper startup level. Check makeup
water-level control and valve.
k. Verify operation of basin heater and control.
l. Verify that cooling tower air discharge is not recirculating air into tower or HVAC
air intakes. Recommend corrective action.
m. Replace defective and malfunctioning units.
D. Start cooling tower and associated water pumps. Follow manufacturer's written starting
procedures.
E. Prepare a written startup report that records the results of tests and inspections.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Set and balance water flow to tower inlet.
B. Adjust water-level control for proper operating level.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain cooling towers.

SECTION 15725
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Constant-air-volume, single-zone air-handling units.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit indicated.
1. Unit dimensions and weight.

2. Cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories.
3. Fans:
a. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

b. Certified fan-sound power ratings.
c. Fan construction and accessories.
d. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.
4. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.

5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
6. Filters with performance characteristics.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with
ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment."
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items
involved:
1. Mechanical-room layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural

and mechanical elements.
2. Support location, type, and weight.

Allen & Shariff Engineering AIR-HANDLING UNITS
3. Field measurements.
D. Source quality-control reports.
E. Field quality-control reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency, operation,
B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-
handling units and components.
C. ARI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to
ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and labeled by ARI.
D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
E. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-

F. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 COORDINATION
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of structural-steel support members, if any, with actual
equipment provided.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Filters: One set(s) for each air-handling unit.

2. Gaskets: One set(s) for each access door.
3. Fan Belts: One set(s) for each air-handling unit fan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated

on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Carrier Corporation; a member of the United Technologies Corporation Family.
2. Mammoth Inc.
3. Trane; American Standard Inc.
4. YORK International Corporation.
2.2.1 AHU-1
A. Configuration: Fabricate as detailed on prints.
B. Performance: Conform to ARI 410 and 430 Standards. See schedules on prints.
C. Acoustics: Sound power levels (dB) for the unit shall not exceed the specified levels shown
on the unit schedule. The manufacturer shall provide the necessary sound treatment to meet
these levels if required.
2.2.2 UNIT CONSTRUCTION
A. Fabricate unit with heavy gauge channel posts and panels secured with mechanical fasteners.
All panels, access doors, and ship sections shall be sealed with permanently applied bulb-type
gasket. Shipped loose gasketing is not allowed.
B. Panels and access doors shall be constructed as a 2-inch nominal thick; thermal broke double
wall assembly, injected with foam insulation with an R-value of not less than R-13.
1. The outer panel shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel.
2. The inner liner shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel.
3. The floor plate shall be constructed as specified for the inner liner.
4. Unit will be furnished with solid inner liners.
C. Panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, maximum 5
inches of positive or 6 inches of negative static pressure. Deflection shall be measured at the
panel midpoint.
D. The casing leakage rate shall not exceed .5 cfm per square foot of cabinet area at 5 inches of
positive static pressure or 6 inches of negative static pressure (.0025 m3/s per square meter of
cabinet area at 1.24 kPa static pressure).
E. Module to module field assembly shall be accomplished with an overlapping, full perimeter
internal splice joint that is sealed with bulb type gasketing on both mating modules to minim-
ize on-site labor and meet indoor air quality standards.

F. Access doors shall be flush mounted to cabinetry, with minimum of two six inch long stain-
less steel piano-type hinges, latch and full size handle assembly. Access doors shall swing
outward for unit sections under negative pressure. Access doors on positive pressure sections,
shall have a secondary latch to relieve pressure and prevent injury upon access.
G. The unit base shall be provided by others.
2.2.3 FAN ASSEMBLIES
A. Acceptable fan assembly shall be a double width, double inlet, class II, belt-
drive type housed airfoil fan dynamically balanced as an assembly, as shown in schedule.
Maximum fan RPM shall be below first critical fan speed. Fan assemblies shall be dynamically
balanced by the manufacturer on all three planes and at all bearing supports. Copper lubrication
lines shall be provided and extend from the bearings and attached with grease fittings to the
fan base assembly near access door. If not supplied at the factory, contractor shall mount cop-
per lube lines in the field. Fan and motor shall be mounted internally on a steel base. Factory
mount motor on slide base that can be slid out the side of unit if removal is required. Provide
access to motor, drive, and bearings through hinged access door.
B. Fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on 2" deflection spring vibration type isolators in-
side cabinetry.
2.2.4 BEARINGS, SHAFTS, AND DRIVES
A. Bearings: Basic load rating computed in accordance with AFBMA - ANSI Standards. The
bearings shall be designed for service with an L-50 life of 200,000 hours and shall be a heavy du-
ty pillow block, self-aligning, grease- lubricated ball or spherical roller bearing type.
B. Shafts shall be solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, keyed to shaft, and
protectively coated with lubricating oil. Hollow shafts are not acceptable.
C. V-Belt drives shall be cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and
keyed. Fixed sheaves, matched belts, and drive rated based on motor horsepower. Minimum
of 2 belts shall be provided on all fans with 10 HP motors and above. Standard drive service
factor minimum shall be 1.1 S.F. for 1/4 HP – 7.5 HP, 1.3 S.F. for 10 HP and larger, calcu-
lated based on fan brake horsepower.
2.2.5 ELECTRICAL
A. Fan motors shall be manufacturer provided and installed, Open Drip Proof, high efficiency
(meets EPAct requirements), 1750 RPM, single speed, 200V / 60HZ / 3P. Complete electric-
al characteristics for each fan motor shall be as shown in schedule.
B. Wiring Termination: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, siz-
es, and materials indicated. Enclosed terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
C. Manufacturer shall provide ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Efficiency equation details for individual
equipment to assist Building Engineer for calculating system compliance.

D. Installing contractor shall provide GFI receptacle within 25 feet of unit to satisfy National
Electrical Code requirements.
E. All electrical connection components shall be field provided and mounted as shown on
project schedule.
2.2.6 COOLING AND HEATING COILS
A. Certification: Acceptable water cooling, water heating, steam, and refrigerant coils shall be
certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410 and bear the ARI label. Coils exceeding the
scope of the manufacturer’s certification and/or the range of ARI’s standard rating conditions
will be considered provided the manufacturer is a current member of the ARI Forced Circula-
tion Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils certification programs and that the coils have been
rated in accordance with ARI Standard 410. Manufacturer must be ISO 9002 certified.
B. Water cooling coil shall be provided. Provide access to coil(s) for service and cleaning. En-
close coil headers and return bends fully within unit casing. Unit shall be provided with coil
connections that extend a minimum of 5” beyond unit casing for ease of installation. Drain
and vent connections shall be provided exterior to unit casing. Coil connections must be fac-
tory sealed with grommets on interior and exterior panel liners to minimize air leakage and
condensation inside panel assembly. If not factory packaged, Contractor must supply all coil
connection grommets and sleeves. Coils shall be removable through side and/or top panels of
unit without the need to remove and disassemble the entire section from the unit.
1. Headers shall consist of seamless copper tubing to assure compatibility with primary sur-
face. Headers to have intruded tube holes to provide maximum brazing surface for tube
to header joint, strength, and inherent flexibility. Header diameter should vary with fluid
flow requirements.
2. Fins shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0075 inch aluminum plate construction. Fins
shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube
for maximum heat transfer. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to pro-
vide a continuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length
for maximum heat transfer rates. Bare copper tubes shall not be visible between fins.
3. Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch OD seamless copper, 0.020 inch nominal tube wall thickness,
expanded into fins, brazed at joints. Soldered U-bends shall be provided to minimize the
effects of erosion and premature failure having a minimum tube wall thickness of .025
inches.
4. Coil connections shall be carbon steel, NPT threaded connection. Connection size to be
determined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and drain
fittings shall be furnished on the connections, exterior to the air handler. Vent connec-
tions provided at the highest point to assure proper venting. Drain connections shall be
provided at the lowest point to insure complete drainage and prevent freeze-up.
5. Coil casing shall be a formed channel frame of galvanized steel.

C. Water heating coil shall be provided. Provide access to coil(s) for service and cleaning. En-
flow requirements.
inches.
4. Coil connections shall be carbon steel, threaded connection. Connection size to be de-
termined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and drain
5. Coil shall be furnished as an uncased galvanized steel track to allow for thermal move-
ment and slide into a pitched track for fluid drainage.
2.2.7 FILTERS
A. Furnish combination filter section with 2-inch flat pre-filter and 12-inch Varicel SH car-
tridge 85% efficient (MERV 14) final filter. Provide side loading and removal of filters.
B. Filter media shall be UL 900 listed, Class I or Class II.
C. Filter Magnehelic gauge(s) shall be furnished and mounted by others.
2.2.8 ADDITIONAL SECTIONS
A. Mixing box section shall be provided with end outside air opening and top return air
opening with or without parallel low leak airfoil damper blades. Dampers shall be hol-
low core galvanized steel airfoil blades, fully gasketed and have continuous vinyl seals
between damper blades in a galvanized steel frame. Dampers shall have stainless steel
jamb seals along end of dampers. Connecting linkage and ABS plastic end caps shall be

provided when return and outside air dampers are each sized for full airflow. Return and
outside air dampers of different sizes must be driven separately. Damper Leakage: Lea-
kage rate shall be less than two tenths of one percent leakage at 2 inches static pressure
differential. Leakage rate tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500.
2.3.1 AHU-2
A. The air handler shall be furnished as a vertical draw-through cooling coil and heating coil
type.
2.3.2 AIR HANDLER CASING
A. Air handler casing shall be constructed with a corrosion resistant aluminum frame with 1”
thick, double wall panels. Extruded aluminum frame and polymeric corner pieces are re-
quired for casing protection and rigidity. Unit panels shall consist of injected polyurethane
foam insulation sandwiched between galvanized steel exterior and interior sheets. Formed
“thermal break” panels shall have a plastic molded edge to eliminate inner and outer panels
from contacting each other.
1. Panels shall be fastened to frame with perimeter screws with a neoprene gasket in-
between the panel and the frame to minimize air leakage and prevent thermal bridging
from unit interior to unit exterior. Removable panels for blower and filter sections shall
be furnished on both sides to allow full access to unit interior. Blower and filter access
panels shall include a pocket handle to assist in panel removal.
2.3.3 SUPPLY FAN
A. The supply fan shall be a DWDI forward-curved type. Fan assemblies including fan, motor
and sheaves shall be dynamically balanced by the manufacturer on all three planes at all bear-
ing supports. Manufacturer must ensure maximum fan RPM is below the first critical speed.
B. Fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on vibration type isolators inside cabinetry.
C. Units shall be certified in accordance with the central station air handling units certification
program that is based on ARI Standard 430.
2.3.4 BEARINGS AND DRIVES
A. Basic load rating computed in accordance with AFBMA - ANSI Standards, L-50 life at
200,000 hours heavy duty pillow block type, self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball bearings.
B. Shafts shall be solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, keyed to shaft, and protectively
coated with lubricating oil. Hollow shafts are not acceptable.
keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch sheaves selected so required RPM is obtained with
sheaves set at mid-position and rated based on motor horsepower. Contractor to furnish fixed
sheaves at final RPM as determined by balancing contractor.
2.3.5 ELECTRICAL

A. Motor shall be a high efficiency open drip-proof type and must meet EPAct minimum motor
efficiency standards (applicable only to 1HP motors and larger). Electrical characteristics
shall be as shown on the schedule.
2.3.6 COOLING AND HEATING SECTIONS
A. Access to coils for service and cleaning shall be provided. Coil headers and return bends
shall be fully encased within unit casing. Coil connections shall be factory sealed with
grommets on interior and exterior and gasket sleeve between outer wall and inner liner where
each pipe extends through the unit casing to minimize air and condensate leakage.
B. Cooling Coils.
1. Cooling performance shall be as specified on the unit schedule.
2. Water coil fins shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over
the entire tube for maximum heat transfer. Seamless copper tubes shall be mechanically
expanded into the fins to provide a continuous primary-to-secondary compression bond
over the entire finned length for maximum heat transfer rates. Bare copper tubes shall
not be visible between fins.
3. Water coils shall be provided with headers of seamless copper tubing with intruded tube
holes to permit expansion and contraction without creating undue stress or strain. Coil
connections shall be copper sweat connections with connection size to be determined by
manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and drain connections
shall be furnished on the coil connection, external to the cabinet. Vent connections pro-
vided at the highest point to assure proper venting. Drain connections shall be provided at
the lowest point.
4. Drainpan shall be constructed from stainless steel, pitched and sloped in direction of air-
flow to drain connection to allow for condensate drainage. Drainpan shall be positioned
above 1” thick insulated double wall panel. Condensate drain connections shall be pro-
vided on both sides of drain pan.
5. Coil casing shall be constructed of Galvanized steel.
C. Heating Coil.
1. Heating performance shall be as specified on the unit schedule.
2. Hot water coil fins shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover
over the entire tube for maximum heat transfer. Seamless copper tubes shall be mechani-
cally expanded into the fins to provide a continuous primary-to-secondary compression
bond over the entire finned length for maximum heat transfer rates. Bare copper tubes
shall not be visible between fins.
3. Water coils shall be provided with headers of seamless copper tubing with intruded tube
holes to permit expansion and contraction without creating undue stress or strain. Coil
connections shall be copper sweat connections with connection size to be determined by

manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and drain connections
shall be furnished on the coil connection, external to the cabinet. Vent connections pro-
vided at the highest point to assure proper venting. Drain connections shall be provided at
the lowest point.
2.3.7 FILTER SECTION
A. Filter section shall be a 4-inch deep flat type furnished with MERV 14 deep pleated type fil-
ter.
2.3.8 MIXING BOX
A. No mixing box required.
2.4.1 AHU-3 and AHU-4
A. The following manufacturers are approved for use. No substitutions will be permitted.
1. McQuay 'Skyline' Air Handler shall be the basis of design.
2. Haakon
3. Temtrol
4. Engineered Air
2.4.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A. The air handler shall be furnished as an outdoor horizontal draw through cooling coil and
heating coil type.
B. Performance: Conform to ARI 410 and 430 Standards. See schedules on prints.
C. Acoustics: Sound power levels (dB) for the unit shall not exceed the specified levels shown
on the unit schedule. The manufacturer shall provide the necessary sound treatment to meet
these levels if required.
2.4.3 UNIT CONSTRUCTION
A. Fabricate unit with heavy gauge channel posts and panels secured with mechanical fasteners.
All panels, access doors, and ship sections shall be sealed with permanently applied bulb-type
gasket. Shipped loose gasketing is not allowed.
B. Panels and access doors shall be constructed as a 2-inch nominal thick; thermal broke double
wall assembly, injected with foam insulation with an R-value of not less than R-13.

1. The outer panel shall be constructed of G60 painted galvanized steel.
2. The inner liner shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel.
3. The floor plate shall be constructed as specified for the inner liner.
4. Unit will be furnished with solid inner liners.
C. Panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, maximum 5
inches of positive or 6 inches of negative static pressure. Deflection shall be measured at the
panel midpoint.
D. The casing leakage rate shall not exceed .5 cfm per square foot of cabinet area at 5 inches of
positive static pressure or 6 inches of negative static pressure (.0025 m3/s per square meter of
cabinet area at 1.24 kPa static pressure).
E. Module to module field assembly shall be accomplished with an overlapping, full perimeter
internal splice joint that is sealed with bulb type gasketing on both mating modules to minim-
ize on-site labor and meet indoor air quality standards.
F. Access doors shall be flush mounted to cabinetry, with minimum of two six inch long stain-
less steel piano-type hinges, latch and full size handle assembly. Access doors shall swing
outward for unit sections under negative pressure. Access doors on positive pressure sections,
shall have a secondary latch to relieve pressure and prevent injury upon access.
G. Provide cross broke roofcap system to divert water from the top surface of the air handler.
The rain shed roofcap shall have 2”standing seams covered with splice cap channels to seal
top seam. Splice cap shall break down over sides of standing seam to protect the ends of the
seam.
1. Cooling coil piping vestibule 24” deep shall be factory installed of standard cabinet con-
struction on the coil connection side of the unit. Roofcap over vestibule shall be a conti-
nuous single piece covering both the coil section and the vestibule. Roofcap seams be-
tween coil section and vestibule are not allowed.
2. Heating coil piping vestibule 24” deep shall be factory installed of standard cabinet con-
struction on the coil connection side of the unit. Roofcap over vestibule shall be a conti-
nuous single piece covering both the coil section and the vestibule. Roofcap seams be-
tween coil section and vestibule are not allowed.
H. The unit shall have a 6-inch curb ready base for structural rigidity and condensate trapping.
The curb-ready base shall be designed with sloped drip pans located under all unit sections
except duct openings and shall be supported by frame member.
I. Provide roof curb, designed to allow for proper structural support and condensate trapping.
2.4.4 FAN ASSEMBLIES
A. Acceptable fan assembly shall be a double width, double inlet, class II, belt-drive type housed
forward curved fan dynamically balanced as an assembly, as shown in schedule. Maximum
fan RPM shall be below first critical fan speed. Fan assemblies shall be dynamically ba-
lanced by the manufacturer on all three planes and at all bearing supports. Copper lubrication
lines shall be provided and extend from the bearings and attached with grease fittings to the

fan base assembly near access door. If not supplied at the factory, contractor shall mount
copper lube lines in the field. Fan and motor shall be mounted internally on a steel base.
Factory mount motor on slide base that can be slid out the side of unit if removal is required.
Provide access to motor, drive, and bearings through hinged access door.
B. Fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on 2" deflection spring vibration type isolators in-
side cabinetry.
2.4.5 BEARINGS, SHAFTS, AND DRIVES
A. Bearings: Basic load rating computed in accordance with AFBMA - ANSI Standards. The
bearings shall be designed for service with an L-50 life of 200,000 hours and shall be a heavy
duty pillow block, self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball or spherical roller bearing type.
B. Shafts shall be solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, keyed to shaft, and protectively
coated with lubricating oil. Hollow shafts are not acceptable.
keyed. Fixed sheaves, matched belts, and drive rated based on motor horsepower. Minimum
of 2 belts shall be provided on all fans with 10 HP motors and above. Standard drive service
factor minimum shall be 1.1 S.F. for 1/4 HP – 7.5 HP, 1.3 S.F. for 10 HP and larger, calcu-
lated based on fan brake horsepower.
2.4.6 ELECTRICAL
A. Fan motors shall be manufacturer provided and installed, Open Drip Proof, high efficiency
(meets EPAct requirements), 1750 RPM, single speed, 460V / 60HZ / 3P. Complete electric-
al characteristics for each fan motor shall be as shown in schedule.
B. Wiring Termination: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, siz-
es, and materials indicated. Enclosed terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
C. Manufacturer shall provide ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Efficiency equation details for individual
equipment to assist Building Engineer for calculating system compliance.
D. Installing contractor shall provide GFI receptacle within 25 feet of unit to satisfy National
Electrical Code requirements.
E. All electrical connection components shall be field provided and mounted as shown on
project schedule.
2.4.7 COOLING AND HEATING COILS
A. Certification: Acceptable water cooling, water heating, steam, and refrigerant coils shall be
certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410 and bear the ARI label. Coils exceeding the
scope of the manufacturer’s certification and/or the range of ARI’s standard rating conditions
will be considered provided the manufacturer is a current member of the ARI Forced Circula-
tion Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils certification programs and that the coils have been
rated in accordance with ARI Standard 410. Manufacturer must be ISO 9002 certified.

B. Water cooling coil shall be provided. Provide access to coil(s) for service and cleaning. En-
C. Headers shall consist of seamless copper tubing to assure compatibility with primary surface.
Headers to have intruded tube holes to provide maximum brazing surface for tube to header
joint, strength, and inherent flexibility. Header diameter should vary with fluid flow re-
quirements.
D. Fins shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0075 inch aluminum plate construction. Fins shall
have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube for maxi-
mum heat transfer. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to provide a conti-
nuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length for maximum
heat transfer rates. Bare copper tubes shall not be visible between fins.
E. Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch OD seamless copper, 0.020 inch nominal tube wall thickness, ex-
panded into fins, brazed at joints. Soldered U-bends shall be provided to minimize the effects
of erosion and premature failure having a minimum tube wall thickness of .025 inches.
F. Coil connections shall be carbon steel, NPT threaded connection. Connection size to be de-
termined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and drain fit-
tings shall be furnished on the connections, exterior to the air handler. Vent connections pro-
vided at the highest point to assure proper venting. Drain connections shall be provided at the
lowest point to insure complete drainage and prevent freeze-up.
1. Coil casing shall be a formed channel frame of galvanized steel.
G. Water heating coil shall be provided. Provide access to coil(s) for service and cleaning. En-
flow requirements.

inches.
4. Coil connections shall be carbon steel, threaded connection. Connection size to be de-
termined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and drain
5. Coil shall be furnished as an uncased galvanized steel track to allow for thermal move-
ment and slide into a pitched track for fluid drainage.
2.4.8 FILTERS
A. Furnish combination filter section with 2-inch flat pre-filter and 12-inch Varicel SH cartridge
85% efficient (MERV 14) final filter. Provide side loading and removal of filters.
2.4.9 ADDITIONAL SECTIONS
A. Mixing box section shall be provided with end outside air opening and bottom return air
opening with or without parallel low leak airfoil damper blades. Dampers shall be hollow
core galvanized steel airfoil blades, fully gasketed and have continuous vinyl seals between
damper blades in a galvanized steel frame. Dampers shall have stainless steel jamb seals
along end of dampers. Connecting linkage and ABS plastic end caps shall be provided when
return and outside air dampers are each sized for full airflow. Return and outside air dampers
of different sizes must be driven separately. Damper Leakage: Leakage rate shall be less than
two tenths of one percent leakage at 2 inches static pressure differential. Leakage rate tested
in accordance with AMCA Standard 500.
A. Fan Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan
Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-certified sound ratings seal.
B. Fan Performance Rating: Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power, air density,
rotation speed, and efficiency. Rate performance according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory
Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating."
B. Water Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig (2070 kPa) according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation.
Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Examine roughing-in for hydronic and condensate drainage piping systems and electrical
services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Mounting: Install air-handling units on concrete bases [using elastomeric pads]
[using elastomeric mounts] [using restrained spring isolators] [without vibration isolation
devices] <Insert device>. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Comply
with requirements for concrete bases specified in Division 3 Section "[Cast-in-Place Concrete]
[Cast-in-Place Concrete (Limited Applications)]." Comply with requirements for vibration
isolation devices specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."
1. Minimum Deflection: [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [1 inch (25 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] [3
inches (75 mm)] <Insert dimension>.
2. Install [galvanized] [stainless]-steel plate to equally distribute weight over elastomeric
pad.
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete
base.
4. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into
structural concrete floor.
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and
maintenance.
C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace
temporary filters used during construction and testing, with new, clean filters.
D. Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages
on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter gages on filter
banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters.

E. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters
are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.
D. Connect condensate drain pans using [NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32)] <Insert pipe size>, ASTM B 88,
Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C) copper tubing. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain.
Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction.
E. Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section
"Hydronic Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each coil supply connection.
Install balancing valve and union or flange at each coil return connection.
F. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in
Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water and test coils and connections for leaks.
2. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
equipment.
C. Air-handling unit or components will be considered defective if unit or components do not pass
tests and inspections.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. [Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform] [Perform] startup service.

2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches.
4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth bearing
operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with factory-
recommended lubricants.
6. Verify that zone dampers fully open and close for each zone.
7. Verify that face-and-bypass dampers provide full face flow.
8. Verify that outdoor- and return-air mixing dampers open and close, and maintain
minimum outdoor-air setting.
9. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
10. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed for electric coils.
11. Install new, clean filters.
12. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected duct systems are in fully open position.
B. Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust
fan to indicated rpm.[$ds~Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve
design conditions.]
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan
performance.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air-
handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.7 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling unit and
air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units internally
to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers,
coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units.


SECTION 15763
FAN-COIL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BAS: Building automation system.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
B. LEED Submittals:

C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
D. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items
involved:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.

Allen & Shariff Engineering FAN-COIL UNITS
e. Access panels.
2. Details of installation of hideaway units in existing millwork.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Maintenance schedules and repair part lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and filters.
G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
intended use.
B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units with existing millwork and benches,
furniture and partition assemblies.
1.7 WARRANTY

replace components of units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
a. Fan failure.
b. Coil leak.
2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Fan-Coil-Unit Filters: Furnish one spare filter for each filter installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
product selection:
2.2 FAN-COIL UNITS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: International Environmental Corporation or a comparable product by

one of the following:
1. Carrier Corporation.
2. Trane.
3. USA Coil & Air.
4. YORK International Corporation.
B. Description: Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to ARI 440, ASHRAE 33, and
UL 1995.
C. Coil Section Insulation: 1/2-inch (13-mm) thick, coated glass fiber complying with
ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916.
1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Insulation and adhesive shall have a combined maximum

flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to
ASTM E 84.
2. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
D. Main and Auxiliary Drain Pans: Insulated galvanized steel with plastic liner. Fabricate pans
and drain connections to comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004. Drain pans shall be removable.
E. Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture. Floor-mounting units shall have leveling
screws.
F. Cabinet: Steel with arctic white powder-coat finish.
1. Vertical Unit Front Panels: Removable, steel, with integral stamped steel discharge grille
and channel-formed edges, cam fasteners, and insulation on back of panel.
2. Steel recessing flanges for recessing fan-coil units into ceiling or wall.

G. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting
value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
1. Glass Fiber Treated with Adhesive: 80 percent arrestance and 5 MERV.
H. Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than
0.1 inch (2.5 mm), rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig (1378 kPa) and a
maximum entering-water temperature of 220 deg F (104 deg C). Include manual air vent and
drain valve.
I. Fan and Motor Board: Removable.
1. Fan: Forward curved, double width, centrifugal; directly connected to motor.

Thermoplastic or painted-steel wheels, and aluminum, painted-steel, or galvanized-steel
fan scrolls.
2. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; thermal overload protection, resiliently
mounted on motor board. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
3. Wiring Termination: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
J. Factory, Hydronic Piping Package: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) copper tube
with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Label piping to indicate service, inlet, and
outlet.
1. Two-way, two-position control valve for chilled-water coil.
2. Two-way, two-position control valve for heating coil.
3. Hose Kits: Minimum 400-psig (2758-kPa) working pressure, and operating temperatures
from 33 to 211 deg F (0.5 to 99 deg C). Tag hose kits to equipment designations.
a. Length: [24 inches (600 mm)] [36 inches (900 mm)] <Insert dimension>.
b. Minimum Diameter: Equal to fan-coil-unit connection size.
4. Two-Piece Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE or
TFE seats; and 600-psig (4140-kPa) minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.
5. Automatic Flow-Control Valve: Brass or ferrous-metal body; 300-psig (2070-kPa)
working pressure at 250 deg F (121 deg C), with removable, corrosion-resistant,
tamperproof, self-cleaning piston spring; factory set to maintain constant indicated flow
with plus or minus 10 percent over differential pressure range of 2 to 80 psig (13.8 to 552
kPa).
6. Y-Pattern Hydronic Strainers: Cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B); 125-psig (860-
kPa) working pressure; with threaded connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel
basket, and bottom drain connection. Include minimum NPS 1/2 (DN 15) hose-end, full-
port, ball-type blowdown valve in drain connection.
7. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
8. Risers: [ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B)] [ASTM B 88, Type M
(ASTM B 88M Type C)] copper pipe with hose and ball valve for system flushing.
K. Control devices and operational sequences are specified in Division 15 Sections "HVAC
Instrumentation and Controls" and "Sequence of Operation."
L. Basic Unit Controls:
1. Valves and fan pre-wired to unit mounted terminal strip.

2. Wall-mounting non-programmable thermostat with the following features:
a. Heating and cooling valve control.

b. Fan on-off control.
c. Fan-speed control.
d. Automatic changeover.
e. Adjustable deadband.
f. Exposed set point.
g. Exposed indication.
h. Degree F indication.
i. Separate heating and cooling setpoints.
M. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
1. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods via BAS signal to dry contact.
2. Unit Supply-Air Fan Operation:
a. Fan cycles to maintain room setback temperature.
3. Hydronic-Cooling-Coil Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Open control valve to maintain room temperature.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Close control valve.
4. Heating-Coil Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Start fan and open control valve to provide heating if room
temperature falls below thermostat set point.
b. Unoccupied Periods: Start fan and open control valve if room temperature falls
below setback temperature.
5. Controller shall have volatile-memory backup.
N. BAS Interface Requirements:
1. Interface relay for scheduled operation.
O. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical connection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before fan-
coil-unit installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fan-coil units level and plumb.
B. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.
C. Verify locations of thermostats with drawings and room details before installation. Install new
filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as
follows:
1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

2. Connect piping to fan-coil-unit factory hydronic piping package. Install piping package
if shipped loose.
3. Connect condensate drain to indirect waste.
a. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the pressure of fan. Install
cleanouts in piping at changes of direction.
B. Connect supply and return ducts to fan-coil units with flexible duct connectors specified in
Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct
connections.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report results
in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."

SECTION 15785
AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Packaged energy recovery ventilators.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, furnished
specialties, and accessories.
B. LEED Submittals:

C. Shop Drawings: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

connection.
D. Field quality-control reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment to include in

Allen & Shariff Engineering AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
B. ARI Compliance: Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with
ARI 1060, "Rating Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Equipment."
C. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment"

and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
2. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with
ASHRAE 84, "Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers."
D. NRCA Compliance: Roof curbs for roof-mounted equipment shall be constructed according to
recommendations of NRCA.
E. UL Compliance: Packaged heat recovery ventilators shall comply with requirements in

UL 1812, "Ducted Heat Recovery Ventilators"; or UL 1815, "Nonducted Heat Recovery
Ventilators."
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
1.6 WARRANTY

replace components of air-to-air energy recovery equipment that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Packaged Energy Recovery ventilators: Two years.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Filters: One set(s) of each type of filter specified.

2. Fan Belts: One set(s) of belts for each belt-driven fan in energy recovery ventilators.
3. Wheel Belts: One set(s) of belts for each heat wheel.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PACKAGED ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATORS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated

on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Carnes.
2. Des Champs Technologies.
3. Engineered Air.
4. Loren Cook Company.
5. SEMCO Incorporated.
6. Trane; American Standard Inc.
7. Venmar CES Inc.
B. Housing: Galvanized steel construction with corrosion-protection coating and exterior finish,
hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum
1-inch- (25-mm-) thick 3 lb. density foil faced thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and
piping connections, exterior drain connection, and lifting lugs.
1. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
2. Inlet: Weatherproof hood, with damper for exhaust and supply.
a. Exhaust: Spring-return, two-position, motor-operated damper.

b. Supply: Spring-return, two-position, motor-operated damper.
3. Roof Curb: Refer to Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for roof curbs and equipment
supports.
C. Heat Recovery Device: Heat wheel.
D. Supply and Exhaust Fans: Forward-curved, centrifugal fan with neoprene isolators and
insulated flexible duct connections.
1. Motor and Drive: Belt driven with adjustable sheaves, motor mounted on adjustable
base.
2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified inDivision 15 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
3. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
4. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical
devices and connections specified in Division 16 Sections.
E. Wiring: Fabricate units with space within housing for piping and electrical conduits. Wire
motors and controls so only external connections are required during installation.
1. Outdoor Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure contains relays, starters, and
terminal strip.
2. Include door interlocking disconnect switches.

3. Variable-speed controller to vary fan capacity from 100 to approximately 50 percent.
F. Accessories:
1. Roof Curb: Galvanized steel with fiberglass insulation, gasketing, and factory-installed
wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards; minimum height of 16 inches (350 mm).
Curb shall be sloped to match roof pitch.
2. Intake weather hood with 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick filters.
3. Exhaust weather hood with birdscreen.
4. Duct flanges.
5. Hinged access doors with quarter-turn latches.
2.2 CONTROLS
A. Unit-mounted control center containing a door interlocking disconnect switch, motor starters,
control transformer for 24 VAC control, and a terminal strip. A digital signal from the BAS to
the units terminal strip will energize the outdoor air fan, exhaust fan, and energy wheel. The
BAS shall be alarmed if a fan fails to operate.
B. Stop Wheel: Energy wheel is shut down for periods of free-cooling when the OA enthalpy or
temperature drops below a setpoint. When the OA temperature drops below 45 degrees (adj),
the wheel will be re-energized for heat.
C. Stop/Jog: A timer is included with either Stop Wheel or Modulating Wheel to periodically
energize the energy wheel briefly if it is stopped for economizer to allow the wheel to self-
clean.
D. Modulating: One VFD will be provided for each fan. Each VFD is factory programmed to
accept a field-supplied 0-10V signal, but is easily convertible to receive a 4-20 mA signal
instead.
E. Rotation Sensor: Sends a digital signal to alarm BAS system that energy wheel is not rotating.
F. Dirty Filter Sensor: Sends a digital signal to alarm BAS system that filters require changing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-to-air energy recovery
equipment installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture
damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before
installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Roof Curb: Install air-to-air energy recovery equipment on curbs and coordinate roof
penetrations and flashing with roof construction. Secure air-to-air energy recovery equipment
to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts.
B. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
C. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and
balancing.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for ductwork specified in Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts."

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
2. Adjust seals and purge.
equipment.
4. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.
5. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C. Air-to-air energy recovery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain air-to-air energy recovery units.


SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.
3. Sheet metal materials.
4. Duct liner.
5. Sealants and gaskets.
6. Hangers and supports.
1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-
mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
2. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and
balancing requirements for metal ducts.
A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint
construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design
criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"
C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

Allen & Shariff Engineering METAL DUCTS
1. Liners and adhesives.
2. Sealants and gaskets.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that duct systems comply
with ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment."
2. Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that duct systems comply
with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and
Insulation."
3. Leakage Test Report for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation of work performed for
compliance with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.4.4.2.2 - "Duct Leakage Tests."
4. Duct-Cleaning Test Report for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation of work performed for
compliance with ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.4 - "Ventilation System Start-Up."
of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,

and attachments to other work.
2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.
3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes.
4. Elevation of top of ducts.
5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
6. Fittings.
7. Reinforcement and spacing.
8. Seam and joint construction.
9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and
panels.
12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration
isolation.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal:
1. Sheet metal thicknesses.

2. Joint and seam construction and sealing.
3. Reinforcement details and spacing.
4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.
E. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and
coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction,

building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct
layout.
2. Suspended ceiling components.
3. Structural members to which duct will be attached.

4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.
6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
f. Perimeter moldings.
F. Welding certificates.
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."
D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004,

Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static-
pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and
other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular
Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-

support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible."
D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types
and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable
sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on
indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

the following:
a. Lindab Inc.
b. McGill AirFlow LLC.
c. SEMCO Incorporated.
d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for
static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,
and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings,"
for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support
intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and
Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials
involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct

construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting,
seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 (Z275).

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum
ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900
mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).
2.4 DUCT LINER
A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with
NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group.

b. Johns Manville.
c. Knauf Insulation.
d. Owens Corning.
2. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form
the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating.
Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the
EPA for use in HVAC systems.
3. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with
ASTM C 916.
a. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
4. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.039 W/m x K) at
75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature.
5. Density: 2.0 PCF.

B. Insulation Pins and Washers:

annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch diameter shank, length to suit depth
of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) galvanized carbon-steel washer.
2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch aluminum
with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than
1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.
C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."
1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers
of duct liner is prohibited.
2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal
nosing.
3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.
4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-
edge overlapping.
5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.
6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm
(12.7 m/s).
7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners and at intervals
not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely; at 3 inches (75 mm) from transverse
joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm) longitudinally.
8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have
either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge
facings at the following locations:
a. Fan discharges.
b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than
2500 fpm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated.
9. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as
specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform
distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.
a. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) diameter, with an

overall open area of 23 percent.
10. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning
vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other
buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws,
rivets, or welds.

2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS
A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and
gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index
of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:
1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified
acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight
seal.
2. Tape Width: 4 inches (102 mm).
3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.
4. Water resistant.
5. Mold and mildew resistant.
6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative.
7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.
8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).
9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum.
10. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
4. Water resistant.
6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative.
8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.
steel, or aluminum sheets.
D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Base: Synthetic rubber resin.
3. Solvent: Toluene and heptane.
4. Solids Content: Minimum 60 percent.
5. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 60.
6. Water resistant.
9. VOC: Maximum 395 g/L.
10. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive or negative.
11. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

steel, or aluminum sheets.
E. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.

2. Type: S.
3. Grade: NS.
4. Class: 25.
5. Use: O.
F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
G. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:
1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg (0.14 L/s per
sq. m at 250 Pa) and shall be rated for 10-inch wg (2500-Pa) static-pressure class,
positive or negative.
2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.
3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings
and fitting spigots.
2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized

rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and
Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.
F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and
bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.

3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc
chromate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct
system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and
calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.
Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and
Coordination Drawings.
B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for
branch connections.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and
enclosures.
J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to
view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal
flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2
inches (38 mm).
K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers.
Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke
dampers.
L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use
two-part tape sealing system.
C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When
welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds,
and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings,
hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these
requirements.
3.3 DUCT SEALING
A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct
Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible":
1. All Ducts: Seal Class A.
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."
B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners

appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for
slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2,
"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and
supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each
branch intersection.
D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,
bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16
feet (5 m).
F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,
and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 15 Section
"Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have
duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer.
Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
B. Leakage Tests:
1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report
for each test.
2. Test the following systems:
a. Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) or Higher: Test representative
duct sections totaling no less than 100 percent of total installed duct area for each
duct system.
3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing

and for compliance with test requirements.
4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.
5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section
being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system
design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.
6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:
1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.

2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according
to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC
Systems."
a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media
shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.
D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
3.8 DUCT CLEANING
A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.
1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if
required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch
insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with
Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.
2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.
C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:
1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97
percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.
2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from
HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points
of entry into building.
D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply
and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive
assemblies.
3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section,
air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and
dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
4. Coils and related components.
5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and
mechanical equipment rooms.
6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.
E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants
from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect
vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under
negative pressure.
3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without
damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner
to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated
or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.
5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational.
Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and
straighten fins.
6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.
7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if
fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written
instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.
3.9 START UP
A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing."
3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE
A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel.
B. Supply Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units and ERV-1:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg (500 Pa).

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
C. Return Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units and ERV-1:
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa).

D. Exhaust Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting Air:
a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa).


E. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to gravity ventilator:
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa).

F. Intermediate Reinforcement:
1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.
G. Liner:
1. Supply Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick. Provide liner in first 20 feet of
duct connected to an air-handling unit or connected to ERV-1.
2. Return Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick. Provide liner in first 20 feet of duct
connected to an air-handling unit or connected to ERV-1.
3. Transfer Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick.
H. Elbow Configuration:
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s):

2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two
vanes.
3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
c. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher:

2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two
vanes.
3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.
c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows."
a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-
1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have
proportionately fewer segments.
1) Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three
segments for 90-degree elbow.
2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and
four segments for 90-degree elbow.
3) Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and
five segments for 90-degree elbow.
4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches (305 mm) and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or

pleated.
c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches (356 mm)] and Larger in Diameter: Welded.
I. Branch Configuration:

Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections."
a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.

b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.
2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical
Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.
a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 90-degree tap.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): Conical tap.
c. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 45-degree lateral.

SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.

2. Barometric relief dampers.
3. Manual volume dampers.
4. Control dampers.
5. Fire dampers.
6. Smoke dampers.
7. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
8. Flange connectors.
9. Turning vanes.
10. Remote damper operators.
11. Duct-mounted access doors.
13. Flexible ducts.
1. Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for duct-mounted fire and smoke detectors.
2. Division 15 Section "Intake and Relief Ventilators" for roof-mounted ventilator caps.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Include
breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.
B. LEED Submittal:

Allen & Shariff Engineering DUCT ACCESSORIES
C. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and
attachments to other work.
1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.
Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field
assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:
a. Special fittings.
b. Manual volume damper installations.
c. Control damper installations.
d. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, combination fire- and smoke-damper, ceiling, and
corridor damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors
and remote damper operators.
e. Duct security bars.
f. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted

access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and
coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved.
E. Source quality-control reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to [10] <Insert number> percent of amount
installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise

indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: [G60 (Z180)] [G90 (Z275)].

2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a [No. 2]
<Insert finish designation> finish for concealed ducts and <Insert finish designation> finish
for exposed ducts.
D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, Temper H14;
with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
E. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063, Temper T6.
F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900
mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).
2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

following:
1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.

2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
4. Duro Dyne Inc.
5. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6. Lloyd Industries, Inc.
7. Nailor Industries Inc.
8. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.
9. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
10. Ruskin Company.
12. Vent Products Company, Inc.
B. Description: Gravity balanced.
C. Maximum Air Velocity: [2000 fpm (10 m/s)] [3000 fpm (15 m/s)] <Insert value>.
D. Maximum System Pressure: [1-inch wg (0.25 kPa)] [2-inch wg (0.5 kPa)] <Insert value>.

E. Frame: [0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel] [0.063-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick
extruded aluminum] [0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel], with welded corners[ and
mounting flange].
F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, [center-pivoted,] maximum 6-inch (150-mm) width,

[0.025-inch- (0.6-mm-) thick, roll-formed aluminum] [0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick
aluminum sheet] [noncombustible, tear-resistant, neoprene-coated fiberglass] with sealed
edges.
G. Blade Action: Parallel.
H. Blade Seals: [Felt] [Vinyl foam] [Extruded vinyl, mechanically locked] [Neoprene,
mechanically locked].
I. Blade Axles:
1. Material: [Nonferrous metal] [Galvanized steel] [Plated steel] [Stainless steel] [Non-
metallic] [Aluminum].
2. Diameter: [0.20 inch (5 mm)] <Insert value>.
J. Tie Bars and Brackets: [Aluminum] [Galvanized steel].
K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
L. Bearings: [Steel ball] [Synthetic pivot bushings] [Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings].
M. Accessories:
1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.
3. Electric actuators.
4. Chain pulls.
5. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.
a. Sleeve Thickness: 20-gage (1.0-mm) minimum.

b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches (152 mm) minimum.
6. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted.

7. Screen Material: [Galvanized steel] [Aluminum].
8. Screen Type: [Bird] [Insect].
9. 90-degree stops.
2.3 BAROMETRIC RELIEF DAMPERS

following:


4. Duro Dyne Inc.
10. Ruskin Company.
B. Suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.
C. Maximum Air Velocity: [2000 fpm (10 m/s)] [2500 fpm (13 m/s)] <Insert value>.
D. Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg (0.5 kPa) <Insert value>.
E. Frame: [0.064-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel] [0.063-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick
extruded aluminum], with welded corners[ and mounting flange].
F. Blades:
1. Multiple, [0.025-inch- (0.6-mm-) thick, roll-formed aluminum] [0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-

) thick aluminum sheet].
2. Maximum Width: 6 inches (150 mm).
3. Action: Parallel.
4. Balance: Gravity.
5. Eccentrically pivoted.
G. Blade Seals: [Vinyl] [Neoprene].
H. Blade Axles: [Galvanized steel] [Nonferrous metal].
I. Tie Bars and Brackets:
1. Material: [Aluminum] [Galvanized steel].

2. Rattle free with 90-degree stop.
J. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
K. Bearings: [Synthetic] [Stainless steel] [Bronze].
L. Accessories:
1. Flange on intake.
2. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressures.
3. <Insert accessories>.

2.4 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

following:
a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.

b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
d. McGill AirFlow LLC.
e. METALAIRE, Inc.
f. Nailor Industries Inc.
g. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
h. Ruskin Company.
i. Trox USA Inc.
j. Vent Products Company, Inc.
2. Standard leakage rating[, with linkage outside airstream].

3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
4. Frames:
a. Hat-shaped, [galvanized] [stainless]-steel channels, 0.064-inch (1.62-mm)

minimum thickness.
b. Mitered and welded corners.
c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
5. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade.

b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d. [Galvanized] [Stainless]-steel, 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick.
6. Blade Axles: [Galvanized steel] [Stainless steel] [Nonferrous metal].

7. Bearings:
a. [Oil-impregnated bronze] [Molded synthetic] [Stainless-steel sleeve].

b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have
axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
B. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of

the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

e. METALAIRE, Inc.
h. Ruskin Company.
i. Trox USA Inc.
k. <Insert manufacturer's name>.
2. Standard leakage rating[, with linkage outside airstream].

4. Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with
flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
5. Blades:

d. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick aluminum sheet.
e. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick extruded aluminum.

7. Bearings:

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
C. Low-Leakage, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:


e. METALAIRE, Inc.
h. Ruskin Company.
i. Trox USA Inc.

2. Low-leakage rating[, with linkage outside airstream,] and bearing AMCA's Certified
Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.
4. Frames:
a. [Hat] [U] [Angle] shaped.

b. [Galvanized] [Stainless]-steel channels, 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick.
c. Mitered and welded corners.
d. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
5. Blades:

d. [Galvanized] [Stainless], roll-formed steel, 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick.

7. Bearings:

8. Blade Seals: [Felt] [Vinyl] [Neoprene].

9. Jamb Seals: Cambered [stainless steel] [aluminum].
10. Tie Bars and Brackets: [Galvanized steel] [Aluminum].
11. Accessories:
a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without

vibration.
D. Low-Leakage, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers:


e. METALAIRE, Inc.
h. Ruskin Company.
i. Trox USA Inc.

2. Low-leakage rating[, with linkage outside airstream,] and bearing AMCA's Certified
Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.
4. Frames: [Hat] [U] [Angle]-shaped, 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet
channels; frames with flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in
ducts.
5. Blades:

c. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick aluminum sheet.
d. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick extruded aluminum.

7. Bearings:

8. Blade Seals: [Felt] [Vinyl] [Neoprene].

9. Jamb Seals: Cambered [stainless steel] [aluminum].
10. Tie Bars and Brackets: [Galvanized steel] [Aluminum].
11. Accessories:
a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without

vibration.
E. Jackshaft:
1. Size: 1-inch (25-mm) diameter.

2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on
supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in
multiple-damper assembly.
F. Damper Hardware:
1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick zinc-
plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut.
2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.
3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.5 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the

following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.
4. Duro Dyne Inc.
5. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
8. M&I Air Systems Engineering; Division of M&I Heat Transfer Products Ltd.
9. McGill AirFlow LLC.
10. METALAIRE, Inc.
11. Metal Form Manufacturing, Inc.
14. Ruskin Company.
16. Young Regulator Company.
17. <Insert manufacturer's name>.
B. Low-leakage rating[, with linkage outside airstream,] and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings
Seal for both air performance and air leakage.
C. Frames:
1. [Hat] [U] [Angle] shaped.

2. [Galvanized] [Stainless]-steel channels, 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick.
3. Mitered and welded corners.
D. Blades:
1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches (200 mm).

2. [Parallel] [Parallel- and opposed] [Opposed]-blade design.
3. [Galvanized] [Stainless] steel.
4. 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick.
5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene edging.
6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.
E. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter; [galvanized steel] [stainless steel] [nonferrous
metal]; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade
bearings.
1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (minus 40 to plus 93
deg C).
F. Bearings:
1. [Oil-impregnated bronze] [Molded synthetic] [Stainless-steel sleeve].

2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2.6 FIRE DAMPERS

following:

2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.
6. METALAIRE, Inc.
9. PHL, Inc.
11. Prefco; Perfect Air Control, Inc.
12. Ruskin Company.
14. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Type: [Static] [Dynamic] [Static and dynamic]; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an
NRTL.
C. Closing rating in ducts up to [4-inch wg (1-kPa)] <Insert value> static pressure class and
minimum [4000-fpm (20-m/s)] <Insert value> velocity.
D. Fire Rating: [1-1/2] [and] [3] hours.
E. Frame: [Curtain type with blades inside airstream] [Curtain type with blades outside
airstream] [Multiple-blade type] [Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when
located behind grille where blades may be inside airstream]; fabricated with roll-formed,
0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.
1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch (1.3 or 3.5 mm) thick, as indicated, and of
length to suit application.
2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must
comply with sleeve requirements.
G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel. In

place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel
blade connectors.
I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, [165 deg F (74 deg C)] [212 deg F (100 deg C)]
<Insert temperature> rated, fusible links.
K. Heat-Responsive Device: [Electric] [Pneumatic] resettable link and switch package, factory
installed, [165 deg F (74 deg C)] [and] [212 deg F (100 deg C)] <Insert temperature> rated.
2.7 SMOKE DAMPERS


5. PHL, Inc.
6. Ruskin Company.
B. General Requirements: Label according to UL 555S by an NRTL.
C. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.
D. Frame: [Curtain type with blades inside airstream] [Curtain type with blades outside
E. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet

steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized-
steel blade connectors.
F. Leakage: [Class I ] [Class II] <Insert class>.
G. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
H. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel; length
to suit wall or floor application[ with factory-furnished silicone calking].
I. Damper Motors: [Modulating] [or] [two-position] action.
J. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 15 Section "Common Motor

devices and connections specified in [Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation
and Controls."] [Division 16 Sections.]
3. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear
trains.
4. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated.
Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or
adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway
torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m).
5. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed
to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal
operation at minus 40 deg F (minus 40 deg C).
6. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m), size motor for
running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x
lbf (34 N x m).
7. Electrical Connection: [115 V, single phase, 60 Hz] <Insert values>.
K. Accessories:
1. Auxiliary switches for [signaling] [fan control] [or] [position indication].

2. [Momentary test switch] [Test and reset switches], [damper] [remote] mounted.
2.8 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS


5. Ruskin Company.
B. Type: [Static] [Dynamic] [Static and dynamic]; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and
UL 555S by an NRTL.
C. Closing rating in ducts up to [4-inch wg (1-kPa)] <Insert value> static pressure class and
minimum [4000-fpm (20-m/s)] <Insert value> velocity.
D. Fire Rating: [1-1/2] [and] [3] hours.
E. Frame: [Curtain type with blades inside airstream] [Curtain type with blades outside

F. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, [165 deg F (74 deg C)] [212 deg F (100 deg C)] rated,
fusible links.
G. Heat-Responsive Device: [Electric] [Pneumatic] resettable link and switch package, factory
installed, rated.
H. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.
I. Frame: [Curtain type with blades inside airstream] [Curtain type with blades outside
J. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet

steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized-
steel blade connectors.
K. Leakage: [Class I] [Class II] <Insert class>.
L. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
M. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel; length
to suit wall or floor application[ with factory-furnished silicone calking].
N. Master control panel for use in dynamic smoke-management systems.
O. Damper Motors: [Modulating] [or] [two-position] action.
P. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 15 Section "Common Motor
devices and connections specified in [Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation
and Controls."] [Division 16 Sections.]
3. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear
trains.
4. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated.
Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or
adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway
torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m).
5. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed
to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal
operation at minus 40 deg F (minus 40 deg C).
6. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m), size motor for
running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x
lbf (34 N x m).
7. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.

Q. Accessories:
1. Auxiliary switches for [signaling] [fan control] [or] [position indication].

2. [Momentary test switch] [Test and reset switches], [damper] [remote] mounted.
2.9 FLANGE CONNECTORS

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.
B. Description: [Add-on] [or] [roll-formed], factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange

connectors, gaskets, and components.
C. Material: Galvanized steel.
D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.
2.10 TURNING VANES

following:

2. Duro Dyne Inc.
3. METALAIRE, Inc.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support
with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated

faces and fibrous-glass fill.
C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded
fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into
vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
E. Vane Construction: [Single] [Double] wall.

F. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to [48 inches (1200 mm)] <Insert dimension>
wide and double wall for larger dimensions.
2.11 REMOTE DAMPER OPERATORS


2. Ventfabrics, Inc.
3. Young Regulator Company.
B. Description: Cable system designed for remote manual damper adjustment.
C. Tubing: Brass.
D. Cable: Stainless steel.
E. Wall-Box Mounting: [Recessed, 3/4 inches (19 mm) deep] [Recessed, 2 inches (50 mm)
deep] [Surface].
F. Wall-Box Cover-Plate Material: [Steel] [Stainless steel].
2.12 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

following:

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"
and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."
1. Door:
a. Double wall, rectangular.

b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct
pressure class.
c. Vision panel.
d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and cam
latches.
e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
3. Number of Hinges and Locks:
a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: No hinges and two sash
locks.
b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches (460 mm) Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Three hinges and two
compression latches[ with outside and inside handles].
d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Four hinges and
two compression latches with outside and inside handles.
C. Pressure Relief Access Door:
1. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel.

2. Door: [Single wall] [Double wall with insulation fill] with metal thickness applicable
for duct pressure class.
3. Operation: Open outward for positive-pressure ducts and inward for negative-pressure
ducts.
4. Factory set at [10-inch wg (2500 Pa)] <Insert value>.
5. Doors close when pressures are within set-point range.
6. Hinge: Continuous piano.
7. Latches: Cam.
8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber.
9. Insulation Fill: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.13 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES


2. Flame Gard, Inc.
3. 3M.
B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.
C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness [0.0528-inch (1.3-mm) carbon] [0.0428-inch (1.1-mm)
stainless] steel.
D. Fasteners: [Carbon] [Stainless] steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.

E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for
minimum 2000 deg F (1093 deg C).
F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive or negative.


2. Duro Dyne Inc.
B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip [3-1/2 inches (89 mm)] [5-3/4
inches (146 mm)] wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-
mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick aluminum sheets. Provide
metal compatible with connected ducts.
E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m).

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch (63 N/mm) in the
filling.
F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof,
synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.

filling.
G. High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber.

filling.

H. High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemical-
resistant coating.

filling.
I. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in
compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan
discharge and duct.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of
30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm)
movement at start and stop.
2.15 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

following:

B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; [polyethylene] [aluminized] vapor-barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa) negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20 m/s).
3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F (Minus 23 to plus 71 deg C).
4. Insulation R-value: [Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004] <Insert value>.
C. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; [polyethylene] [aluminized] vapor-barrier film.
4. Insulation R-Value: [Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004] <Insert value>.

D. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by
helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; [polyethylene] [aluminized] vapor-
barrier film.
E. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex
adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation;
[polyethylene] [aluminized] vapor-barrier film.
F. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil; fibrous-glass
insulation; [polyethylene] [aluminized] vapor-barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 8-inch wg (2280 Pa) positive or negative.

G. Flexible Duct Connectors:
1. Clamps: [Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with
a worm-gear action] [Nylon strap] in sizes 3 through 18 inches (75 through 460 mm),
to suit duct size.
2. Non-Clamp Connectors: [Adhesive] [Liquid adhesive plus tape] [Adhesive plus sheet
metal screws].
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous
Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in
galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and
aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install [backdraft] [control] dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as
possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend
from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with
hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.
1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.

2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.
E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install fire[ and smoke] dampers according to UL listing.
H. Install duct security bars. Construct duct security bars from 0.164-inch (4.18-mm) steel sleeve,
continuously welded at all joints and 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter steel bars, 6 inches (150 mm)
o.c. in each direction in center of sleeve. Weld each bar to steel sleeve and each crossing bar.
Weld 2-1/2-by-2-1/2-by-1/4-inch (63-by-63-by-6-mm) steel angle to 4 sides and both ends of
sleeve. Connect duct security bars to ducts with flexible connections. Provide 12-by-12-inch
(300-by-300-mm) hinged access panel with cam lock in duct in each side of sleeve.
I. Connect ducts to duct silencers [with flexible duct connectors] [rigidly].
J. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining
accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1. On both sides of duct coils.

2. Upstream[and downstream] from duct filters.
3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.
4. At drain pans and seals.
5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and
equipment.
6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.
Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure
relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream
from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.
7. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot (15-m) spacing.
8. Upstream[and downstream] from turning vanes.
9. Upstream or downstream from duct silencers.
10. Control devices requiring inspection.
11. Elsewhere as indicated.
K. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
L. Access Door Sizes:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm).

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm).
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm).
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm).
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm).

6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).
M. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.
N. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
O. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg (1250 Pa) and more, cover flexible connectors
with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
P. Connect terminal units to supply ducts[ directly or] with maximum [12-inch (300-mm)]
<Insert value> lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.
Q. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts[ directly or] with maximum [60-inch (1500-
mm)] <Insert value> lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
R. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with [adhesive] [liquid adhesive plus tape] [draw
bands] [adhesive plus sheet metal screws].
S. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
T. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach
thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) movement
during start and stop of fans.
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be
performed.
3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of
movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.
4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and
damper.

SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Ceiling-mounting ventilators.
A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
6. Roof curbs.
7. Fan speed controllers.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
connection.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of
the items involved:

Allen & Shariff Engineering POWER VENTILATORS
1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.
2. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation,
intended use.
B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CEILING-MOUNTING VENTILATORS

1. Broan Mfg. Co., Inc.
2. JencoFan; Div. of Breidert Air Products.
3. Loren Cook Company.
4. Penn Ventilation.
B. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall or for concealed in-line
applications.
C. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation. Outlet, duct collar with integral backdraft
damper.
D. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan
wheel shall be removable for service.
E. Grille: Plastic (non-yellowing) or painted aluminum, louvered grille with flange on intake and
thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.
F. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for
motor plug-in.
G. Accessories:
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50
percent.
2. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.
2.2 MOTORS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
B. Provide with thermal overload protection.
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of
Testing Fans for Rating."

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.
C. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and elastomeric hangers.
D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical

Identification."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section
"Duct Accessories."
B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and
adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
6. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
7. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
8. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to
indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
9. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.

10. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.

SECTION 15900
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control
components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.
1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for measuring equipment that relates to this
Section.
2. Division 15 Section "Sequence of Operation" for requirements that relate to this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct digital control.
B; I/O: Input/output.
C, BACnet: A data communication protocol for building automation and control networks.
D. LonWorks: A control network technology platform for designing and implementing

interoperable control devices and networks.
E. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.
F, PC: Personal computer.
G. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.
H. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Comply with the following performance requirements:

Allen & Shariff Engineering HVAC INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROLS
1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data
within 10 seconds.
2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data
within 8 seconds and shall automatically refresh every 15 seconds.
3. Configuration and tuning screens: Any special screens used for configuring, calibrating,
or tuning points, PID loops, and similar control logic shall refresh every 5 seconds.
4. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of
a binary object and device reaction. Analog objects should start to adjust within 2
seconds.
5. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or
workstation within six seconds.
6. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 15 seconds. Multiple
workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other.
7. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds,
but selected consistent with mechanical process under control.
8. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan
and update process values and outputs at least once per second.
9. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured
variables within tolerances as follows:
a. Water Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F.

b. Water Flow: Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale.
c. Water Pressure: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale.
d. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F.
e. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F.
f. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F.
g. Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus 3 deg F.
h. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F.
i. Relative Humidity: Plus or minus 5 percent.
j. Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus or minus 3 percent of full scale.
k. Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale.
l. Airflow (Terminal): Plus or minus 10 percent of full scale.
m. Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus 0.01-inch wg.
n. Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus or minus 0.1-inch wg.
o. Carbon Monoxide: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.
p. Carbon Dioxide: Plus or minus 50 ppm.
q. Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate
dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for
materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.
1. DDS System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity,

manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation
equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors,
actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment.

2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator
interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications.
3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device,

manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence
of operation including schematic diagram.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
connection.
1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number.

2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control
devices.
4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling.
5. Written description of sequence of operation.
6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics.
7. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics.
8. DDC System Hardware:
a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers.

b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware.
c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk
data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit locations.
10. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data
(connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations.
11. Controlled Systems:
a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and
control elements graphically shown, with wiring.
b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including
bases and special construction.
c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.
d. Points list.
C. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system
component complies with at least one of the following:
1. ASHRAE 135
2. LonWorks
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or sensor cover
with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or sensor cover.

F. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.
2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data
files.
3. Device address list.

4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.
G. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future systems revisions
or monitoring and control revisions.
H. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
I. Field quality-control test reports.
J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device.
2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and
devices.
3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function
4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration
tolerances.
5. Calibration records and lists of set points.
1.6 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Building Automation System (BAS) manufacturer shall furnish and install a fully
integrated building automation system, incorporating direct digital control (DDC) for energy
management, equipment monitoring and control, and subsystems with open communications
capabilities as herein specified. Provide open communications system. The system shall be an
open architecture with the capabilities to support a multi-vendor environment. To accomplish
this effectively, system shall be capable of utilizing standard protocols as follows as well as be
able to integrate third-party systems via existing vendor protocols. The system shall not be
limited to only use open communication protocols, but also be able to integrate a wide variety
of third-party devices and applications via existing vendor protocols and through the latest
software standards.
B. The installation of the control system shall be performed under the direct supervision of the
controls manufacturer with the shop drawings, flow diagrams, bill of materials, component
designation or identification number and sequence of operation all bearing the name of the
manufacturer. The installing manufacturer shall certify in writing, that the shop drawings have

been prepared by the equipment manufacturer and that the equipment manufacturer has
supervised their installation. In addition, the equipment manufacturer shall certify, in writing,
that the shop drawings were prepared by their company and that all temperature control
equipment was installed under their direct supervision.
C. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured for this
and/or other systems and not custom designed specially for this project. All systems and
components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use for at least two years.
D. BAS manufacturer shall be responsible for all BAS and Temperature Control wiring for a
complete and operable system. All wiring shall be done in accordance with all local and
national codes, and be in conduit.
E. System shall use the BACnet protocol for communication to the operator workstation or web
server and for communication between control modules. Schedules, setpoints, trends, and
alarms specified in Section 15900 Appendix A (Sequence of Operation) shall be BACnet
objects.
F. Provide controller, sensors and all control devices and wiring for air handling units.
A. The BAS system shall be designed and installed , commissioned and

serviced by manufacturer employed, factory trained personnel. Manufacturer shall have
an in-place support facility within 100 miles of the site with technical staff, spare parts
inventory and necessary test and diagnostic equipment. Distributors or licensed installing
contractors are not acceptable.
The manufacturer shall provide an experienced project manager for this work, responsi-
ble for direct supervision of the design, installation, start up and commissioning of the
BAS
The Bidder shall be regularly engaged in the manufacturing, installation and maintenance
of BAS systems and shall have a minimum of ten (10) years of demonstrated technical
expertise and experience in the manufacture, installation and maintenance of BAS sys-
tems similar in size and complexity to this project. A maintained service organization
consisting of at least ten (10) competent servicemen for a period of not less than ten years
and provide a list of 10 projects, similar in size and scope to this project, completed with-
in the last five years.
B. Materials and equipment shall be the catalogued products of manufacturers regularly en-
gaged in production and installation of automatic temperature control systems and shall
be manufacturer's latest standard design that complies with the specification require-
ments.

C. All BAS peer-to-peer network controllers, central system controllers and local user dis-
plays shall be UL Listed under Standard UL 916, category PAZX; Standard ULC C100,
category UUKL7; and under Standard UL 864, categories UUKL, UDTZ, and QVAX.
and be so listed at the time of bid. All floor level controllers shall comply, at a minimum,
with UL Standard UL 91 6category PAZX; Standard UL 864, categories UDTZ, and
QVAX.
E. All electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC Regulation, Part 15,
Governing Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Interference and be so labeled.
F. The manufacturer of the building automation system shall provide documentation sup-
porting compliance with ISO-9002 (Model for Quality Assurance in Production, Installa-
tion, and Servicing) and ISO-140001 (The application of well-accepted business man-
agement principles to the environment). The intent of this specification requirement is to
ensure that the products from the manufacturer are delivered through a Quality System
and Framework that will assure consistency in the products delivered for this project.
G. This system shall have a documented history of compatibility by design for a minimum
of 15 years. Future compatibility shall be supported for no less than 10 years. Compatibil-
ity shall be defined as the ability to upgrade existing field panels to current level of tech-
nology, and extend new field panels on a previously installed network.
Compatibility shall be defined as the ability for any existing field panel microprocessor to
be connected and directly communicate with new field panels without bridges, routers or
protocol converters.
A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to
be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment
manufacturer.
B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans
and room details before installation.
B. Coordinate equipment with Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" to achieve compatibility with
equipment that interfaces with that system.
C. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator
workstation.
D. Coordinate equipment with Division 16 Section "Panelboards" to achieve compatibility with

starter coils and annunciation devices.

E. Coordinate equipment with Division 16 Section "Motor-Control Centers" to achieve
compatibility with motor starters and annunciation devices.
F. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
G. Coordination Meeting: The Installer furnishing the DDC network shall meet with the Installer(s)
furnishing each of the following products to coordinate details of the interface between these
products and the DDC network. The Owner or his designated representative shall be present at
this meeting. Each Installer shall provide the Owner and all other Installers with details of the
proposed interface including PICS for BACnet equipment, hardware and software identifiers for
the interface points, network identifiers, wiring requirements, communication speeds, and
required network accessories. The purpose of this meeting shall be to insure there are no
unresolved issues regarding the integration of these products into the DDC network. Submittals
for these products shall not be approved prior to the completion of this meeting.
N. Variable frequency drives: Furnish variable frequency drives with an interface to monitoring
and control points specified in Section 15900 Appendix A. Points specified in Appendix A shall
be the minimum acceptable list of interface points. Use hard-wired points (such as relay, 0 - 10
Vdc, 4 - 20 mA) or a BACnet interface for points listed as AI, DI, AO, or DO in Appendix A.
Furnish a BACnet interface to points listed as AV or DV.
O. Communications with Third Party Equipment: Any additional integral control systems included
with the products integrated with the work of this section shall be furnished with a BACnet
interface for integration into the Direct Digital Control System described in this section.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary for the successful operation of the
entire BAS system for a period of one year after substantial completion.
B. The adjustment, required testing, and repair of the system includes all computer equipment,
transmission equipment and all sensors and control devices.
C. The on-line support services shall allow the local BAS subcontractor to dial out over telephone
lines to monitor and control the facility's building automation system. This remote connection
to the facility shall be within 4 hours of the time that the problem is reported. This coverage
shall be extended to include normal business hours, after business hours, weekends and
holidays.
If the problem cannot be resolved with on-line support services, the BAS manufacturer shall
dispatch the appropriate personnel to the job site to resolve the problem within 8 hours of the
time that the problem is reported.
PART 2 –PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

product selection:

2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
1. Automated Logic Corporation.

2. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group.
3. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.
4. Trane; Worldwide Applied Systems Group
C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers
operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to
control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via
dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device
depicted by point-and-click graphics.
2.3 DDC EQUIPMENT
A. Operator Workstation: One PC-based microcomputer(s) with minimum configuration as

follows:
1. Motherboard: With 8 integrated USB 2.0 ports, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet),
integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring.
2. Processor: Intel Pentium 4, 3.2 Ghz, minimum.
3. Random-Access Memory: 1.0 GB.
4. Graphics: Video adapter, minimum 1600 x 1200 pixels, 64-MB video memory, with TV
out.
5. Monitor: 20” flat screen, , LCD color.
6. Keyboard: QWERTY, 105 keys in ergonomic shape.
7. Floppy-Disk Drive: 1.44 MB.
8. Hard-Disk Drive: 80 GB.
9. CD-ROM Read/Write Drive: 48x24x48 and DVD rom drive..
10. Mouse: Three button, optical.
11. Uninterruptible Power Supply: 2 kVa.
12. Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional with high-speed Internet access.
a. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Workstation shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and
communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.
b. LonWorks Compliance: Control units shall use LonTalk protocol and
communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol.
13. Printer: Black-and-white, laser-jet type as follows:
a. Print Head: 1200 x 1200 dpi resolution.

b. Paper Handling: Minimum of 250 sheet trays.
c. Print Speed: Minimum of 120 characters per second.
14. Printer: Color, ink-jet type as follows:
a. Print Head: 4800 x 1200 dpi optimized color resolution.

b. Paper Handling: Minimum of 100 sheets.
c. Print Speed: Minimum of 17 ppm in black and 12 ppm in color.
15. Application Software:
a. I/O capability from operator station.

b. System security for each operator via software password and access levels.
c. Automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures.
d. Database creation and support.
e. Automatic and manual database save and restore.
f. Dynamic color graphic displays with up to 10 screen displays at once.
g. Custom graphics generation and graphics library of HVAC equipment and
symbols.
h. Alarm processing, messages, and reactions.
i. Trend logs retrievable in spreadsheets and database programs.
j. Alarm and event processing.
k. Object and property status and control.
l. Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power.
m. Data collection, reports, and logs. Include standard reports for the following:
1) Current values of all objects.

2) Current alarm summary.
3) Disabled objects.
4) Alarm lockout objects.
5) Logs.
n. Custom report development.

o. Utility and weather reports.
p. ASHRAE Guideline 3 report.
q. Workstation application editors for controllers and schedules.
r. Maintenance management.
s. Workstation information access shall use BACnet protocol communication.
t. Clock Synchronization
16. Custom Application Software:
a. English language oriented.

b. Full-screen character editor/programming environment.
c. Allow development of independently executing program modules with
debugging/simulation capability.
d. Support conditional statements.
e. Support floating-point arithmetic with mathematic functions.
f. Contains predefined time variables.

(Note: some of the following paragraph may be placed in section 2.11 Workstation
Operator Interface)
17. System software
a. Operating System. Furnish a concurrent multi-tasking operating system. The
operating system shall support the use of other common software applica-
tions that operate under DOS or Windows. Acceptable operating systems
include Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows NT, or Linux.
b. Auto Discovery and Graphic Assignment: The Operator Work Station shall
be able to automatically discover controller types on the network and asso-
ciate a predefined graphic to any given controller on the network.
c. System Graphics. The operator workstation software shall be graphically
oriented. The contractor shall provide all required graphic screens to provide
a summary of the most important data for each controlled zone or piece of
equipment, point and click navigation between zones or equipment, and
editing of setpoints and other commonly accessed properties. As a mini-
mum, the Contractor shall provide one graphic screen per piece of equip-
ment or occupied zone as well as screens that summarize conditions on each
floor of each building included in this contract. The Contractor shall also
provide the tools and documentation necessary for the customer to edit sup-
plied graphics or create new graphics and integrate them into the system.
Using these tools, it shall be possible to add analog and binary values, dy-
namic text, static text, and animation files to a background graphic.
d. Graphics Library. Furnish a complete library of standard HVAC equipment
graphics such as chillers, boilers, air handlers, terminals, fan coils, and unit
ventilators. The library shall be furnished in a file format compatible with the
graphics generation package program.
18. Web Based Operator Interface
The BAS shall provide a web based graphical interface that allows users to access the
BAS data via the Internet, extranet, or Intranet. The interface shall use HTML based
ASP pages to send and receive data from the BAS to a web browser.
A web server computer will be supplied. The web server shall use Microsoft’s IIS
server 4.0 with Windows NT4, or IIS 5.0 with Windows 2000, and support browser
access via Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 (or higher), or Navigator Netscape 6.0 (or
higher).
All information exchanged over Internet shall be optionally encrypted and secure via
SSL (provided by Owner).
Access to the web interface may be password protected. A users rights and privileges
to points and graphics will be the same as those assigned at the BAS workstation.
An option will exist to only allow users “read” access via the web browser, while
maintaining “command” privileges via the BAS workstation.

Commissioning of the Web interface shall not require modification or creation of
HTML or ASP pages. All graphics available at the BAS graphical workstation shall
be available to users via a web browser.
The web-based interface shall provide the following functionality to users, based on
their access and privilege rights:
1) Logon Screen – allows the user to enter their user name, password and Domain
name for logging into the web server.
2) Alarm Display – a display of current BAS alarms to which the user has access
will be displayed. Users will be able to acknowledge and erase active alarms,
and link to additional alarm information including alarm messages, and infor-
mational and memo text. Any alarm acknowledgements initiated through the
web interface will be written to the BAS central workstation activity log.
3) Graphic Display – Display of system graphics, including animated motion,

available in the BAS workstation will be available for viewing over the web
browser. Software that requires creation of dedicated “web” graphics in order
to display them via the browser interface will not be acceptable. A graphic se-
lector list will allow users to select any graphics to which they have access.
Graphic displays will automatically refresh with the latest change of values.
Users will have the ability to command and override points from the graphic
display as determined by their user accounts rights.
4) Point details – users will have access to point detail information including op-
erational status, operational priority, physical address, and alarm limits, for
point objects to which they have access rights.
5) Point Commanding – users will be able to override and command points they
have access to via the web browser interface. Any commands or overrides in-
itiated via the web browser interface will be written to the BAS central
workstation activity log.
g. The web server licensing options will allow concurrent access by 10 browser
connections.
h. Internet connections, ISP services, as well as necessary firewalls or proxy servers

shall be provided by the Owner as required to support the web access feature.
B. Diagnostic Terminal Unit: One portable notebook-style, PC-based microcomputer terminal

capable of accessing system data by connecting to system network with minimum configuration
as follows:
1. System: With one integrated USB 2.0 port, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet),
integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring
2. Processor: Intel Pentium 4, 3.2 Ghz, minimum.
3. Random-Access Memory: 1.0 GB.
4. Graphics: Video adapter, minimum 1024 x 768 pixels, 64-MB video memory.

5. Monitor: 17 inches, LCD color.
6. Keyboard: QWERTY 105 keys in ergonomic shape.
7. Floppy-Disk Drive: 1.44 MB.
8. Hard-Disk Drive: 60 GB.
9. CD-ROM Read/Write Drive: 48x24x48 and DVD rom.
10. Pointing Device: Touch pad or other internal device.
11. BACnet: The terminal shall use services as defined by ASHRAE Standard 135-95 to
communicate with BACnet objects in the internet.
C. The PC Workstations shall support the BACnet interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBS)
for read (initiate) and write (Execute) Services. That Following BIBBS shall be sup-
ported:
a. DS-RP-A,B
b. DS-RPM-A
c. DS-WP-A
d. DS-wpm-A
2.4 NETWORKING COMMUNICATIONS
A. The design of the BAS shall network the operator workstations and new stand-alone DDC
Controllers. The network architecture shall consist of multiple levels for communication effi-
ciency, a campus-wide Ethernet network based on TCP/IP protocol, high performance
peer-to-peer building level network(s) and DDC Controller floor level local area networks
with access being totally transparent to the user when accessing data or developing control
programs. Communication between the workstation/server and the control network backbone
shall use the ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and BACnet/IP ad-
dressing as specified in Annex J of the ASHRAE/ANSI BACnet Specification and BACnet
MS/TP to support lower order devices. Connection from a remote site to OWS shall use ei-
ther the BACnet Point to Point Physical/Data Link Layer Protocol or IP over Point-to-Point
(PTP).
B. The design of BAS shall allow the co-existence of new DDC Controllers with existing DDC
Controllers in the same network without the use of gateways or protocol converters.
C. Peer-to-Peer Building Level Network:
1. All operator devices either network resident or connected via dial-up modems shall
have the ability to access all point status and application report data or execute con-
trol functions for any and all other devices via the peer-to-peer network. No hard-
ware or software limits shall be imposed on the number of devices with global access
to the network data at any time.
2. The peer-to-peer network shall support a minimum of 100 DDC controllers and PC
workstations

3. Each existing workstation shall support a minimum of 4 peer to peer networks hard-
wired or dial up.
4. The system shall support integration of third party systems (fire alarm, security, light-
ing, PCL, chiller, boiler) via panel mounted open protocol processor. This processor
shall exchange data between the two systems for interprocess control. All exchange
points shall have full system functionality as specified herein for hardwired points.
5. The peer-to-peer Building Level Network shall use the TCP/IP over Ethernet. All
devices must:
a. Auto-sense 10/100 Mbps networks.

b. Receive an IP Address from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) Server or be configured with a Fixed IP Address.
c. Resolve Name to IP Addresses for devices using a Domain Name Service
(DNS) Server on the Ethernet network.
d. Allow access using Telnet.
D. Intranet/Internet access
1. Web Based Operator Interface
a. The BAS shall provide a web based graphical interface that allows users to
access the BAS data via the Internet, extranet, or Intranet. The interface
shall use HTML based ASP pages to send and receive data from the BAS
to a web browser.
b. A web server will be supplied. The web server shall support browser access
via Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 (or higher), or Navigator Netscape
6.0 (or higher).
c. BACnet. The web server shall support the BACnet Interperable Building
Blocks (BIBBS) for Read (Initiate) and Write (Execute) Services. These
are the Data Sharing BIBBS as follows:
DS-RP-A,B
DS-RPM-A
DS-WP-A
DS-WPM-A
d. The Web browser client shall support Sun Microsystems Java 2 (JRE 1.4.0 or
higher plug in.
e. All information exchanged over Internet shall be optionally encrypted and
secure via SSL (provided by Owner).
f. Access to the web interface may be password protected. A users rights and
privileges to points and graphics will be the same as those assigned at the
BAS workstation. An option will exist to only allow users “read” access
via the web browser, while maintaining “command” privileges via the
BAS workstation.

g. Commissioning of the Web interface shall not require modification or crea-
tion of HTML or ASP pages. All graphics available at the BAS graphi-
cal workstation shall be available to users via a web browser.
h. The web-based interface shall provide the following functionality to users,
based on their access and privilege rights:
1) Logon Screen – allows the user to enter their user name, pass-
word and Domain name for logging into the web server.
2) Alarm Display – a display of current BAS alarms to which the

user has access will be displayed. Users will be able to ac-
knowledge and erase active alarms, and link to additional alarm
information including alarm messages, and informational and
memo text. Any alarm acknowledgements initiated through the
web interface will be written to the BAS central workstation ac-
tivity log.
3) Graphic Display – Display of system graphics, including ani-

mated motion, available in the BAS workstation will be available
for viewing over the web browser. Software that requires crea-
tion of dedicated “web” graphics in order to display them via the
browser interface will not be acceptable. A graphic selector list
will allow users to select any graphics to which they have access.
Graphic displays will automatically refresh with the latest
change of values. Users will have the ability to command and
override points from the graphic display as determined by their
user accounts rights.
4) Point details – users will have access to point detail information

including operational status, operational priority, physical ad-
dress, and alarm limits, for point objects to which they have
access rights.
5) Point Commanding – users will be able to override and com-

mand points they have access to via the web browser interface.
Any commands or overrides initiated via the web browser inter-
face will be written to the BAS central workstation activity log.
h. Internet connections, ISP services, as well as necessary firewalls or

proxy servers shall be provided by the Owner as required to support the
web access feature.
2. Web Based Reporting Application
a. The Data Managment System shall provide a web based graphical interface
that allows users to access the stored data via the Internet, extranet, or Intra-
net. The interface shall use HTML based ASP pages to send and receive data
from the data management system to a web browser.

b. The web server shall support browser access via Microsoft Internet Explorer
5.0 (or higher), or Navigator Netscape 6.0 (or higher).
c. Access to the web interface may be password protected. Users shall be able
to configure reports and/or run reports.
d. Commissioning of the Web interface shall not require modification or crea-

tion of HTML. XML or ASP pages.
e. The web-based interface shall provide the following functionality to users,

based on their access and privilege rights:
1) Logon – Allows users to logon to the application
2) Report Viewing Interface – View reports and schedules available to

data management platform
3) Report Generation Interface –Run reports on demand
f. The web server licensing options will allow concurrent access
h. Internet connections, ISP services, as well as necessary firewalls or the

Owner as required to support the web access feature shall provide proxy
servers.
E. Management Level Network (MLN)
1. All Ethernet-capable PCs shall simultaneously direct connect to the Ethernet Man-
agement Level Network without the use of an interposing device.
2. Operator Workstation shall be capable of simultaneous direct connection and com-

munication with BACnet networks without the use of interposing devices.
3. The Management Level Network shall not impose a maximum constraint on the
number of operator workstations.
4. When appropriate, any controller residing on the peer-to-peer building level networks
shall connect to Ethernet network without the use of a PC or a gateway with a hard
drive.
5. Any PC on the Ethernet Management Level Network shall have transparent commu-
nication with controllers on the building level networks connected via Ethernet, as
well as, directly connected building level networks. Any PC shall be able to interro-
gate any controller on the building level network.

6. Any break in Ethernet communication from the PC to the controllers on the building
level networks shall result in an alarm notification at the PC.
7. The standard client and server workstations on the Management Level Network shall
reside on industry standard Ethernet utilizing standard TCP/IP, IEEE 802.3
8. Any break in Ethernet communication between the standard client and server
workstations on the Management Level Network shall result in a notification within
the Windows taskbar at each workstation.
9. Access to the system database shall be available from any standard client workstation
on the Management Level Network.
2.5 DDC CONTROLLER FLOOR LEVEL NETWORK:
A. This level communication shall support a family of application specific controllers and shall
communicate with the peer-to-peer network via BACnet (using the MS/TP Data
Link/Physical Layer protocol) or Lontalk through DDC Controllers for transmission of global
data.
2.6 DDC & HVAC MECHANlCAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERS
A. The DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall reside on the Building
Level Network.
B. DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall use the same programming lan-
guage and tools. DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers which require differ-
ent programming language or tools on a network are not acceptable.
C. DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers which do not meet the functions spe-
cified in Section 2.4.1 and Section 2.5 for DDC Controllers or Section 2.4.2 and Section
2.5 for HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers are not acceptable.
D. Each DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment controller shall have a connection for a
laptop computer or a portable operator's tool. This connection shall be extended to a
space temperature sensor port where shown.
E. Distributed Processing: Each DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall
be capable of performing all specified control functions in a completely independent
manner. Independent shall be defined as follows: If any one control unit or commu-
nications processor malfunctions within the system, all other control units will con-
tinue to control, monitor, have the ability to be accessed and programmed without be-
ing in a degraded mode. Each DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller
shall have a separate internal battery backed time clock for scheduling devices con-
trolled by that panel. DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers that are Ap-

plication Specific, such as dedicated VAV controllers or Fan Coil Unit controllers,
may use an automatically recalibrated software based clock.
Networking: Each DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall be capa-
ble of sharing point information with other such units, such that control sequences or
control loops executed at one control unit may receive input signals from sensors
connected to other units within the network. If the network communication link fails
or the originating control unit malfunctions, the control loop shall continue to func-
tion using the last value received from the failed stand-alone unit.
2.7 DDC CONTROLLER
A. DDC Controllers shall be a 16-bit stand-alone, multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time digital

control processors consisting of modular hardware with plug-in enclosed processors,
communication controllers, power supplies and input/output point modules. Controller
size shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the at-
tached point I/O schedule. Each controller shall support a minimum of three (3) Floor
Level Application Specific Controller Device Networks.
B. Each DDC Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system
and databases, including:
1. Control processes
2. Energy management applications
3. Alarm management applications including custom alarm messages for each level
alarm for each point in the system.
4. Historical/trend data for points specified
5. Maintenance support applications
6. Custom processes
7. Operator I/O
8. Dial-up communications
9. Manual override monitoring
C. Each DDC Controller shall support firmware upgrades without the need to replace hard-
ware.
D. Provide all processors, power supplies and communication controllers so that the imple-
mentation of a point only requires the addition of the appropriate point input/output ter-
mination module and wiring.
E. DDC Controllers shall provide a RS-232C serial data communication ports for operation
of operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, operator terminals, modems
and portable laptop operator's terminals. DDC Controllers shall allow temporary use of
portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected
modems, printers or terminals.

F. As indicated in the point I/O schedule, the operator shall have the ability to manually
override automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC Controller via local, dis-
play on local switches.
G. DDC Controllers shall provide status indication for each digital input and output for con-
stant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O
device. Status indication shall be visible without opening the panel door.
H. Each DDC Controller shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication diag-

nosis and diagnosis of all panel components. The DDC Controller shall provide both lo-
cal and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions
or repeated failure to establish communication.
H. Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer network terminations, as well as all field
point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with:
1. RF-Conducted Immunity (RFCI) per ENV 50141 (IEC 1000-4-6) at 3 V
2. Electro Static Discharge (ESD) Immunity per EN 61000-4-2 (IEC 1000-4-2) at 8 kV

air discharge, 4 kV contact
3. Electrical Fast Transient (EFT) per EN 61000-4-4 (IEC 1000-4-4) at 500 V signal, 1
kV power
4. Output Circuit Transients per UL 864 (2,400V, 10A, 1.2 Joule max)
5. Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer panel's AC input terminals to suppress

induced voltage transients consistent with:
a. IEEE Standard 587-1980
b. UL 864 Supply Line Transients
c. Voltage Sags, Surge, and Dropout per EN 61000-4-11 (EN 1000-4-11)
J. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all DDC
Controllers to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non-volatile
memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and battery
backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a
minimum of 60 days.
1. Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC Controller shall automatically

resume full operation without manual intervention.
2. Should DDC Controller memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the
capability of reloading the DDC Controller via the local RS-232C port, via tele-
phone line dial-in or from a network workstation PC.

K. Provide a separate DDC Controller for each AHU or other HVAC system as indicated in Sec-
tion 3.02. It is intended that each unique system be provided with its own point resident DDC
Controller.
2.8 HVAC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERS
A. HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall be a 12-bit stand-alone, multi-tasking,

multi-user, real-time digital control processors consisting of modular hardware with
plug-in enclosed processors.
B. Each HVAC Mechanical Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its own op-
erating system and databases, including:
1. Control processes
2. Energy management applications
3. Alarm management applications including custom alarm messages for each level
alarm for each point in the system.
4. Historical/trend data for points specified
5. Maintenance support applications
6. Custom processes
7. Operator I/O
8. Remote communications
C. HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall provide a RS-232C serial data commu-
nication port for operation of operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, op-
erator terminals, modems and portable laptop operator's terminals.
D. HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall provide local LED status indication for
each digital input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions
without the need for an operator I/O device.
E. Each HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall continuously perform

self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all components. The HVAC
Mechanical Equipment Controller shall provide both local and remote annunciation of
any detected component failures, low battery conditions or repeated failure to establish
communication.
F. Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer network terminations, as well as all field
point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with:
• RF-Conducted Immunity (RFCI) per ENV 50141 (IEC 1000-4-6) at 3 V
• Electro Static Discharge (ESD) Immunity per EN 61000-4-2 (IEC 1000-
4-2) at 8 kV air discharge, 4 kV contact
• Electrical Fast Transient (EFT) per EN 61000-4-4 (IEC 1000-4-4) at 500
V signal, 1 kV power
• Output Circuit Transients per UL 864 (2,400V, 10A, 1.2 Joule max)
Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer panel's AC input terminals to sup-
press induced voltage transients consistent with:
• EEE Standard 587-1980

• UL 864 Supply Line Transients
• Voltage Sags, Surge, and Dropout per EN 61000-4-11 (EN 1000-4-11)
G. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all HVAC
Mechanical Equipment Controllers to prevent the loss of database or operating system
software. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configura-
tion data and battery backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all vola-
tile memory for a minimum of 72 hours.
1. Upon restoration of normal power, the HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller

shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention.
2. Should HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller memory be lost for any reason,
the user shall have the capability of reloading the HVAC Mechanical Equipment
Controller via the local RS-232C port, via telephone line dial-in or from a net-
work workstation PC.
2.9 DDC & HVAC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER RESIDENT SOFTWARE

FEATURES
A. General:
1. The software programs specified in this Section shall be provided as an integral

part of DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers and shall not be de-
pendent upon any higher level computer for execution.
2. All points shall be identified by up to 30 character point name and 16 character-

point descriptor. The same names shall be used at the PC workstation.
3. All digital points shall have user defined two-state status indication
(descriptors with minimum of 8 characters allowed per state (i.e.
summer/winter)).
B. Control Software Description:
1. The DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall have the ability to
perform the following pre-tested control algorithms:
a. Two-position control
b. Proportional control
c. Proportional plus integral control
d. Proportional, integral, plus derivative control

e. Automatic tuning of control loops
C. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall provide the following energy
management routines for the purpose of optimizing energy consumption while maintain-
ing occupant comfort.
1. Start-Stop Time Optimization (SSTO) shall automatically be coordinated with

event scheduling. The SSTO program shall start HVAC equipment at the latest
possible time that will allow the equipment to achieve the desired zone condition
by time of occupancy. The SSTO program shall also shut down HVAC equip-
ment at the earliest possible time before the end of the occupancy period, and still
maintain desired comfort conditions.
a) The SSTO program shall operate in both the heating and cooling seasons.
1) It shall be possible to apply the SSTO program to individual fan

systems.
2) The SSTO program shall operate on both outside weather condi-
tions as well as inside zone conditions and empirical factors.
b) The SSTO program shall meet the local code requirements for minimum
outside air while the building is occupied.
2. Event Scheduling: Provide a comprehensive menu driven program to automati-

cally start and stop designated points or groups of points according to a stored
time.
a) It shall be possible to individually command a point or group of points.
b) For points assigned to one common load group, it shall be possible to as-
sign variable time delays between each successive start or stop within
that group.
c) The operator shall be able to define the following information:
1. Time, day
2. Commands such as on, off, auto, and so forth.
3. Time delays between successive commands.
4. There shall be provisions for manual overriding of each schedule
by an appropriate operator.
d) It shall be possible to schedule events up to one year in advance.
1. Scheduling shall be calendar based.

2. Holidays shall allow for different schedules.
3. Enthalpy switchover (economizer) .The Energy Management Control Software

(EMCS) will control the position of the air handler relief, return, and outside air
dampers. If the outside air dry bulb temperature falls below changeover set point

the EMCS will modulate the dampers to provide 100 percent outside air. The us-
er will be able to quickly changeover to an economizer system based on dry bulb
temperature and will be able to override the economizer cycle and return to min-
imum outside air operation at any time.
4. Temperature-compensated duty cycling.
a) The DCCP (Duty Cycle Control Program) shall periodically stop and
start loads according to various patterns.
b) The loads shall be cycled such that there is a net reduction in both the
electrical demands and the energy consumed.
5. Automatic Daylight Savings Time Switchover: The system shall provide auto-
matic time adjustment for switching to/from Daylight Savings Time.
6. Night setback control: The system shall provide the ability to automatically ad-
just setpoints for night control.
D. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall be able to execute custom,
job-specific processes defined by the user, to automatically perform calculations and spe-
cial control routines.
1. A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from

any and all other DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers on the
network. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points
in any and all other DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers on the
network. Database shall support 30 character, English language point names,
structured for searching and logs.
2. Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories to operator

I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to a specified de-
vice or cause the execution of a dial-up connection to a remote device such as a
printer or pager.
3. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall provide a HELP func-
tion key, providing enhanced context sensitive on-line help with task orientated
information from the user manual.
4. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall be capable of comment

lines for sequence of operation explanation.
E. Alarm management shall be provided to monitor and direct alarm information to operator
devices. Each DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall perform distri-
buted, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to
non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic and prevent alarms from being lost. At no
time shall the DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers ability to report

alarms be affected by either operator or activity at a PC workstation, local I/O device or
communications with other panels on the network.
1. All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English language de-
scription and the time and date of occurrence.
2. The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point.
Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator
response to critical alarms. A minimum of six priority levels shall be provided
for each point. Point priority levels shall be combined with user definable desti-
nation categories (PC, printer, DDC Controller, etc.) to provide full flexibility in
defining the handling of system alarms. Each DDC and HVAC Mechanical
Equipment Controller shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms
during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have the ability to manually
inhibit alarm reporting for each point.
3. Alarm reports and messages will be directed to a user-defined list of operator de-
vices or PCs based on time (after hours destinations) or based on priority.
4. In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able to
print, display or store a 200 character alarm message to more fully describe the
alarm condition or direct operator response.
5. In dial-up applications, operator-selected alarms shall initiate a call to a remote

operator device.
F. A variety of historical data collection utilities shall be provided to manually or automati-

cally sample, store and display system data for points as specified in the I/O summary.
1. Any point, physical or calculated may be designated for trending. Any point, re-
gardless of physical location in the network, may be collected and stored in each
DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers point group. Two methods
of collection shall be allowed: either by a pre-defined time interval or upon a
pre-defined change of value. Sample intervals of l minute to 7 days shall be pro-
vided. Each DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall have a
dedicated RAM-based buffer for trend data and shall be capable of storing a min-
imum of __ data samples. All trend data shall be available for transfer to a
Workstation without manual intervention.
2. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall also provide high
resolution sampling capability for verification of control loop performance. Op-
erator-initiated automatic and manual loop tuning algorithms shall be provided
for operator-selected PID control loops as identified in the point I/O summary.
a. Loop tuning shall be capable of being initiated either locally at the DDC
and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller, from a network worksta-
tion or remotely using dial-in modems. For all loop tuning functions,

access shall be limited to authorized personnel through password protec-
tion.
G. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall be capable of automatically

accumulating and storing run-time hours for digital input and output points and automati-
cally sample, calculate and store consumption totals for analog and digital pulse input
type points, as specified in the point I/O schedule.
H. The peer to peer network shall allow the DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers
to access any data from or send control commands and alarm reports directly to any other
DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller or combination of controllers on the
network without dependence upon a central or intermediate processing device. DDC and
HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall send alarm reports to multiple worksta-
tion without dependence upon a central or intermediate processing device. The peer to
peer network shall also allow any DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller to
access, edit, modify, add, delete, back up, and restore all system point database and all
programs.
I. The peer to peer network shall allow the DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers
to assign a minimum of 50 passwords access and control priorities to each point indivi-
dually. The logon password (at any PC workstation or portable operator terminal) shall
enable the operator to monitor, adjust and control the points that the operator is autho-
rized for. All other points shall not be displayed on the PC workstation or portable ter-
minal (e.g. all base building and all tenant points shall be accessible to any base building
operators, but only tenant points shall be accessible to tenant building operators). Pass-
words and priorities for every point shall be fully programmable and adjustable.
2.10 FLOOR LEVEL NETWORK APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS (ASC)
A. Each DDC Controller shall be able to extend its performance and capacity through the
use of remote application specific controllers (ASCs) through Floor Level LAN Device
Networks.
B. Each ASC shall operate as a stand-alone controller capable of performing its specified
control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC
shall be a microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor. Each
ASC shall be capable of control of the terminal device independent of the manufacturer
of the terminal device.
C. Terminal Equipment Controllers:
1. Provide for control of each piece of equipment, including, but not limited to, the
following:
a. Variable Air Volume (VAV) boxes
b. Constant Air Volume (CAV) boxes
c. Fan Powered Terminal Boxes

d. Unit Conditioners
e. Heat Pumps
f. Unit Ventilators
2. Controllers shall include all point inputs and outputs necessary to perform the speci-
fied control sequences. Analog outputs shall be industry standard signals such as 24V
floating control, 3-15 psi pneumatic, 0-10v ,allowing for interface to a variety of
modulating actuators.
3. All controller sequences and operation shall provide closed loop control of the in-
tended application. Closing control loops over the FLN, BLN or MLN is not accept-
able
2.11 WORKSTATION OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. Basic Interface Description
1. Operator workstation interface software shall minimize operator training through

the use of user-friendly and interactive graphical applications, 30-character Eng-
lish language point identification, on-line help, and industry standard Windows
application software. Interface software shall simultaneously communicate with
and share data between any combination of dedicated, modem autodial, and
Ethernet-connected building level networks. The software shall provide, as a
minimum, the following functionality:
a. Real-time graphical viewing and control of the BAS environment

b. Reporting
c. Scheduling and override of building operations
d. Collection and analysis of historical data
b. Point database editing, storage and downloading of controller databases.
c. Utility for combining points into logical Point Groups. The Point Groups
shall then be manipulated in Graphics, trend graphs and reports in order to
streamline the navigation and usability of the system.
f. Alarm reporting, routing, messaging, and acknowledgment
g. “Collapsible tree,” dynamic system architecture diagram application:
- Showing the real-time status and definition details of all workstations
and devices on a management level network
- Showing the real-time status and definition details of all DDC and
HVAC Mechanical Controllers at the building level
- Showing the status and definition details of all field-level application
controllers
h. Definition and construction of dynamic color graphic displays.
i. Online, context-sensitive help, including an index, glossary of terms, and
the capability to search help via keyword or phrase.

j. On-screen access to User Documentation, via online help or PDF-format
electronic file.
k. Automatic database backup at the workstation for database changes in-
itiated at DDC Controller operator interface terminals.
l. Display dynamic trend data graphical plot.
- Must be able to run multiple plots simultaneously
- Each plot must be capable of supporting 10 pts/plot minimum
- Must be able to command points directly off dynamic trend plot ap-
plication.
- Must be able to plot both real-time and historical trend data
m. Program editing
n. Transfer trend data to 3rd party spreadsheet software
j. Scheduling reports
k. Operator Activity Log
1. Provide a graphical user interface that shall minimize the use of keyboard through the
use of a mouse or similar pointing device, with a "point and click" approach to menu se-
lection and a “drag and drop” approach to inter-application navigation. Selection of ap-
plications within the workstation software shall be via a graphical toolbar menu – the ap-
plication toolbar menu shall have the option to be located in a docked position on any of
the four sides of the visible desktop space on the workstation display monitor, and the op-
tion to automatically hide itself from the visible monitor workspace when not being ac-
tively manipulated by the user.
2. The software shall provide a multi-tasking type environment that allows the user to
run several applications simultaneously. BAS software shall run on a Windows XP, 2000
or NT 32 bit operating system. System database parameters shall be stored within an ob-
ject-oriented database, which is compliant with the Open Database Connectivity (ODBC)
or Structured Query Language (SQL) standards. Standard Windows applications shall
run simultaneously with the BAS software. The mouse or Alt-Tab keys shall be used to
quickly select and switch between multiple applications. The operator shall be able to
work in Microsoft Word, Excel, and other Windows based software packages, while con-
currently annunciating on-line BAS alarms and monitoring information
a. Provide functionality such that any of the following may be performed

simultaneously on-line, and in any combination, via adjustable user-sized
windows. Operator shall be able to drag and drop information between
the following applications, reducing the number of steps to perform a de-
sired function (e.g., Click on a point on the alarm screen and drag it to
the dynamic trend graph application to initiate a dynamic trend on the
desired point):
1. Dynamic color graphics application

2. Alarm management application
3. Scheduling application

4. Dynamic trend graph data plotter application
5. Dynamic system architecture diagram application
6. Control Program and Point database editing applications
7. Reporting applications
b. Report and alarm printing shall be accomplished via Windows Print

Manager, allowing use of network printers.
4. Operator-specific password access protection shall be provided to allow the ad-

ministrator/manager to limit users’ workstation control, display and data base
manipulation capabilities as deemed appropriate for each user, based upon an as-
signed password. Operator privileges shall "follow" the operator to any worksta-
tion logged onto (up to 999 user accounts shall be supported). The administra-
tor/manager shall be able to grant discrete levels of access and privileges, per us-
er, for each point, graphic, report, schedule, and BAS workstation application.
And each BAS workstation user account shall use a Windows 2000/NT user ac-
count as a foundation.
a. The workstation software shall also include an application to track the

actions of each individual operator, such as alarm acknowledgement,
point commanding, schedule overriding, database editing, and lo-
gon/logoff. The application shall list each of the actions in a tabular
format, and shall have sorting capabilities based on parameters such as
ascending or descending time of the action, or name of the object on
which the action was performed. The application shall also allow query-
ing based on object name, operator, action, or time range.
5. Dynamic Color Graphics application shall include the following:
a. Must include graphic editing and modifying capabilities

b. A library of standard control application graphics and symbols must be in-
cluded
c. Must be able to command points directly off graphics application
d. Graphic display shall include the ability to depict real-time point values dy-
namically with animation, picture/frame control, symbol association, or dy-
namic informational text-blocks
e. Navigation through various graphic screens shall be optionally achieved
through a hierarchical “tree” structure
f. Graphics viewing shall include zoom capabilities
g. Advanced linking within the Graphics application shall provide the ability to
navigate to outside documents (e.g., .doc, .pdf, .xls, etc.), internet web ad-
dresses, e-mail, external programs, and other workstation applications, di-
rectly from the Graphics application window with a mouse-click on a custo-
mizable link symbol.
6. Reports shall be generated on demand or via pre-defined schedule, and directed

to CRT displays, printers or file. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user
to easily obtain the following types of reports:
a. A general listing of all or selected points in the network

b. List of all points currently in alarm
c. List of all points currently in override status
d. List of all disabled points
e. List of all points currently locked out
f. List of user accounts and access levels
g. List all weekly schedules and events
h. List of holiday programming
i. List of control limits and deadbands
j. Custom reports from 3rd party software
k. System diagnostic reports including, list of DDC panels on line and
communicating, status of all DDC terminal unit device points
l. List of programs
m. List of point definitions
n. List of logical point groups
o. List of alarm strategy definitions
p. List of DDC Control panels
q. Point totalization report
r. Point Trend data listings
s. Initial Values report
t. User activity report
7. Scheduling and override
Provide a calendar type format for simplification of time and date scheduling and
overrides of building operations. Schedule definitions reside in the PC worksta-
tion, DDC Controller, and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller to ensure
time equipment scheduling when PC is off-line -- PC is not required to execute
time scheduling. Provide override access through menu selection, graphical
mouse action or function key. Provide the following capabilities as a minimum:
a. Weekly schedules
b. Zone schedules
c. Event schedules – an event consists of logical combinations of equip-
ment and/or zones
d. Report schedules
e. Ability to schedule for a minimum of up to 365 days in advance
Additionally, the scheduling application shall:
a. Provide filtering capabilities of schedules, based on name, time, fre-

quency, and schedule type (event, zone, report)
b. Provide sorting capabilities of schedules, based on name, time and type
of schedule (zone, event, report)
c. Provide searching capabilities of schedules based on name – with wild-
carding options
8. Collection and Analysis of Historical Data

a. Provide trending capabilities that allow the user to easily monitor and
preserve records of system activity over an extended period of time. Any
system point may be trended automatically at time-based intervals (up to
four time-based definitions per point) or change of value, both of which
shall be user-definable. Trend data shall be collected stored on hard disk
for future diagnostics and reporting. Automatic Trend collection may be
scheduled at regular intervals through the same scheduling interface as
used for scheduling of zones, events, and reports. Additionally, trend da-
ta may be archived to network drives or removable disk media for future
retrieval.
b. Trend data reports shall be provided to allow the user to view all trended
point data. Reports may be customized to include individual points or
predefined groups of selected points. Provide additional functionality to
allow predefined groups of up to 250 trended points to be easily trans-
ferred on-line to Microsoft Excel. DDC contractor shall provide custom
designed spreadsheet reports for use by the owner to track energy usage
and cost, equipment run times, equipment efficiency, and/or building en-
vironmental conditions. DDC contractor shall provide setup of custom
reports including creation of data format templates for monthly or week-
ly reports.
c. Provide additional functionality that allows the user to view real-time

trend data on trend graphical plot displays. A minimum of ten points
may be plotted, of either real-time or historical data. The dynamic
graphs shall continuously update point values. At any time the user may
redefine sampling times or range scales for any point. In addition, the
user may pause the graph and take "snapshots" of plot screens to be
stored on the workstation disk for future recall and analysis. Exact point
values may be viewed and the graphs may be printed. A minimum of 8
true graphs shall run simultaneously. Operator shall be able to command
points directly on the trend plot by double clicking on the point. Opera-
tor shall be able to zoom in on a specific time range within a plot. The
dynamic trend plotting application shall support the following types of
graphs, with option to graph in 3D: line graph, area graph, curve graph,
area-curve graph, step graph, and scatter graph. Each graph may be cus-
tomized by the user, for graph type, graph text, titles, line styles and
weight, colors, and configurable x- and y-axes.
B. Dynamic Color Graphic Displays
1. Create color graphic floor plan displays and system schematics for each piece of
mechanical equipment, including air handling units, chilled water systems and
hot water boiler systems, and room level terminal units, shall be provided by the
BAS contractor as indicated in the point I/O schedule of this specification to op-
timize system performance, analysis and speed alarm recognition.
2. The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics
and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection, point alarm

association, or text-based commands. Graphics software shall permit the import-
ing of Autocad or scanned pictures for use in the system.
3. Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values and status indication
shall be shown in their actual respective locations within the system schematics
or graphic floor plan displays, and shall automatically update to represent current
conditions without operator intervention and without pre-defined screen refresh
rates.
a. Provide the user the ability to display real-time point values by animated mo-
tion or custom picture control visual representation. Animation shall depict
movement of mechanical equipment, or air or fluid flow. Picture Control
shall depict various positions in relation to assigned point values or ranges.
A library (set) of animation and picture control symbols shall be included
within the workstation software’s graphics application. Animation shall re-
flect, ON or OFF conditions, and shall also be optionally configurable for up
to five rates of animation speed.
b. Sizable analog bars shall be available for monitor and control of analog val-
ues; high and low alarm limit settings shall be displayed on the analog scale.
The user shall be able to "click and drag" the pointer to change the setpoint.
c. Provide the user the ability to display blocks of point data by defined point
groups; alarm conditions shall be displayed by flashing point blocks.
d. Equipment state or values can be changed by clicking on the associated point

block or graphic symbol and selecting the new state (on/off) or setpoint.
e. State text for digital points can be user-defined up to eight characters.
4. Colors shall be used to indicate status and change as the status of the equipment
changes. The state colors shall be user definable.
5. Advanced linking within the Graphics application shall provide the ability to na-
vigate to outside documents (e.g., .doc, .pdf, .xls, etc.), internet web addresses, e-
mail, external programs, and other workstation applications, directly from the
Graphics application window with a mouse-click on a customizable link symbol.
6. The windowing environment of the PC operator workstation shall allow the user
to simultaneously view several applications at a time to analyze total building
operation or to allow the display of a graphic associated with an alarm to be
viewed without interrupting work in progress.
7. A clipart library of HVAC application and automation symbols shall be provided

including fans, valves, motors, chillers, AHU systems, standard ductwork dia-
grams and laboratory symbols. The user shall have the ability to add custom
symbols to the clipart library. The clipart library shall include a minimum of 400
application symbols. In addition, a library consisting of a minimum of 700
graphic background templates shall be provided.

8. The Graphics application shall include a set of standard Terminal Equipment
controller application-specific background graphic templates. Templates shall
provide the automatic display of a selected Terminal Equipment controller’s con-
trol values and parameters, without the need to create separate and individual
graphic files for each controller.
9. A hierarchy of graphics that allow an operator viewing a site map to see the gen-
eral location of alarm activity on the system shall be created. By selecting the
highlighted area, an operator shall be able to “drill-down” repeatedly to the next
most specific graphic, until the exact area of incident is displayed.
10. When adding a new point to a graphic all higher level graphics on the hierarchy,
the location of the new point shall be automatically associated with the location
of the new point, such that graphics higher up the hierarchy do not have to be
modified or resaved in order to associate them with the new point.
C. System Configuration & Definition
1. A“ Collapsible tree,” dynamic system architecture diagram/display application of

the site-specific BAS architecture showing status of controllers, PC workstations
and networks shall be provided. This application shall include the ability to add
and configure workstations, DDC Controllers or HVAC Mechanical Equipment
controllers, as well as 3rd-party integrated components. Symbols/Icons
representing the system architecture components shall be user-configurable and
customizable, and a library of customized icons representing 3rd-party integration
solutions shall be included. This application shall also include the functionality
for real-time display, configuration and diagnostics of dial-up modems to DDC
Controllers.
2. Network wide control strategies shall not be restricted to a single DDC Controller
or HVAC Mechanical Equipment controller, but shall be able to include data
from any and all other network panels to allow the development of Global con-
trol strategies.
3. Provide automatic backup and restore of all DDC controller and HVAC Mechan-
ical Equipment controller databases on the workstation hard disk. In addition, all
database changes shall be performed while the workstation is on-line without dis-
rupting other system operations. Changes shall be automatically recorded and
downloaded to the appropriate DDC Controller or HVAC Mechanical Equipment
Controller. Changes made at the user-interface of DDC Controllers or HVAC
Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall be automatically uploaded to the
workstation, ensuring system continuity.
4. System configuration, programming, editing, graphics generation shall be per-

formed on-line. If programming and system back-up must be done with the PC
workstation off-line, the BAS contractor shall provide at least 2 operator
workstations.

5. Point database configuration shall be available to the user within a dedicated
point database editor application included in the workstation software. The edi-
tor shall allow the user to create, view existing, modify, copy, and delete points
from the database. The point editor shall also allow the user to configure the
alarm management strategy for each point. The editor shall provide the option
for editing the point database in an online or offline mode with the DDC Control-
lers.
a. The workstation software shall also provide the capability to perform

bulk modification of point definition attributes to a single or multiple us-
er-selected points. This function shall allow the user to choose the prop-
erties to copy from a selected point to another point or set of points. The
selectable attributes shall include, but are not limited to, Alarm manage-
ment definitions and Trend definitions.
6. Control program configuration shall be available to the user within a dedicated

control program editor application included in the workstation software. The edi-
tor shall allow for creation, modification and deletion of control programs. The
editor shall include a programming assistance feature that interactively guides the
user through parameters required to generate a control program. The editor shall
also include the ability to automatically compile the program to ensure its compa-
tibility with the DDC Controllers. The editor shall provide the option for editing
the control programs in an online or offline mode, and also the ability to selec-
tively enable or disable the live program execution within the DDC Controllers.
D. Alarm Management
1. Alarm Routing shall allow the user to send alarm notification to selected printers or
workstation location(s) based on time of day, alarm severity, or point type.
2. Alarm Notification shall be presented to each workstation in a tabular format applica-

tion, and shall include the following information for each alarm point: name, value,
alarm time & date, alarm status, priority, acknowledgement information, and alarm
count. Each alarm point or priority shall have the ability to sound a discrete audible
notification.
3. Alarm Display shall have the ability to list & sort the alarms based on alarm status,
point name, ascending or descending alarm time.
4. Directly from the Alarm Display, the user shall have the ability to acknowledge, si-
lence the alarm sound, print, or erase each alarm. The interface shall also have the
option to inhibit the erasing of active acknowledged alarms, until they have returned
to normal status. The user shall also have the ability to command, launch an asso-
ciated graphic or trended graphical plot, or run a report on a selected alarm point di-
rectly on the Alarm Display.
5. Each alarm point shall have a direct link from the Alarm Display to further user-
defined point informational data. The user shall have the ability to also associate
real-time electronic annotations or notes to each alarm.

6. Alarm messages shall be customizable for each point, or each alarm priority level, to
display detailed instructions to the user regarding actions to take in the event of an
alarm. Alarm messages shall also have the optional ability to individually enunciate
on the workstation display via a separate pop-up window, automatically being gener-
ated as the associated alarm condition occurs.
7. Alarm Display application shall allow workstation operators to send and receive real-
time messages to each other, for purposes of coordinating Alarm and BAS system
management.
8. Remote notification of messages

a. Workstation shall be configured to send out messages to numeric pagers, alpha-
numeric pagers, SMS (Simple Messaging Service, text messaging) Devices, and
email accounts based on a point’s alarm condition.
b. There shall be no limit to the number of points that can be configured for remote
notification of alarm conditions and no limit on the number of remote devices
which can receive messages from the system.
c. On a per point basis, system shall be configurable to send messages to an indi-
vidual or group and shall be configurable to send different messages to different
remote devices based on alarm message priority level.
d. Remote devices may be scheduled as to when they receive messages from the
system to account for operators’ work schedules.
e. System must be configurable to send messages to an escalation list so that if the
first device does not respond, the message is sent on to the next device after a
configurable time has elapsed.
f. Message detail shall be configurable on a per user basis.
g. Workstation shall have a feature to send a heartbeat message to periodically noti-
fy users that they have communication with the system.
9. Alarm segregation
a. At the user interface, alarms shall be segregated into separate categories depend-
ing on their usage. There shall be separate tabs on the alarm display that segre-
gate fire, security, and building automation events.
10. Always visible non-obtrusive alarm display
a. An alarm display must be active and visible to the operator at all times, regard-
less of what other workstation applications the operator is involved in.
b. This display shall provide an overview of the system status including fire, securi-
ty, and building automation events.
c. This display shall display a textual description of the highest priority event on the
system as well the point status and indication of when the point last changed
state.
d. This display shall indicate whether the highest priority event has been acknowl-
edged.
e. When a new alarm is received at a workstation, the operator shall be informed of
the new event through an audible and visual notification without application fo-

cus being drawn away from the application that the operator is currently working
with.
11. Acknowledgement
a. Operators shall be allowed to acknowledge events in any order, regardless of

their priority, or which system (fire, security, automation) they reside on.
b. The interface shall clearly display whether a point has been acknowledged
and who it was acknowledged by.
c. When a point has gone in and out of trouble repeatedly, an operator shall be
permitted to acknowledge every change of state in a single operation rather than
having to explicitly acknowledge every change of state.
2.12 FIELD DEVICES
A. Provide instrumentation as required for monitoring, control or optimization functions.

All devices and equipment shall be approved for installation Prince Georges Community
College.
B. Room Temperature Sensors

1) Digital room sensors shall have blank cover with no setpoints adjustment as sen-
sor button, and setpoint slide adjustment override options. The setpoint adjust-
ment is by the automation system
Temperature monitoring range +20/120°F -13° to 49°C)

Output signal Changing resistance
Accuracy at Calibration point +0.5°F (+/- 0.3°C)
Set Point and Display Range 55° to 95° F (13° to 35°C)
2) Liquid immersion temperature:

Temperature monitoring range +30/250°F (-1°/121°C)
Accuracy at Calibration point +0.5°F (+/-0.3°C)
3) Duct (single point) temperature:

Temperature monitoring range +20/120°F (-7°/49°C)
4) Duct Average temperature:

Temperature monitoring range +20° +120°F(-7°/+49°C)
Output signal 4 – 20 mA DC
Accuracy at Calibration point +0.5°F (+03°C)
Sensor Probe Length 25’ L (7.3m)
5) Outside air temperature:

Temperature monitoring range -58°+122° F(-50ºC to +50ºC)
Output signal 4 – 20 mA DC

C. Liquid Differential Pressure Transmitter
Ranges 0-5/30 inches H20

0-25/150 inches H20
0-125/750 inches H20
Output 4 – 20 mA DC
Calibration Adjustments Zero and span
Accuracy +-0.2% of span
Linearity +-0.1% of span
Hysteresis +-0.05% of span
F. Differential pressure:
1. Unit for fluid flow proof shall be Penn P74.

Range 8 to 70 psi
Differential 3 psi
Maximum differential pressure 200 psi
Maximum pressure 325 psi
2. Unit for air flow shall be Siemens Building Technologies SW141.

Set point ranges: 0.5” WG to 1.0” WG (124.4 to 248.8 Pa)
1.0” WG to 12.0” WG (248.8 to 497.6 Pa)
G. Static pressure sensor:

Range 0 to .5” WG (0 to 124.4 Pa)
0 to 1” WG (0 to 248.8 Pa)
0 to 2” WG (0 to 497.7 Pa)
0 to 5” WG (0 to 1.2 kPa
0 to 10” WG (0 to 2.5 kPa)
Output Signal 4 – 20 mA VDC
Combined static error 0.5% full range
Operating Temperature -40º to 175º F (-40C to 79.5ºC)
F. Air Pressure Sensor:

Range: 0 to 0.1 in. water (0 to 24.9 Pa)
0 to 0.25 in. water (0 to 63.2 Pa)
0 to 0.5 in. water (0 to 124.5 Pa)
0 to 1.0 in. water (o to 249 Pa)
0 to 2.0 in water 90 to 498 Pa)
0 to 5.0 in. water (0 to 1.25 kPa)
0 to 10.0 in.water (0 to 2.49 kPa)
Output signal 4 to 20 mA
Accuracy +1.0% of full scale

G. Humidity Sensors:
Range 0 to 100% RH
Sensing Element Bulk Polymer
Output Signal 4 – 20 mA DC
Accuracy At 77°F(25ºC) + 2% RH
H. Insertion Flow Meters (Equal to Onicon Series F-1200)
Sensing Method Impedance Sensing

Accuracy + 2% of Actual Reading
Maximum Operating Pressure 400 PSI
Output Signal 4 – 20 mA
Bi-directional where required.
I. Pressure to Current Transducer

Range 3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa) or
3 to 30 psig (21 to 207 kPa)
Output signal 4 – 20 mA
Accuracy + 1% of full scale (+ 0.3 psig)
J. Control Valves (all control valves shall have electric actuators).
1. Electric Control
Rangeability 40:1
Flow Characteristics Modified. Equal percentage
Control Action Normal open or closed as selected
Medium Steam, water, glycol
Body Type Screwed ends 2” and smaller, flanged
Valves 2½” and larger
Body Material Bronze
Body Trim Bronze
Stem Stainless Steel
Actuator 0-10 VDC, 4-20 MA or 2 position
24 VAC/120VAC
2. All automatic temperature control valves in water lines shall be provided with
Characterized throttling plugs and shall be sized for minimum 25% of the system
pressure drop or 5 psi, whichever is less.
a) Positive positioning relays shall be provided on pneumatic control when re-

quired to provide sufficient power for sequencing.
b) Two position valves shall be line size.

K . Damper Actuators
1. Electric control shall be direct coupled actuators.
2. Damper actuators shall be Brushless DC Motor Technology with stall

protection, bi-directional, fail safe spring return, all metal housing, manual
override, independently adjustable dual auxiliary switch.
a) The actuator assembly shall include the necessary hardware and proper
mounting and connection to a standard diameter shaft or damper blade.
3. Actuators shall be designed for mounting directly to the damper shaft

without the need for connecting linkages.
4. All actuators having more than 100 lb-in torque output shall have a self-
centering damper shaft clamp that guarantees concentric alignment of the
actuator’s output coupling with the damper shaft. The self-centering
clamp shall have a pair of opposed “v” shaped toothed cradles; each hav-
ing two rows of teeth to maximize holding strength. A single clamping
bolt shall simultaneously drive both cradles into contact with the damper
shaft.
5. All actuators having more than a 100 lb-in torque output shall accept a
1” diameter shaft directly, without the need for auxiliary adapters.
6. All actuators shall be designed and manufactured using

ISO900registered procedures, and shall be Listed under Standards UL873
and CSA22.2 No. 24-93
2.13 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES
A. Thermostats
1. Thermostats shall be of the gradual acting type with adjustable sensitivity.
2. They shall have a bi-metal sensing element capable of responding to a
temperature change of one-tenth of one degree. (Provide all thermostats
with limit stops to limit adjustments as required.)
3. Thermostats shall be arranged for either horizontal or vertical mounting.
4. In the vertical position thermostat shall fit on a mullion of movable parti-
tions without overlap.
5. Mount the thermostat covers with tamper-proof socket head screws.
6. Guest room thermostats shall be “Inncom” DDC type.
B. Freezestats:

1. Install freezestats as indicated on the plans and provide protection for
every square foot of coil surface area with one linear foot of element per
square foot of coil.
a) Upon detection of low temperature, the freezestats shall stop the

associated supply fans and return the automatic dampers to their
normal position. Provide manual reset.
C. Firestats:
1. Provide manual reset, fixed temperature line voltage type with a bi-metal
actuated switch.
a) Switch shall have adequate rating for required load.
D. Electronic Airflow Measurement Stations and Transmitters (At Duct Locations).
1. Stations – each insertion station shall contain an array of velocity sensing

elements and straightening vanes. The velocity sensing elements shall be
of the RTD or thermistor type. The sensing elements shall be distributed
across the duct cross section in a quality to provide accurate readings. The
resistance to airflow through the airflow measurement station shall not ex-
ceed 0.08 inches water gage at an airflow of 2,000 fpm. Station construc-
tion shall be suitable for operation at airflow of up to 5,000 fpm over a
temperature range of 40 to 120 degrees F, and accuracy shall be plus or
minus 3 percent over a range of 125 to 2,500 fpm scaled to air volume.
Each transmitter shall produce a linear, temperature compensated 4 to 20
mA DC, output corresponding to the required velocity pressure measure-
ment.
E. Fan Inlet Airflow Measuring Station
1. Each station shall contain parallel air straightener, total and static pressure
sensing manifolds, internal piping and external pressure transmission ports
with flexible tubing and quick-connect fittings. Fabricate of galvanized
steel, size for fan inlet in which mounted. Maximum pressure loss through
station of 0.08 inches water gage at 1500 fpm. Station shall have accuracy
of 2%. Identify by model number, size, area, and specified airflow capaci-
ty.
F. Current Sensing Relay:
1. Provide solid-state, adjustable, current operated relay. Provide a relay

which changes switch contact state in response to an adjustable set point
value of current in the monitored A/C circuit.

2. Adjust the relay switch point so that the relay responds to motor operation
under load as an “on” state and so that the relay responds to an unloaded
running motor as an “off” state. A motor with a broken belt is considered
an unloaded motor.
3. Provide for status device for all fans and pumps.
4. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external pow-
er.
5. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second.
6. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current
(4 to 20 mA), or resistance signals.
7. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable
for normally open or normally closed operation with three-position (on-
off-auto) override switches and status lights.
8. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-
V dc) or current (4 to 20 mA) with status lights, two-position (auto-
manual) switch, and manually adjustable potentiometer.
9. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of
three-point, floating-type electronic actuators.
10. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.
G. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent

protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall
match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the
following:
1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.

2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for
50 percent load changes.
3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150
percent overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.
H. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for
workstations or controllers with the following:
1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V.

2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds.
3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB.
4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Conditioned power is not available on most projects; confirm its availability.

B. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator workstation.
C. Verify that pneumatic piping and duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices are installed
before proceeding with installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of
programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.
B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.
D. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings
and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above the floor.
1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.
E. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:
1. Entrances.
2. Public areas.
3. Where indicated.
F. Install automatic dampers according to Division 15 Section “Duct Accessories.”
G. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor
temperatures.
H. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15 Section
"Mechanical Identification."
I. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15 Section
"Hydronic Piping."
K. Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15
Section "Refrigerant Piping."
L. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 15 Sections specifying air ducts.
M. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 16 Section "Voice and Data
Communication Cabling."
3.3 START-UP AND COMMISSIONING
A. When installation of the system is complete, calibrate equipment and verify transmission
media operation before the system is placed on-line. All testing, calibrating, adjusting
and final field tests shall be completed by the manufacturer. Verify that all systems are
operable from local controls in the specified failure mode upon panel failure or loss of
power. Coordinate with testing/balancing contractor.

B. Provide any recommendation for system modification in writing to Architect. Do not
make any system modification, including operating parameters and control settings,
without prior approval of Architect.
C. After manufacturer has completed system start-up and commissioning. Joint commission-
ing of integrated system segments shall be completed.
3.4 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND MATERIALS
A. Install, connect and wire the items included under this Section. This work includes provid-
ing required conduit, wire, fittings, and related wiring accessories. All wiring shall be in-
stalled in conduit.
B. Provide wiring between thermostats, aquastats and unit heater motors, all control and alarm
wiring for all control and alarm devices for all Sections of Specifications.
C. Provide 120 volt, single phase, 60 hertz emergency power to every BAS DDC Controller
panel, HVAC/Mechanical Equipment Controller, PC console, power supply, transformer, an-
nunciator, modems, printers and to other devices as required. It is the intent that the entire
building management system except terminal equipment shall be operative under emergency
power conditions in the building. The power supplies are to be extended in conduit and wire
from emergency circuit breakers.
D. Provide status function conduit and wiring for equipment covered under this Section.
E. Provide conduit and wiring between the BAS panels and the temperature, humidity, or pres-
sure sensing elements, including low voltage control wiring in conduit.
F. Provide conduit and control wiring for devices specified in this Section.
G. Provide conduit and signal wiring between motor starters in motor control centers and high
and/or low temperature relay contacts and remote relays in BAS panels located in the vicini-
ty of motor control centers.
H. Provide conduit and wiring between the PC workstation, electrical panels, metering instru-
mentation, indicating devices, miscellaneous alarm points, remotely operated contractors,
and BAS panels, as shown on the drawings or as specified.
I. All wiring to be compliant to local building code and the NEC.
J. Provide electrical wall box and conduit sleeve for all wall mounted devices.
3.5 PERFORMANCE
A. Unless stated otherwise, control temperatures within plus or minus 2oF, humidity within plus
or minus 3% of the set point, and static pressure within 10% of set point.

3.6 COMMISSIONING, TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Perform a three-phase commissioning procedure consisting of field I/O calibration and

commissioning, system commissioning and integrated system program commissioning.
Document all commissioning information on commissioning data sheets which shall be
submitted prior to acceptance testing. Commissioning work which requires shutdown of sys-
tem or deviation from normal function shall be performed when the operation of the system
is not required. The commissioning must be coordinated with the owner and construction
manager to ensure systems are available when needed. Notify the operating personal in writ-
ing of the testing schedule so that authorized personnel from the owner and construction
manager are present throughout the commissioning procedure.
1. Prior to system program commissioning, verify that each control panel has been in-
stalled according to plans, specifications and approved shop drawings. Test, calibrate
and bring on line each control sensor and device. Commissioning to include, but not
be limited to:
a. Sensor accuracy at 10, 50 and 90% of range.
b. Sensor range.
c. Verify analog limit and binary alarm reporting.
d. Point value reporting.
e. Binary alarm and switch settings.
f. Actuator ranges.
g. Fail safe operation on loss of control signal, electric power, network communi-
cations.
B. After control devices have been commissioned (i.e. calibrated, tested and signed off), each
BAS program shall be put on line and commissioned. The contractor shall, in the presence of
the owner and construction manager, demonstrate each programmed sequence of operation
and compare the results in writing. In addition, each control loop shall be tested to verify
proper response and stable control, within specified accuracy's. System program test results
shall be recorded on commissioning data sheets and submitted for record. Any discrepancies
between the specification and the actual performance will be immediately rectified and re-
tested.
C. After all BAS programs have been commissioned, the contractor shall verify the overall sys-
tem performance as specified. Tests shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Data communication, both normal and failure modes.
2. Fully loaded system response time.
3. Impact of component failures on system performance and system operation.

4. Time/Date changes.
5. End of month/ end of year operation.
6. Season changeover.
7. Global application programs and point sharing.
8. System backup and reloading.
9. System status displays.
10. Diagnostic functions.
11. Power failure routines.
12. Battery backup.
13. Smoke Control, stair pressurization, stair, vents, in concert with Fire Alarm System
testing.
14. Testing of all electrical and HVAC systems with other division of work.
D. Submit for approval, a detailed acceptance test procedure designed to demonstrate com-
pliance with contractual requirements. This Acceptance test procedure will take place after
the commissioning procedure but before final acceptance, to verify that sensors and control
devices maintain specified accuracy's and the system performance does not degrade over
time.
E. Using the commissioning test data sheets, the contractor shall demonstrate each point. The
contractor shall also demonstrate all system functions. The contractor shall demonstrate all
points and system functions until all devices and functions meet specification.
F. The contractor shall supply all instruments for testing and turn over same to the owner after
acceptance testing.
1. All test instruments shall be submitted for approval.
Test Instrument Accuracy:
Temperature: 1/4F or 1/2% full scale, whichever is less.
Pressure: High Pressure (psi): ½ psi or 1/2% full scale, whichever is

less.
Low Pressure: 1/2% of full scale

(in w.c.)
Humidity: 2% RH

Electrical: 1/4% full scale
G. After the above tests are complete and the system is demonstrated to be functioning as speci-
fied, a thirty day performance test period shall begin. If the system performs as specified
throughout the test period, requiring only routine maintenance, the system shall be accepted. If
the system fails during the test, and cannot be fully corrected within eight hours, the owner may
request that performance tests be repeated.
3.7 TRAINING
A. The manufacturer shall provide factory trained instructor to give full instruction to desig-
nated personnel in the operation of the system installed. Instructors shall be thoroughly
familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach. The manufacturer shall
provide all students with a student binder containing product specific training modules
for the system installed. All training shall be held during normal working hours of 8:00
am to 4:30 PM weekdays.
B. Provide 80 hours of training for Owner's designated operating personnel. Training shall
include:
Explanation of drawings, operations and maintenance manuals

Walk-through of the job to locate control components
Operator workstation and peripherals
DDC controller and ASC operation/function
Operator control functions including graphic generation and field panel pro-
gramming
Operation of portable operator's terminal
Explanation of adjustment, calibration and replacement procedures
Student binder with training modules
D. Since the Owner may require personnel to have more comprehensive understanding of
the hardware and software, additional training must be available from the Manufacturer.
If such training is required by the Owner, it will be contracted at a later date.

SECTION 15940
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.
1. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control equipment and
devices and for submittal requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct digital control.
B. VAV: Variable air volume.
1.4 CONTROL SEQUENCES
A. Constant Volume AHU w/HC, CC, &, RHC.
The constant volume air handling unit consists of a mixed air section with outdoor air and return
air dampers, pre-filter, hot water heating coil, chilled water cooling coil, reheat coil (AHU-1 only)
and supply fan. The unit is DDC controlled using electric actuation.
The air handling unit is scheduled for automatic operation on a time of day basis for Occupied
and Unoccupied modes. Within the Occupied mode, the system can enter the Warm-Up mode
when the space temperature is below setpoint or the Cool-Down mode when the space tempera-
ture is above set point. The system stays in the Warm-Up or Cool-Down mode until the mode
setpoint is satisfied. Within the Unoccupied mode, Night Heating is available when the space
temperature drops below 65 degrees F (18 degrees C). The latest start time is the scheduled oc-
cupancy for the space.
The air handling unit operates in Warm-Up, Cool-Down, Occupied, Unoccupied, Night Heating
and Safety modes as follows (All suggested setpoints and settings are adjustable.):

Allen & Shariff Engineering SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Warm-Up:
The supply and return fan starts, the mixing dampers are positioned for 100% return air and the
cooling coil valve remains closed. The heating coil valve modulates to maintain the supply air
temperature setpoint. If time reaches the latest start time during the Warm-Up mode, the outdoor
air damper opens to its minimum position. The system is prevented from entering the Warm-Up
mode more than once per day.
Cool-Down:
The supply fan starts and the heating coil valve remains closed. The cooling coil valve and the
mixing dampers modulate to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint. When the outside air
enthalpy is above the economizer changeover value, the mixing dampers are positioned for 100%
return air. If time reaches the latest start time during the Cool-Down mode, the outdoor air dam-
per opens to its minimum position or is controlled in economizer operation. The system is pre-
vented from entering the Cool-Down mode more than once per day. Return air enthalpy shall be
compared with a global outside enthalpy sensor.
Occupied:
The supply air temperature setpoint is reset based on the room temperature setpoint or discharge
temperature sensor.
The fans starts or continues to run and the unit is controlled as follows:
When the outside air enthalpy is below the economizer changeover value, the heating coil valve,
cooling coil valve and mixed air dampers modulate in sequence without overlap to maintain the
supply air temperature setpoint with a low limit of 48 degrees F (9 degrees C) at the mixed air
sensor. The mixing dampers ramp open slowly to minimize overshooting.
When the outside air enthalpy is above the economizer changeover value, the mixing dampers are
placed in the minimum outdoor air position. The heating coil valve and cooling coil valve mod-
ulate in sequence without overlap to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint.
Unoccupied (Normal Off):

The fans stops, the cooling coil valve closes and the mixing dampers close to the outdoor air. If
the OAT is less than 45 degrees F (7 degrees C), the heating coil valve modulates to maintain the
unoccupied supply air setpoint. If the OAT is 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) or above, the heating
coil valve closes.
Night Heating:
The supply fan starts with the heating coil valve open to maintain a minimum space temperature
of 65 degrees F (18 degrees C). The cooling coil valve is closed and the mixing dampers close to
the outdoor air.
Safety:
Smoke detectors in the supply and return air streams de-energize the supply fan upon activation.
When the OAT is less than 45 degrees F (7 degrees C), the heating coil valve modulates to main-
tain the mixed air temperature at 45 degrees F (7 degrees C). When the OAT is 45 degrees F (7
degrees C) or above, the heating coil valve closes. All other dampers and valves position to their
normal position after the fan is de-energized.

A low temperature detector in the discharge of the heating coil and hard wired de-energizes the
supply fan when temperatures below 38 degrees F (3 degrees C) are sensed. The heating coil
valve modulates to maintain the mixed air temperature at 45 degrees F (7 degrees C). All other
dampers and valves position to their normal position after the fans are de-energized.
Units with freeze protection pumps shall energize pump.
A current switch is installed in the supply fan starter. The DDC system uses this switch to con-
firm the fan is in the desired state (i.e. on or off) and generates an alarm if status deviates from
DDC start/stop control. High static sensor shall shut-down unit and alarm at BAS.
Humidity Control (AHU-1 only): Space humidistat shall cycle cooling and reheat to maintain
space humidity setpoint of 65% adj. minimum.
Demand Control Ventilation (AHU-1 only): Outside air ventilation shall be controlled via CO 2
sensors. Outside air shall not be controlled below 40% of scheduled CFM.
All suggested setpoints and settings are adjustable.
F. General Exhaust Fans
The space served by the exhaust fan is controlled in Occupied and Unoccupied modes as follows:
Occupied:
The DDC system opens the exhaust damper, if applicable, and turns on the exhaust fan.
Unoccupied:
The exhaust fan is off, and dampers return to normal position.
The DDC system uses a current switch to monitor the exhaust fan status.
G. General Ventilation Fan
The space served by the exhaust/supply fan is controlled as follows:
The DDC system monitors the room temperature sensor. The system opens the outdoor air and
exhaust dampers and cycles the exhaust/supply fan to maintain the space temperature at setpoint.
H.
I. Horizontal Unit Heater w/hot water & aquastat
A wall or unit mounted electric thermostat opens a 2-way heating valve and cycles the unit heater
fan to maintain the space temperature at setpoint. A strap-on aquastat prevents the unit heater fan
from operating if hot water is not available.
K. Elevator Machine Room (Air Conditioned): A room sensor shall energize A/C unit in stages to
maintain setpoint 80 deg. F (adj.).

1. Upon a call for heating by space sensor the electric duct heater shall cycle to maintain
setpoint 60 deg. F (adj.).
2. Unit fan shall run continuously during heating and cooling modes of operations.
All mechanical equipment serving elevator equipment rooms on emergency power must be con-
nected to emergency power.
L. Chilled Water Plant Operation:

1. General:
This section covers the operation of the chiller plant equipment CH-1 and cooling
towers. Operation of CT-1, is determined by the time of day and by outside air tem-
perature. During occupied mode, if outside air temperature is greater than 50 deg F as
sensed by outside air temperature sensor, then the chiller plant will be activated “ON”,
and all chiller staging, as defined below, shall be initiated. Chiller plant “ON/OFF”
point may be overridden by the operator to turn the chiller plant on or off, if desired.
2. Chiller Start Sequence:
EMCS shall provide a virtual point to determine whether CH-1 or CH-2 is the lead
chiller in the Chiller Plant Staging Sequence, see below. This point may be com-
manded by the operator during the unoccupied mode, so that the chillers will be al-
ternated during the next start up routine. If chiller CH-1 is to be started, then CWP-1
(condenser pump) and CHP-1 (chilled water pump) will start. If chiller CH-2 is to be
started, then CWP-3(condenser pump) and CHP-3 (chilled water pump) will start.
CWP-2 (condenser pump) and CHP-2 (chilled water pump) are back-up pumps
which will be manually brought into service as needed. The start-up will occur using
the following sequence:
a. BAS shall start chilled water pump.
b. BAS shall check for proof of flow of chilled water pump.
c. BAS shall enable the chiller for operation.
d. BAS shall wait for confirmation from the chiller that is ready for condenser
water flow. This is done via pair of dry contacts from the chiller control pan-
el to the BAS Panel. When BAS receives confirmation, it shall start con-
denser water pump.
e. BAS shall check for proof of flow of condenser water pump.
f. Flow switches are hardwired to the chiller microprocessor control panel.

Once these switches have established chilled water and condenser water
flow, chiller established chilled water and condenser water flow, chiller mi-
croprocessor control panel will start the chiller.
g. If chilled water flow is not established within 10 seconds (adjustable) after

the chilled water pump is energized by the BAS or fails during operation, the
BAS will lock out this chilled water pump and alarm the Operator’s Work

Station (OWS). Maintenance staff must manually position isolation valves to
allow standby pump to run. Back-up pump shall be manually started from
the BAS when required.
h. If condenser water flow is not established within 10 seconds (adjustable) af-

ter the condenser water pump is energized by the BAS or fails during opera-
tion, the BAS will lock out this condenser water pump and alarm the Opera-
tor’s Work Station (OWS). Maintenance staff must manually position isola-
tion valves to allow back-up pump CWP-2 to run. Back-up pump shall be
manually started from the BAS when required.
3. Chiller Stop Sequence – All Chillers:
a. BAS shall first disable the chiller and then de-energize the chilled water
pump(s) simultaneously.
b. Prior to de-energizing the condenser water pumps, the BAS will le the con-
denser water pump(s) run for two minutes.
4. Cooling Tower Control:
When chiller CH-1 is in operation, then all isolation valves will be open, and the
BAS will control the fan VFD’s to maintain the condenser water temperature set-
point.
Condenser water supply temperature setpoint shall be 85F (adjustable).
Three way bypass valves shall modulate to enable winter start-up.
Free Cooling Mode HX-1: When the outside air temperature falls below 45 degrees
F bulb, the free cooling mode is initiated. During Free cooling, the chillers are de-
energized, valves V-1 and V-2 shall be opened, valves V-3 and V-4 shall be closed
and the condenser water shall flow through the heat exchanger. The cooling tower
fans shall cycle to maintain a condenser water supply temperature of 42 degrees F
dry bulb.
When the chilled water supply temperature exceeds 50 degrees F for a least five mi-
nutes (adjustable) the system shall be indexed for the mechanical cooling mode.
During the mechanical mode, valves V-1 and V-2 shall close, V-3 and/or V-4 shall
open, the chiller sequencing mode shall be energized and the lead chiller differential
pressure sensors shall modulate the by-pass valve V-5 and cycle the tower fans to
maintain the chiller differential pressure setting. The chillers shall maintain the pri-
mary chilled water supply temperature (adjustable) through the chiller sequencing
program. Whenever a chiller is indexed to start, its respective isolation valve shall
open.
5. Variable Speed Chilled Water Pump Control:

a. The chilled water pump is a variable speed drive pump.
b. The secondary chilled water loop shall be equipped with a remote differential
pressure sensor. DPTE-1. This sensor shall monitor remote differential pres-
sure across the secondary chilled water systems supply and return water pip-
ing.
c. BAS will vary the speed of the chilled water pump to maintain remote diffe-
rential pressure setpoint (20 psi, adjustable) as sensed by remote differential
pressure sensor. The rate of flow change should be a maximum of 10% of
the change per minute or as recommended by chiller manufacturer. Do not
reduce the flow lower than the chiller manufacturer recommended minimum
flows.
d. If chilled water flow is not established within 10 seconds (adjustable) after

the secondary chilled water pump is energized by the BAS, or if a pump fails
during operation, the BAS will lock out the chilled water pump and alarm the
Operator’s Work Station (OWS).
M. Centrifugal Chiller:
1. General: The stand alone microprocessor based chiller control panel shall monitor
and control the chiller(s) in a stand alone mode or as directed by the chiller sequencing
software.
The chiller sequencing software shall perform the following control strategies, provide
the points listed on the chiller point list and support their specified monitoring and di-
agnostics.
2. System Scheduling: The chiller sequencing software will start the chiller system based
upon an 8 day (7 + Holiday) time of day schedule.
An override input will allow an external device to lock out chiller system operation.
3. Chiller Sequencing: The EMCS software will start and stop system water pumps and
chillers based upon the loading of the operating chillers, occupied/unoccupied operation
shall be incorporated.
a. When the chilled system is enabled the EMCS system control will:
1. Start the system chilled/condenser pump.

2. Allow the EMCS to start the pump and provide flow through the
evaporator.
3. Allow the EMCS to start the condenser water pump.
4. Start the lead chiller after both chilled and condenser water pump
flow is proven.
ii. Upon sensing a chiller failure the EMCS software shall lockout that
chiller and pump.

4. Chiller Soft Start: The Chiller sequencing software will provide a user adjustable loading
time at system start-up to limit system electrical demand during chilled loop pulldown.
5. Chilled Reset: Provide reset of the chilled supply temperature setpoint based on return
water. The reset parameters shall be user selectable.
6. Chiller Demand Limiting: As part of the demand limit scheme on the building, the chiller
sequencing software shall be able to monitor and reduce peak power demand through the
limiting of chiller system capacity.
7. Chiller System Status Display: The chiller sequencing software shall provide an operating
status report for the system. The display shall include:
a. System Chilled Setpoint

b. System Chilled Temperature.
c. System Current Limit Setpoint.
d. System Load.
e. Condenser System Temperature.
f. System Diagnostics.
g. Individual Chiller diagnostics.
8. Individual Chiller Status Display: The chiller sequencing software shall provide an oper-
ating status report for each chiller. This display shall include:
a. Chiller Operating Mode.

b. Chilled Water Setpoint.
c. Chilled Water Temperature.
d. Current Limit Setpoint.
e. Chiller Load.
9. Diagnostics/Protection: The EMCS software shall be able to alarm from all sensed points
and diagnostic alarms sensed by the chiller controller.
a. Alarm limits shall be designated for all sensed points.
10. When interfaced with a Energy Management System (EMS) the following features shall
be provided at the Central Building Control Station.
a. A refrigeration monitor shall provide an analog output (0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA)
that corresponds to the level of refrigerant detected by the monitor. This signal
shall be used to generate an electronic log of the refrigerant level in the Mechani-
cal Equipment Room. An increase in detected refrigerant levels shall trigger a di-
agnostic alarm indicating a refrigerant leak and the system should be checked.
b. The EMS shall monitor the following alarms:
1. Alarm status of Refrigerant Monitor and provide an alarm for the

following points:
a. Monitor malfunction
b. Refrigerant alarm triggered at the Acceptable Exposure
Limit (AEL) for the refrigerant in use.

c. Refrigerant level alarm triggered at 3 times the (AEL)
for the refrigerant in use.
c. The EMS shall be tied to the Mechanical Equipment Room ventilation system to
provide control of both normal and purge ventilation of the Mechanical Equip-
ment Room. This control shall be in parallel to the primary control of the ventila-
tion fans by the refrigerant monitor.
d. The building automation system shall monitor the following points as outlined in
ASHRAE Guideline 3-1990 and automatically make a daily log.
1. Chilled water inlet temperature.

2. Chilled water outlet temperature.
3. Chilled water flow.
4. Chilled water pressure drop.
5. Evaporator refrigerant pressure.
6. Evaporator refrigerant temperature.
7. Evaporator approach temperature.
8. Condenser water inlet temperature.
9. Condenser water outlet temperature.
10. Condenser water flow.
11. Condenser water pressure drop.
12. Condenser refrigerant pressure.
13. Condenser refrigerant temperature.
14. Condenser approach temperature.
15. Oil pressures.
16. Oil temperature.
17. Compressor refrigerant discharge temperature.
18. Compressor refrigerant suction temperature.
11. Condenser Water Limiting: The EMS will provide a two step signal to the tower control-
ler based on evaporator – condenser refrigerant temperature difference to call for warmer
condenser.
N. Refrigerant Detection Control: EMS will monitor the alarm contacts on the Refrigerant Monitor-
ing Alarm Panel through the digital input point. When a refrigerant alarm is detected, EMS shall
energize penthouse supply and exhaust fans. EMS will simultaneously alarm the OWS.
a. Alarm horns and lights located at the chiller plant room doors shall be energized automat-
ically. Alarm panel light and horn shall return to normal operation when acknowledged at
the control panel.
b. The refrigeration plant shall comply with ASHRAE 15-1994. Contractor shall provide all
devices necessary to comply.
O. Where required, all control dampers to open prior to equipment operation. Provide damper end
switches per sequences and points list. All supply and return dampers shall fail open, and all out-
door air and relief dampers shall fail closed.

P. Toilet Exhaust Fan Control: These fans shall be started and stopped though the BAS using en-
hanced time-of-day according to the owner defined schedule
Q. Kitchen Exhaust Fan and Dishwasher Exhaust Fan: Fans shall be started and stopped by hood sys-
tem control package. The BAS shall provide points to monitor the status of the exhaust fans via
current sensing relays and record the run time of the fan which can be checked at any time.
R. Monitoring of Plumbing Equipment: Controls Contractor shall furnish interfaces as needed to

monitor operation of plumbing equipment including boilers, sump pumps, sewage ejectors,
booster pumps and other major pieces of equipment. Coordinate with plumbing equipment sup-
plier as required.
AA. HEATING WATER PLANT OPERATION
The heating water system consists of two hot water boilers with dedicated heating water
pumps for AHU’s and FCU’s. The system is DDC controlled.
The system operates with a factory boiler control system interfaced with the BAS system.
1. When multiple condensing boilers are to be installed in a common hydronic loop, a sequenc-
ing control system shall be provided to stage and control firing rate of the boilers. To ensure
proper integration with the Pulse boiler controls, the boiler manufacturer shall supply a Mod-
Sync Sequencing Control System as designed by Fulton Heating Solutions, Inc. The Pulse
boilers shall be sequenced as follows to maximize their operating efficiency:
a. The ModSync Sequencing Control System shall monitor the outdoor temperature and
calculate a water loop temperature setpoint based on the selectable preset values. The
ModSync Sequencing System will begin sequencing the condensing boilers based on the
difference between the actual water loop temperature and the calculated (outdoor air) wa-
ter temperature.
b. When a requirement for heat is determined by the ModSync, the Lead Boiler is energized
and its firing rate is maintained at low fire.
c. If the water loop temperature continues to decrease, the ModSync will enable a Lag Boi-
ler. The first Lag Boiler is energized and the lag boiler’s firing rate is maintained at low
fire.
d. If additional heat is required, the ModSync will enable each additional Lag Boiler stage
until all of the available condensing boilers in the water loop have been energized. Each
boiler stage will remain at low fire until all of the stages have been enabled.
e. If all of the condensing boilers are enabled and additional heat is required, the ModSync
will release the boilers to modulate. The condensing boilers will modulate together as a
single unit to keep the condensing boiler system at the lowest possible firing rate.
f. As the water loop temperature increases, the ModSync will decrease the firing rate of the
condensing boilers to maintain the water loop temperature. If all of the condensing boi-
lers are at low fire and the water loop temperature continues to rise, the BMS will begin
to stage the boilers off. The first lag boiler energized will be the first boiler to be dis-

abled. The condensing boilers will continue to be disabled by the ModSync based on the
temperature rise of the water loop.
g. The Lead Boiler is disabled when the water loop temperature reaches a selectable value
referenced around the water loop setpoint.
2. The ModSync Sequencing Control System will be a microprocessor based Programmable

Logic Controller with a Graphical User Interface and Touch Screen capabilities. Active dis-
play area will be a minimum of 4.7” with a display resolution of 320 x 240 pixels. Multiple
Status and Configuration Screens will be available for easy interpretation of the hydronic
loop status and configuration. The ModSync enclosure will be NEMA 4X construction.
Power required for the ModSync will be 120/60/1.
3. The ModSync will have the ability to communicate to a Building Management System using
Modbus RTU (RS-485) or accept a 4-20mA Remote Setpoint signal. BacNet and LonWorks
protocols can be used through a gateway, if requested.
4. The ModSync Sequencing Control shall include automatic rotation of the lead boiler based on
a user configured cycle count. Manual selection of the Lead boiler will also be available
through a Setup Menu.
5. Outdoor and Loop Header Temperature sensors supplied with the ModSync shall be PT100
RTD type.
6. The ModSync Sequencing Control will provide an adjustable reset schedule based on the
outdoor temperature. A linear outdoor reset ratio will be determined based on user defined
hydronic loop temperatures at 50ºF and 0ºF outdoor temperatures. A reference graphic will
be displayed on the ModSync representing the reset loop temperature vs outdoor temperature
calculated ratio. A user defined Outdoor Temp Disable parameter will be provided to turn off
all Pulse boilers if a predetermined outdoor temperature is reached. Minimum and Maximum
Loop Temperature parameters will be provided for both Occupied and Unoccupied modes.
This will prevent the outdoor reset schedule from operating outside of a user defined tem-
perature range.
7. Provisions will be provided that monitor the Pulse Boiler’s outlet temperature and adjusts the
firing rate if the boiler’s outlet temperature exceeds a user defined value above the loop set-
point. This is beneficial for variable flow loops to prevent high temperature limit alarms.
8. Multiple setback schedules shall be available based on whether the building is in Occupied or
Unoccupied mode. Building Mode selection shall be determined by a user defined Time of
Day / Day of Week Touchscreen entry. The Building Mode will automatically change be-
tween Occupied and Unoccupied based on the user programmed day and times. Manual

Building Mode control shall also be available via a Setup menu. Building Mode shall be indi-
cated on the Loop Status Screen for ease of reference.
9. The ModSync Sequencing Control will provide alarm annunciation of each Pulse Boiler con-
nected to the network. The ModSync will automatically adjust the Pulse boiler sequencing
schedule and remove the boiler from the sequencing logic if an alarm occurs. The Pulse boi-
ler will automatically be added back into the rotation loop as soon as the ModSync senses
that the alarm has been cleared.
10. The ModSync will stage the Pulse boilers based on a PID generated value. The Proportional,
Integral and Derivative values shall be user defined through the Lead/Lag Configuration
Screen. Each Pulse boiler stage will be enabled based on a user defined “Percentage from
Setpoint” control variable. Properly tuned loops will provide temperature control accuracy
up to +/- 2ºF. Pulse Boiler Sequencing Start and Stop parameters shall be user defined
through the operator interface. A Manual Reset parameter will be provided to allow the Pro-
portional Band to be shifted around setpoint.
11. The ModSync shall provide capabilities to Enable/Disable the Pulse boilers through the oper-
ator interface. Boilers that are disabled will not be included in the sequencing logic.
12. A user defined time delay parameter will be provided that delays enabling of the next Pulse
boiler stage. This helps to decrease cycling of the Pulse Boilers when the heat load is close to
being met.
13. Provisions for Domestic Hot Water Priority shall be available if required. Domestic Hot Wa-
ter priority will override the outdoor temperature reset schedule when required.
14. The ModSync will provide the capability control System Pumps if requested. System Pump
configuration can either be accomplished through main loop pumps or dedicated pumps at
each boiler. The ModSync will provide a user defined time delay to keep the pump energized
for a certain time after the Pulse boilers have been turned off.
BB. HEATING WATER PUMPS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Balancing Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.
2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:
a. Constant-flow hydronic systems.

b. Variable-flow hydronic systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. LEED Submittal:
1. Air-Balance Report for LEED Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation of work performed for

ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."

Allen & Shariff Engineering TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
B. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation
that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified
in "Quality Assurance" Article.
C. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,

submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
D. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB
strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
E. Certified TAB reports.
F. Sample report forms.
G. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:
1. Instrument type and make.

2. Serial number.
3. Application.
4. Dates of use.
5. Dates of calibration.
A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC.
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC.
2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC as a
TAB technician.
B. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner and Commissioning Authority on approval of the TAB
strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the
participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide seven days' advance notice
of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items:
a. The Contract Documents examination report.

b. The TAB plan.
c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
d. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
C. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Owner and
Commissioning Authority.
E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111,

Section 5, "Instrumentation."
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB
period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial
Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify
that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to
verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Division 15 Section

"Metal Ducts" and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in
plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.
F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects
that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or
part of a system.
2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment
performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in
AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."
Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,
cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned
and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated
perforations.
L. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or
mixing fluid flows.
M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.

2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.

3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" and in this Section.
1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness
as used to construct ducts.
2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with
requirements in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,
coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 15 Section "HVAC Insulation."
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position
indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other
suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts."
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1. Measure total airflow.
a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse

measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total
airflow.
2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.
4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-
recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus
actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments
to accommodate actual conditions.
6. Obtain approval from Owner and Commissioning Authority for adjustment of fan speed
higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Sections
for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated
air-handling-unit performance.

7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-
heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required
brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.
2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written

instructions and calculating factors.
D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of
indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and
the dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end
of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct
variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
general preparation procedures specified above:
1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

2. Check liquid level in expansion tank.
3. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.

5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at
fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal
valves are kept open.
6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so
motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement
pumps:
1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read
pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for
differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow
and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.
a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval

from Owner and Commissioning Authority and comply with requirements in
Division 15 Section "Hydronic Pumps."
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the
pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve
until indicated water flow is achieved.
a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in

overload conditions.
3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the
system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as
designed.
C. Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open
position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.
D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop

relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

F. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5
percent greater than indicated flow.
G. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated
flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
H. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.
I. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.
J. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.
3.8 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at
maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic
systems.
3.9 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Measure water flow through all circuits.
B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.
C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.
D. Measure inlet steam pressure.
E. Check settings and operation of safety and relief valves. Record settings.
3.10 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper
operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number,
serial number, and nameplate data.
3.11 PROCEDURES FOR CHILLERS
A. Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within specified tolerances of
indicated flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller
installation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller
manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design
conditions:
1. Evaporator-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow.
2. For water-cooled chillers, condenser-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure
drop, and water flow.
3. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments
furnished by chiller manufacturer.
4. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.
5. Kilowatt input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.
6. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling.
7. For air-cooled chillers, verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan and motor data
including number of fans and entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
3.12 PROCEDURES FOR COOLING TOWERS
A. Shut off makeup water for the duration of the test, and verify that makeup and blowdown
systems are fully operational after tests and before leaving the equipment. Perform the
following tests and record the results:
1. Measure condenser-water flow to each cell of the cooling tower.

2. Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures.
3. Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of entering air.
4. Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of leaving air.
5. Measure condenser-water flow rate recirculating through the cooling tower.
6. Measure cooling-tower spray pump discharge pressure.
7. Adjust water level and feed rate of makeup water system.
8. Measure flow through bypass.
3.13 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
A. Verify proper rotation of fans.
B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
C. Record compressor data.

3.14 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS
A. Hydronic Boilers: Measure and record entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water
flow.
3.15 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:
1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature.

2. Water flow rate.
3. Water pressure drop.
4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.
6. Airflow.
7. Air pressure drop.
B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:
1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
3. Airflow.
4. Air pressure drop.
5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
3.16 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3.17 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures,

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems
found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each
building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.18 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections
for tested systems and balanced systems.
1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the
certified testing and balancing engineer.
2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and
product data.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.

h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).
j. Number, make, and size of belts.
k. Number, type, and size of filters.
2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total air flow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
i. Outdoor airflow in cfm (L/s).
j. Return airflow in cfm (L/s).

k. Outdoor-air damper position.
l. Return-air damper position.
m. Vortex damper position.
F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:
1. Coil Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm) o.c.
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
h. Tube size in NPS (DN).
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
a. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Average face velocity in fpm (m/s).
c. Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa).
d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
h. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).
i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
j. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig (kPa).
n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F (deg C).
o. Inlet steam pressure in psig (kPa).
G. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup
equipment reports, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
f. Fuel type in input data.
g. Output capacity in Btu/h (kW).
h. Ignition type.

i. Burner-control types.
j. Motor horsepower and rpm.
k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.
l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.
m. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
n. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).
a. Total air flow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C).
c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).
d. Air temperature differential in deg F (deg C).
e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
h. Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h (kW).
i. High-fire fuel input in Btu/h (kW).
j. Manifold pressure in psig (kPa).
k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F (deg C).
l. Operating set point in Btu/h (kW).
m. Motor voltage at each connection.
n. Motor amperage for each phase.
o. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h (kW).
H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data:
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).
2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).
g. Number, make, and size of belts.

a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data:
a. System and air-handling-unit number.

b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C).
d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Duct size in inches (mm).
f. Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm (L/s).
h. Indicated velocity in fpm (m/s).
i. Actual air flow rate in cfm (L/s).
j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s).
k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa).
J. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. System and air-handling-unit identification.

b. Location and zone.
c. Room or riser served.
d. Coil make and size.
e. Flowmeter type.
a. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig (kPa).
e. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C).
f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).
K. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and
include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Service.

d. Make and size.
e. Model number and serial number.
f. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).
g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig (kPa).
i. Pump rpm.
j. Impeller diameter in inches (mm).
k. Motor make and frame size.
l. Motor horsepower and rpm.
m. Voltage at each connection.
n. Amperage for each phase.
o. Full-load amperage and service factor.
p. Seal type.
a. Static head in feet of head or psig (kPa).

b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
c. Actual impeller size in inches (mm).
d. Full-open flow rate in gpm (L/s).
e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
i. Final water flow rate in gpm (L/s).
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.
L. Instrument Calibration Reports:
1. Report Data:
a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.19 INSPECTIONS
A. Initial Inspection:
1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check
measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance
readings documented in the final report.
2. Check the following for each system:
a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.

b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.

c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the
reading to the set point.
d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
e. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.
B. Final Inspection:
1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that
testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request
that a final inspection be made by Owner.
2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the
presence of Owner.
3. Owner shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be
rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements
recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour
business day.
4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the
final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as
"FAILED."
5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be
considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails,
proceed as follows:
1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing
device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final
inspection.
2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB
contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the
cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.
3.20 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions
are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

SECTION 15995
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The purpose of this section is to specify Division 15 responsibilities in the

commissioning process.
B. Refer to Section 01810 and 16995 for other commissioning requirements.
C. Commissioning requires the participation of Division 15 to ensure that all systems are
operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. The general commissioning
requirements and coordination are detailed in Division 1. Division 15 shall be familiar with
all parts of Division 01 and shall execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them
in the Contract Documents.
D. With respect to HVAC commissioning, the Mechanical and Electrical contractors shall:
Include cost for HVAC commissioning requirements, as it pertains to this and other Cx sections and the
Preliminary Cx Plan posted in Div.1, in the quoted price.
Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CxA.
Schedule work so that required installations are completed, and systems verification checks and
functional performance tests can be carried out on schedule.
Inspect, check and confirm in writing the proper installation and performance of all mechanical and
electrical systems provided.
Provide mechanical and electrical system technicians to assist during system verification and functional
performance testing as required by the CxA.
Review specification Division 1 and 16 to fully understand their responsibilities as they pertain to the
commissioning processes.
1.02 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Mechanical. The commissioning responsibilities applicable to each of the contractors of

Division 15 are as follows (all references apply to commissioned equipment only):
Construction and Acceptance Phases

1. Include cost of commissioning in the contract price.
2. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal
data, commissioning documentation, testing assistance, O&M data and training.
3. Attend the commissioning scoping meeting and other meetings necessary to
facilitate the Cx process. Commissioning shall be discussed monthly, as a
regular agenda item during the normal construction meetings, and minutes
submitted to CxA for review.

Allen & Shariff Engineering MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
4. Contractors shall provide the CxA with normal cut sheets and shop drawing
submittals of commissioned equipment.
5. Provide additional requested documentation, prior to normal O&M manual
submittals, to the CxA for development of start-up, review and functional testing
procedures.
a. Typically this will include detailed manufacturer installation and start-
up, operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures, full details
of any Owner-contracted tests, fan and pump curves, full factory testing
reports, if any, and full warranty information, including all
responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force clearly
identified. In addition, the installation, start-up and checkout materials
that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field
checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall
be submitted to the CxA.
b. The CxA may request further documentation necessary for the
commissioning process.
c. This data request may be made prior to normal submittals.
6. Provide a copy of the O&M manuals and submittals of commissioned

equipment, through normal channels, to the CxA for review and approval.
7. Contractors shall assist (along with the design engineers) in clarifying the
operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the
Specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient
for writing detailed testing procedures.
8. Develop a full start-up and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s start-up
procedures. Submit to CxA for review and approval prior to start-up. Refer to
Section 01810 for further details on start-up plan preparation.
9. During the start-up and initial checkout process, execute and document the
mechanical-related portions of the prefunctional checklists for all commissioned
equipment. Startup will not be considered complete until documentation is
complete and approved by the CxA.
10. Perform and clearly document all completed start-up and system operational
checkout procedures, providing a copy to the CxA.
11. Address current A/E punch and Action list items before functional testing. Air
and water TAB shall be completed with discrepancies and problems remedied
before functional testing of the respective air- or water-related systems.
12. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to assist the
functional performance tests for all commissioned equipment. Ensure that they
are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient
duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem-solving.
13. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance)
as interpreted by the CxA and A/E and retest the equipment.
14. Prepare O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents, including
clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.
15. During construction, maintain as-built red-line drawings for all drawings and
final CAD as-builts for contractor-generated coordination drawings. Update after
completion of commissioning (excluding deferred testing).

16. Provide training of the Owner’s operating staff using expert qualified personnel,
as specified.
17. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to
maintain the validity of the warranty.
Warranty Period
1. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-
built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.
B. Mechanical Contractor and TAB. The responsibilities of the HVAC mechanical and
TAB contractors, during construction and acceptance phases in addition to those listed in
(A) are:
1. Provide start-up for all HVAC equipment, and for the building automation
control system.
2. Assist and cooperate with the TAB contractor and CxA by:
a. Putting all HVAC equipment and systems into operation and continuing
the operation during each working day of TAB and commissioning, as
required.
b. Including cost of sheaves and belts that may be required by TAB.
3 Prepare a preliminary schedule for Division 15 pipe and duct system testing,
flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up and TAB start and completion for use
by the CxA. Update the schedule as appropriate.
4. Notify the CM/GC when pipe and duct system testing, flushing, cleaning, start-
up of each piece of equipment and TAB will occur. Be responsible to notify the
CM/GC ahead of time, when commissioning activities not yet performed or not
yet scheduled will delay construction. Be proactive in seeing that
commissioning processes are executed and that the CxA has the scheduling
information needed to efficiently execute the commissioning process.
C.TAB Contractor. The duties of the TAB contractor, in addition to those listed in (A) are:
1. Submit the outline of the TAB plan and approach for each system and
component to the CxA, CM/GC and the Controls Contractor six weeks prior to
starting the TAB. This plan will be developed after the TAB has some
familiarity with the control system.
2. The submitted plan will include:
a. Certification that the TAB contractor has reviewed the construction
documents and the systems with the design engineers and contractors to
sufficiently understand the design intent for each system.
b. An explanation of the intended use of the building control system. The
Controls Contractor will comment on feasibility of the plan.
c. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct
drawings during the process.
d. Final test report forms to be used.
e. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and
issue: terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type), diffuser

proportioning, branch / submain proportioning, total flow calculations,
rechecking, diversity issues, expected problems and solutions, etc.
Criteria for using air flow straighteners or relocating flow stations and
sensors will be discussed.
f. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and
efficiency measurements to be performed and a description of specific
test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used.
g. The identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and
their most recent calibration date.
h. Specific procedures that will ensure that the air side is operating at the
lowest possible pressures and provide methods to verify this.
i. Details of how building static and exhaust fan / relief damper capacity
will be checked.
j. Proposed selection points for sound measurements and sound
measurement methods.
k. Details of all exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including
any required room pressure differentials.
l. Plan for hand-written field technician logs of discrepancies, deficient or
uncompleted work by others, contract interpretation requests and lists of
completed tests (scope and frequency).
m. Plan for formal progress reports (scope and frequency).
n. Plan for formal deficiency reports (scope, frequency and distribution).
3. A running log of events and issues shall be kept by the TAB field technicians.
Submit hand-written reports of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by
others, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests to the CxA
and CM/GC at least weekly.
4. Communicate in writing to the Controls Contractor all setpoint and parameter
changes made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB which affect
the control system setup and operation.
5. Provide a draft TAB report within two weeks of completion. A copy will be
provided to the CxA. The report will contain a full explanation of the
methodology, assumptions and the results in a clear format with designations of
all uncommon abbreviations and column headings. The report should follow the
latest and most rigorous reporting recommendations by AABC, ASHRAE
Standard 111.
6. Provide the CxA with any requested data, gathered, but not shown on the draft
reports.
7. Provide a final TAB report for the CxA with details, as in the draft.
8. Conduct functional performance tests and checks on the original TAB as
specified for TAB in Division 1 and 15.
D. Architect, Owner, Electrical and Mechanical Designer. Refer to Section 01810
E. Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Contractor: Refer to Division 01 and 23.

ATC Contractor is responsible to act as a Cx team member and issue to the CxA for review
and comment, their prefunctional plan (point to point and startup) and be onsite and
available to perform all required system commissioning.
All ATC/BAS graphics and sequences are to be demonstrated to the CxA prior to functional
testing.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Division 1 for a listing of all sections where commissioning requirements are
found.
B. Refer to Division 1 for sections involving related commissioning work; for functional
testing requirements, and preliminary Cx Plan.
1.04 COMMISSIONED SYSTEMS
A. The following systems and equipment (including all integral equipment controls) will be
commissioned in this project. All general references to equipment in this document refer
only to equipment that is to be commissioned.
Refer to Division 01810 for systems to be commissioned
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Division 15 shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the testing requirements
of this Division.
B. Refer to Division 1 for additional Division 15 requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 15 shall provide submittal documentation relative to commissioning as required

in this Division 1.
3.02 START-UP
A. The HVAC mechanical Contractor shall follow the start-up and initial checkout
procedures listed in the Responsibilities list in this Division 1. Division 15 has start-up
responsibility and is required to complete systems and sub-systems so they are fully

functional, meeting the design objectives of the Contract Documents. The
commissioning procedures and functional testing do not relieve or lessen this
responsibility or shift that responsibility partially to the CxA or Owner.
B. Functional testing is intended to begin upon completion of a system. Functional testing

may proceed prior to the completion of systems or sub-systems at the discretion of the
CxA and CM/GC. Beginning system testing before full completion does not relieve the
Contractor from fully completing the system, including all prefunctional checklists as
soon as possible.
3.03 TAB
A. Refer to the TAB responsibilities in Part 1 and 2 above.
3.04 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. Refer to this section and the Cx Plan for a list of systems to be commissioned.
B. The CxA shall create the functional performance procedures and guideline after review
and comment of the equipment startup documents supplied by the contractor.
C. The CxA is to witness and document the functional performance testing. All hands on
testing and equipment required by the CxA is to be supplied and performed by the
contractor. The contractor’s fees are to be included in their base bid.
D. If more than one return visit is required by the CxA due to failed systems, the contractor
is responsible for the CxA team hourly rate and expenses.
3.05 TESTING DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVALS
A. Refer to Section 01810 for issues relating to functional performance tests.
3.06
A. Special TAB Documentation Requirements. The TAB will compile and submit the
following with other documentation that may be specified elsewhere in the
Specifications.
1. Final report containing an explanation of the methodology, assumptions, test

conditions and the results in a clear format with designations of all uncommon
abbreviations and column headings.
2. The TAB shall mark on the drawings where all traverse and other critical
measurements were taken and cross reference the location in the TAB report.
B. Review and Approvals. Review of the commissioning related sections of the O&M
manuals shall be made by the A/E and by the CxA. Refer to Division 1 for details.

3.07 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL
A. The CM/GC shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately
to ensure that training is completed.
B. TAB:The TAB contractor shall have the following training responsibilities:
1. After completion of TAB, TAB shall meet with facility staff for the number of
hours specified in the contract documents, and shall instruct them on the
following:
a) Go over the final TAB report, explaining the layout and meanings of
each data type.
b) Discuss any outstanding deficient items in control, ducting or design that
may affect the proper delivery of air.
c) Identify and discuss any duct runs, diffusers, coils, fans and pumps that
are close to or are not meeting their design capacity.
d) Discuss any temporary settings and steps to finalize them for any areas
that are not finished.
e) Other salient information that may be useful for facility operations,
relative to TAB.
CxA does not oversee or document training
3.08 WRITTEN WORK PRODUCTS
A. Written work products of Contractors will consist of the start-up and initial checkout
plan described in Section 01810 and the executed start-up, initial checkout and
prefunctional checklists.


Section 15053 Common Work Results For Hvac

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Section 15053 Common Work Results For Hvac

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SECTION 15053

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

Mt. Pleasant Library 15053-1 4 December 2009

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

A. Product Data: For the following:

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics

Mt. Pleasant Library 15053-2 4 December 2009

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

Mt. Pleasant Library 15053-3 4 December 2009

H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent

a. Thompson Plastics, Inc.

Mt. Pleasant Library 15053-4 4 December 2009

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

Mt. Pleasant Library 15053-5 4 December 2009

2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

Mt. Pleasant Library 15053-6 4 December 2009

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: [Polished chrome-plated] [Rough brass] [Polished chrome-plated and rough

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: [Polished chrome-plated] [Rough brass] [Polished chrome-plated and rough

G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

Mt. Pleasant Library 15053-7 4 December 2009

3.1 HVAC DEMOLITION

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or

C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,

3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

Mt. Pleasant Library 15053-8 4 December 2009

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

Mt. Pleasant Library 15053-9 4 December 2009

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

Mt. Pleasant Library 15053-10 4 December 2009

U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION